4f%                      Air                                                        EPA-420-B-94-003

                                                                                   September 1994

    United
    Environmental Protection         	       	
    Agency





                                                                                for



                         I/M

-------
Supplemental  Guidance  for I/M Programs:

 Vehicle Repair,  Technical Assistance,
 Performance Monitoring,  and Technician
      Education and Certification
      Emission Planning and Strategies Division
             Office of Mobile Sources
        U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
             Final — September, 1994

-------
                             PREFACE

     This document is intended as a resource for state and local
Inspection and Maintenance  (I/M)  planners and administrators.
They in turn should share it with automotive technician
educators, citizen groups, repair industry professional groups,
interested local press, individual technicians, etc.

     This document updates and expands the version of the
document released on March 24, 1993.  The previous version was
intended basically as an outline to let reviewers know the goal
of the final document and to provide some preliminary information
to states and others.  Due to the importance of providing
guidance on I/M issues to state and local agencies in a timely
manner, portions of this document  (e.g., Sections 3 and 4) have
been released previously under the following titles: Supplemental
Guidance for I/M Programs: Performance Monitoring, Supplemental
Guidance for I/M Programs: Hotline Services, and Supplemental
Guidance for I/M Programs: Repair Training and Certification.
All three documents have been released as drafts for public
comment.  The information in these documents has been revised
based on public comments.  The first two documents were issued in
final form April 13, 1994.  The third one, issued as a draft in
April 1994 will not be released in final form as a stand alone
document.  Instead, it has been incorporated into this document
in revised form.  Sections 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, all of 2.0, and 3.1
appear here for the first time as newly released guidance
relevant to I/M programs.  These sections deal with I/M related
regulatory requirements, effects of the requirements on the
repair industry, the role of the local or State agency, enhanced
I/M and motor vehicle repair, and providing information to repair
facilities, respectively.  Appendix 2, which contains sample I/M
newsletters, also appears here for the first time.

     This document provides guidance regarding requirements
outlined in 40 CFR §51.368 and §51.369 of the Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M)  program regulation.  This guidance focuses
specifically on §51.368 (a), which addresses public awareness
requirements,  and §51.369 (a),  (b) , and  (c), which address
technical assistance, performance monitoring, and repair
technician education, respectively.

     The public awareness requirement in §51.368 (a)  must be met
in both basic and enhanced I/M areas, and requires that the SIP
include a plan for informing the public about various I/M related
issues.  It also requires that motorists failing I/M be provided
with information on results of repairs performed by facilities in
the area, as well as diagnostic information on the parts of the
test that were failed by their vehicle.

     The technical assistance requirement under §51.369(a) must

-------
also be met in basic and enhanced I/M areas.  This requirement
states that the oversight agency must provide the repair industry
with information and assistance related to vehicle inspection,
diagnosis, and repair.  This includes a requirement that states
provide a repair technician hotline.

     The performance monitoring requirement under §51.369 (b)  is
required in enhanced areas, although it is encouraged in basic
areas as well.  The oversight agency in an enhanced I/M area is
required to do the following:  1)  provide the public a summary of
the performance of local repair facilities, 2)  provide feedback
to the individual repair facilities, and 3) require a completed
repair form as a prerequisite for a retest.  Although tracking is
a new concept in most I/M areas,  a few basic I/M areas have
recognized its value and established programs voluntarily with
general acceptance by the repair industry and public appreciation
for the service.

      The repair technician training requirement under 51.369(c)
requires that adequate training must be available in both basic
and enhanced I/M areas.   Although it is not necessary for the
state to conduct the training,  the state must take action to get
adequate training programs started at local community colleges or
vocational schools, or to attract private training providers to
offer the kinds of training needed.  The rule also specifies
various areas of training which must be included.  Although
technician or facility certification is not required, they could
be natural extensions of a state's technician training program.

     Besides requirements under §51.368 and §51.369 of the I/M
rule, the guidance document discusses motor vehicle repair issues
related to I/M, such as  preconditioning and failure verification,
diagnosis and repair of  emission failures, diagnostic equipment
and tools, and parts and catalyst issues.  The guidance also
discusses EPA and CARB regulatory requirements which are related
to repair, certification, training, and performance monitoring.

     For basic areas with decentralized programs, all I/M program
requirements, including  those discussed in this guidance which
are applicable, must be  in place by January 1,  1994.  For basic
areas with centralized programs,  the requirements must be in
place by July 1, 1995.  For enhanced I/M areas, requirements must
be in place by January 1, 1995.  It should be emphasized that
areas of the country that choose to opt into either the basic or
enhanced I/M programs must also adopt the entire I/M program if
they wish to receive standard MOBILE credit in their SIP
submittal.
                               11

-------
Table of Contents
1.0  INTRODUCTION
     1.1  I/M Statutory Requirements
     1.2  I/M Regulatory Requirements
          1.2.1     Public  Awareness
          1.2.2     Technical  Assistance
          1.2.3     Performance  Monitoring
          1.2.4     Technician Education
          1.2.5     State Implementation  Plans
          1.2.6     Start-up     IM240    Emission
                    Standards   in  Enhanced  I/M
                    Areas
          1.2.7     Hardship Extension  Option
     1.3  Related Requirements                      5
          1.3.1     On-board Diagnostics             5
               1.3.1.1    EPA       Statutory    6
                         Requirements                6
               1.3.1.2    EPA      Regulatory
                         Requirements                6
               1.3.1.3    CARB     Regulatory
                         Requirements                7
               1.3.1.4    Capabilities      and
                         Limitations of OBD          8
          1.3.2     207 (a)  and 207 (b) Warranty
          1.3.3     Certification Short Test         8
          1.3.4     EPA's Recall Program             9
     1.4  Effects  of  Requirements  on  Vehicle    10
          Repair Industry                           11
     1.5  Role of the Local or State Agency
          1.5.1     Technician   Education   and    13
                    Certification                   14
          1.5.2     Performance  Monitoring
          1.5.3     Tools,  Methods,  and  Service    15
                    Information                      16

2.0  ENHANCED I/M AND MOTOR VEHICLE REPAIR          16
     2.1  Preconditioning and Failure Verification
     2.2  Diagnosis  and  Repair   of   Emission    18
          Failures                                  18
          2.2.1     Types of Repairs
          2.2.2     Development   of   Diagnostic    18
                    Procedures                      18
          2.2.3     Trace-Based  Diagnostics
     2.3  Diagnostic Equipment and Tools             20
          2.3.1     Basic Diagnostic Tools           21
          2.3.2     Advanced Diagnostic  Procedures    21
               2.3.2.1    Advanced     Diagnostic    21
                         Strategy     Involving    24
                         Oscilloscope
                               111

-------
24
               2.3.2.2   Advanced     Diagnostic
                        Stategy   Using   Repair              6
                        Grade  IM240                           A
               2.3.2.3   Advanced     Diagnostic              v
                        Strategy  for  Catalyst              a
                        Failure                               i
     2.4  Parts and Catalyst Issues                            1
          2.4.1     Parts  Issues                               a
               2.4.1.1   Aftermarket   Parts   and              b
                        EPA Tampering Policy                  1
               2.4.1.2   EPA  Aftermarket   Part              e
                        Certification Program                 C
               2.4.1.3   EPA  Aftermarket   Part              o
                        Warranty Requirements                 m
               2.4.1.4   Locating Parts                        m
          2.4.2     Catalyst Issues                            e
               2.4.2.1   EPA Policy on  Sale  and              r
                        Use   of    Aftermarket              c
                        Catalytic Converters                  i
               2.4.2.2   Special  Situations                    a
     2.5  Causes and Repair  of Purge and Pressure              1
          Failures                                            a
          2.5.1     Purge  Failures                             n
          2.5.2     Pressure Failures                          d
     2.6  Alternatives  to  Repair                               P
                                                              r
3.0  TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE  FOR REPAIR INDUSTRY                  o
     3.1  Providing   Information    to   Repair              d
          Facilities                                          u
          3.1.1     Regulatory  Requirements                    c
          3.1.2     Newsletters                                t
          3.1.3     Service  Information                       I
          3.1.4     Electronic  Bulletin Boards                 n
     3.2  Hot Line Services                                    f
          3.2.1     Regulatory  Requirements                    o
          3.2.2     Minimum  Hot Line Capabilities              r
                    that    Meet    Regulatory              m
                    Requirements                               a
          3.2.3     Options     for     Hot    Line              t
                    Management                                 i
          3.2.4     Repair Support Enhancements                o
          3.2.5     Guidelines    for   Selecting              n
                    Commercial  Hot Lines                       H
               3.2.5.1   Guidelines  for Enhanced              o
                        I/M Areas                             t
               3.2.5.2   Guidelines  for Basic I/M              1
                        Areas                                 i
               3.2.5.3   Enhanced Capabilities                 n


                               iv

-------
          e Services                                 4.0  PERFOR
                                      24                 MANGE
                          25           26                MONITO
                                                         RING
                                                         4.1   S
                                                         ummary
                                                         o    f
                                                         Recomm
                                                         endati
                                                         ons
                                                         4.2   R
                                                              e
                                                              g
27                                                            u
29                                                            1
                                                              a
29                                                            t
29                                                            o
30                                                            r
31                                                            Y
                                                              R
34                                                            e
                                                              q
34                                                            u
34                                                            i
34                                                            r
36                                                            e
36                                                            m
37                                                            e
37                                                            n
                                                              t
                                                              s
37                                                       4.3   E
                                                              x
39                                                            i
41                                                            s
                                                              t
42                                                            i
                                                              n
42                                                            g
                                                              a
44                                                            n
44                                                            d
                                                              P
                                                              r
44                                                            o
                                                              P
                                                              o
     3.3  Technician  Assistance  Centers                        s
          3.3.1     Texas'     Research/Outreach              e
                   Program                                    d


                               v

-------
          Performance Monitoring Programs            50
          4.3.1      Existing      Performance
                    Monitoring  Programs              50
               4.3.1.1  Arizona                    51
               4.3.1.2  Florida                    51
               4.3.1.3  Louisville,  Kentucky        52
               4.3.1.4  New  York                    53
               4.3.1.5  Wisconsin                   54
               4.3.1.6  AAA                         54
          4.3.2      Performance     Monitoring
                    Programs  Proposed in Early SIP
                    Submittals                       55
               4.3.2.1  Repair Grading              56
               4.3.2.2  Feedback     to    Repair
                        Facilities                  57
               4.3.2.3  Repair Form                 57
     4.4  Discussion  of  Performance  Monitoring
          Criteria                                  58
          4.4.1      Repair  Grading                   59
               4.4.1.1  Requirements                59
               4.4.1.2  Discussion of Additional
                        Methods and Criteria for
                        Grading Repairs            60
               4.4.1.3  Model   Repair   Grading
                        Program                    65
          4.4.2      Feedback  to Repair  Facilities    66
               4.4.2.1  Requirements                66
               4.4.2.2  Discussion of Additional
                        Feedback Measures           67
               4.4.2.3  Model  Feedback  Program      68
          4.4.3      Repair  Form                     69
               4.4.3.1  Requirements                69
               4.4.3.2  Discussion   of  Repair
                        Form Issues                 69
               4.4.3.3  Model  Repair Form           70
          4.4.4      Customer     Feedback     and
                    Satisfaction                    71

5.0  EDUCATION AND CERTIFICATION                    72
     5.1  Regulatory Requirements                    72
     5.2  Strategies  for Meeting  the Regulatory
          Requirements                              73
                                                         5.3  S
45                                                            u
                                                              b
46                                                            j
46                                                            e
49                                                            c

                               vi

-------
     t Criteria for  an  Effective Education    Pa<
     Program
     5.3.1     General Subject  Criteria         73
     5.3.2     Specific  Subject Criteria        74
5.4  Existing  and  Proposed  Certification    74
     Programs
     5.4.1  Technician Certification           76
          5.4.1.1   ASE      Technician    76
                   Certification Program
          5.4.1.2   Test  Content  Areas  for    76
                   ASE  Tests  A6,  A8,  and
                   the    Advanced   Engine
                   Performance   Specialist
                    (LI) Test
          5.4.1.3   Association  of  Diesel    77
                   Specialists    TechCert
                   Certification
          5.4.1.4   State      Technician    78
                   Certification Programs
     5.4.2     Repair Facility  Certification    79
          5.4.2.1   American     Automobile    82
                   Association     (AAA)
                   Approved Auto Repair
          5.4.2.2   State  Programs             82
     5.4.3     NATEF    Education    Facility    82
               Certification
          5.4.3.1   Certification Program       85
          5.4.3.2   EPA/NATEF Grant             85
5.5  Repair Technician Education Programs       86
     5.5.1     Existing or Proposed Local and    88
               State-Affiliated   Education
               Programs
          5.5.1.1   State    of    California,     88
                   Bureau   of   Automotive
                   Repair  (BAR)
          5.5.1.2   State  of New York           88
          5.5.1.3   State  of Florida           91
          5.5.1.4   State  of Washington         92
          5.5.1.5   Commonwealth      of    92
                   Massachusetts
          5.5.1.6   State of Wisconsin Pilot    92
                   I/M240     Demo    Lane/
                   Technician     Education
                   Proj ect
          5.5.1.7   Racine,      Wisconsin's    93
                   Transportation    Youth
                   Apprenticeship Program
          5.5.1.8   New   Jersey  Mechanic's    93
                   Education    Association
                    (ME A)
                                               93
                         VII

-------
     5.6
     5.7
Guidelines to Consider When Selecting or    Page
Developing a Model Education Program for
In-Service Technicians
Possible   Resources   Available   for    94
Developing an Education Program
5.7.1     Congestion Mitigation and Air    97
          Quality  Improvement   Program
          ( CMAQ) -Department    of
          Transportation
5.7.2     Coalition for Safer,   Cleaner    97
          Vehicles (CSCV)
     5.9
5.7.3
5.7.4
Issues
5.8.1

5.8.2
5.8.3
Other
Other EPA Grants
Other Possible Sources
to be Resolved
Information Availability Rule
and SAE J2008
Equipment Shortages
Retest Failures
Organizations and Efforts
98
98
98
99

99
100
100
Addressing Maintenance Issues
5.9.1

5.9.2

5.9.3


Vehicle Maintenance Initiative
(VMI)
Automotive Service Association
(ASA)
Coordinating Committee for
Automotive Repair (CCAR)

101

101

101

102
APPENDICES

Appendix 1,


Appendix 2,

Appendix 3 .


Appendix 4,

Appendix 5,

Appendix 6,

Appendix 7.


Appendix 8,
     IM240   Repair  Verification: An
     Inexpensive Dynamometer Method

     Sample I/M Newsletters

     Bibliography of Commercial Hot Line
     Services

     Quantifying Repair Effectiveness

     Sample Repair Grading Form

     Draft Standardized Repair Forms

     Education Programs Offered by Non-
     profit and Commercial Entities

     Other       Sources    of
     Education/Reference Materials
                              VI11

-------
1.0  INTRODUCTION

1.1  I/M Statutory Requirements

     The Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 require enhanced I/M in
areas with the worst  air quality problems and  in  the Northeast
Ozone Transport Region.   Section  182 of the Act also requires EPA
to issue guidance for  I/M programs, which states must comply with
in all respects.   The  guidance, which must be incorporated in the
applicable State implementation plans by the States, will provide
the  States  with  continued  reasonable  flexibility  to  fashion
effective, reasonable  and fair programs  for the affected consumer.

     Section 182  requires guidance for enhanced I/M which includes
a performance  standard achievable by a (model or benchmark) program
combining emission testing and inspection criteria.  This should
also include administration features necessary to reasonably assure
that adequate management resources, tools, and  practices are in
place to attain and maintain the performance  standard.

     The Act further specifies that each enhanced I/M program shall
include,  at  minimum,  computerized  emission  analyzers,  on-road
testing  devices,  denial of  waivers for  warranted vehicles  or
repairs related to tampering,  a  $450 expenditure  to  qualify for
waivers  for  emission-related  repairs  not  covered by warranty,
enforcement through registration denial unless an existing program
with a  different  mechanism can be demonstrated to have greater
effectiveness, annual inspection unless a State  can demonstrate
that decentralized testing  is equally effective, and inspection of
the emission control diagnostic system.

     Further,  the statute specifies that EPA guidance shall cover
effective implementation and enforcement and requires that guidance
which covers retesting of a vehicle after a failure shall include
proof  of  corrective  action.    Finally,  guidance must  include  a
performance   standard,   along  with  the   necessary   program
administration  features  necessary  to  reasonably  assure  that
adequate management resources,  tools,  and practices are in place to
attain and maintain the performance standard.

     It should be noted that in its relations with the States under
Title 1 of the Act, EPA conventionally uses the term "guidance" to
mean  information  or  interpretive policy  apart from  notice and
comment  rulemaking,  and lacking a  fully binding  legal effect.
However, EPA  interprets  the  language in  section  182  of the Act,
which says states  must "comply  in all  respects" with EPA guidance,
as  requiring  EPA  to establish a binding performance standard with
which  states  must comply  when  designing  and  implementing I/M
programs. EPA also has authority  under section 182  and  section 301

                               1

-------
of the Act to promulgate regulations as necessary to implement the
statute. Thus, EPA met the requirements of the Act by promulgating
binding regulations through notice and comment rulemaking;  final
rulemaking  was promulgated  November  5,  1992.    The  guidance
presented in this document is not  guidance  in  the  same sense as
given in section  182.   Of  course, those aspects of  the  program
presented in this  guidance which  are required by the I/M rule are
binding via the November 5,  1992  rule.

1.2  I/M Regulatory Requirements

1.2.1  Public Awareness

     §51.368 (a)  of  the  I/M  rule  contains  public  awareness
requirements that  must be met  in both basic and enhanced  I/M areas,
and requires that  the  SIP include a plan  for  informing the public
about various  I/M  related issues.   It also requires that motorists
failing I/M be provided with information on results  of  repairs
performed by   facilities  in  the area,  as  well  as  diagnostic
information on  the parts of  the  test  that were  failed by  their
vehicle.  The rule states:

          The  SIP  shall  include a plan  for informing the public on
     an ongoing basis throughout the life  of the I/M program on the
     air quality  problem, the requirements  of  federal  and  state
     law,  the  role of  motor vehicles in the air quality problem,
     the need  for and benefits of  an  inspection  program,  how to
     maintain a vehicle  in a low-emission condition, how to find a
     qualified repair  technician, and the requirements  of the I/M
     program.   Motorists that fail  the  I/M  test  in  enhanced I/M
     areas shall be offered a  list of repair facilities in the area
     and information on  the results of  repairs performed by repair
     facilities in the area, as described in §51.369 (b) (1) of this
     subpart.    Motorists that fail the  I/M test shall  also be
     provided  with  software-generated,   interpretive  diagnostic
     information based on the particular portions  of the test that
     were failed.

1.2.2.  Technical  Assistance

     §51.369(a) contains  the technical  assistance  requirement,
which must  also be met  in basic and  enhanced I/M areas.   This
requirement states  that the  oversight  agency must  provide the
repair industry with information and assistance  related  to vehicle
inspection,  diagnosis,  and repair.  There  is also  a  requirement
that  states provide  a  repair technician hotline.    It reads as
follows:

          The  oversight agency shall provide the  repair industry
     with information  and assistance related to  vehicle inspection
     diagnosis and repair.


                               2

-------
     (1)  The agency shall regularly inform repair facilities
of changes in the inspection program, training course

-------
     schedules,  common problems being found with particular engine
     families diagnostic tips and the like.

          (2)    The  agency shall provide  a  hot line  service  to
     assist  repair  technicians with  specific repair  problems,
     answer technical questions that arise in the repair process,
     and answer questions  related  to the legal requirements  of
     state and federal  law with regard to emission control device
     tampering,  engine  switching,  or similar issues.

1.2.3  Performance Monitoring

     The performance monitoring requirement  under  §51.369(b)  is
required in  enhanced areas,  although it is  encouraged  in basic
areas as well.  This requirement reads as follows:

     1)    In enhanced I/M program areas, the oversight agency shall
          monitor  the  performance  of  individual  motor  vehicle
          repair facilities,  and provide to the public at the time
          of initial failure, a summary of the performance of local
          repair facilities that have repaired vehicles for retest.
          Performance monitoring shall  include:

          i)    statistics on the number of vehicles submitted
               for  retest  after  repair   by  the  repair
               facility,


          ii)   the percentage passing on the first  retest,

          iii)  the  percentage  requiring   more   than  one
               repair/retest trip before passing,  and

          iv)   the percentage receiving a  waiver.

     Programs may provide  motorists  with  alternative  statistics
     that convey  similar  information on the relative  ability  of
     repair  facilities   in  providing  effective  and  convenient
     repair,  in light  of  the  age  and other  characteristics  of
     vehicles presented for repair  at each facility.

2)    Programs shall provide  feedback,  including  statistical  and
     qualitative information to individual repair facilities on a
     regular basis (at  least  annually) regarding their success  in
     repairing failed  vehicles.

3)    A prerequisite for a retest shall be a completed repair form
     that indicates which repairs were performed,  as  well as  any
     technician recommended repairs that were not  performed,  and
     identification of  the facility that performed repairs.

-------

-------
1.2.4  Technician Education

Section   51.369 (c)    of   the   Inspection/Maintenance   Program
Requirements issued November 5, 1992 states:

          The state shall assess the availability of adequate
     repair technician training in the I/M area and,  if the
     types of training described in paragraph  (c)(1) through
     (4)  of this section are not currently available,  shall
     insure that training is made available to  all interested
     individuals in the community either through private or
     public facilities.  This may  involve working with local
     community colleges or vocational schools to add curricula
     to existing programs or start new programs or it might
     involve attracting private training providers to offer
     classes  in the  area.   The  training  available  shall
     include:

     (1)  Diagnosis and repair  of malfunctions  in computer
     controlled, close-loop vehicles;

     (2)   The  application  of   emission  control theory  and
     diagnostic data  to the  diagnosis  and repair of failures
     on the  transient emissions  test and  the evaporative
     system functional checks;

     (3)  Utilization  of diagnostic information on systematic
     or repeated failures  observed in  the transient emission
     test and the evaporative  system functional checks;

     (4)  General training on the various subsystems  related to
     engine emission control.

     Mandatory technician certification is  not  a requirement  of the
I/M rule but adequate training must be made available in both basic
and enhanced I/M areas.  The rule does  require  that  the state take
action to  get adequate training  programs started at  local community
colleges  or  vocational  schools,  or  action  to attract  private
training providers to offer the  kinds of training needed.  The rule
does  not  require the  state  to  conduct  training  or  require
technician or facility certification.  Clearly, the rule allows the
states significant flexibility  in insuring these minimum levels of
service are available.

1.2.5  State Implementation Plans

     Section  51.369(d)  of  the   Inspection/Maintenance  Program
Requirements issued November 5,  1992 states the SIP  requirements as
being:

-------
          The SIP shall include a description of the technical
     assistance program to be implemented, a description of
     the procedures and criteria  to  be used in meeting the
     performance monitoring requirements of this section, and
     a description of the repair technician training resources
     available in the community.

1.2.6 Start-up IM240 Emission Standards in Enhanced I/M Areas

     The  EPA rule  allows areas  to  use  higher  IM240 emission
standards at the start of  the enhanced I/M program. EPA has issued
technical  guidance1,  which  recommends  start-up standards  for
various vehicle classes  which should be used during calendar years
1995 and 1996 (40 CFR 85.2205(a)(2)).  Looser start up  standards are
recommended because, when  high tech testing starts, the fleet will
have a  sizable  accumulation  of vehicles  (generally  older than 5
years)  which have suffered malperformances which went  undetected by
the idle test or which escaped repair due  to  improper inspections.
Looser start-up standards  will allow the  I/M program to send only
a manageable number of these  cars  for repair  in the first two
years,   so  that  repair  facilities   do not  get overwhelmed  by
challenging  repair  cases  and owners  are not overly frustrated.

     By 1997, repair facilities will have more experience repairing
IM240  failed vehicles, more may have  entered the  I/M repair
business, and much of the accumulated  backlog of defective vehicles
will have already been repaired, allowing the IM240 standards to be
tightened  for  greater emission  reduction.   Recommended  final
standards are also summarized in the technical guidance cited above
(40  CFR 85.2205 (a)  (3) ).   EPA  advises states   to  retain  as much
flexibility to revise inspection standards during 1995 and 1996 as
possible, since local experience  may indicate  the advisability of
either  more  or  less stringent start-up  standards  than shown in
EPA's technical guidance.

1.2.7  Hardship Extension  Option

     The CAA requires that  any waiver in an enhanced I/M program be
granted only if the owner  has spent  at least $450 on repairs, but
does not define precisely  what a waiver is.  However,  the  I/M rule
(40  CFR )  defines  a  waiver  as  "a  form of compliance with the
program  requirements  that allows  a  motorist  to  comply without
meeting  the applicable test standards,  as long  as   prescribed
criteria are met.  One of the prescribed criteria EPA sets  forth is
in §51.360(a)(9):
     1U.S. EPA.  April 1994.  High-Tech I/M Test Procedures, Emission
Standards, Quality Control Requirements, and Equipment Specifications.  Final
Technical Guidance.  Report no. EPA-AA-EPSD-IM-93-1.


                                7

-------
          A  time  extension,  not  to  exceed the  period of  the
     inspection frequency, may be granted to obtain needed repairs
     on a vehicle  in  the case of economic  hardship  when waiver
     requirements have  not  been met,  but  the extension may be
     granted only  once  for  a vehicle  and  shall be  tracked  and
     reported by the program.

     Thus, an extension  allows a vehicle  owner to register his or
her vehicle even though it has not been repaired to pass the  I/M
test and  has not  had  the full $450  in repair  attempts,  without
removing  the  obligation to get  it  repaired  or  spend  the  $450
eventually.  This option may not be offered  to all owners without
regard to financial means.   The state may choose what criteria to
use in assessing financial means.  EPA  believed it was reasonable
to  allow  such  extensions  in  the  I/M  rule  because  of  the
accumulation of defects  in older vehicles during the period before
enhanced  I/M takes  effect,  and  the hardship to some  areas of a
sudden need to  repair or dispose of a vehicle during the first high
tech inspection cycle.  There may be only one extension in the life
of a vehicle.   States must  modify their registration system to
ensure that vehicles which have received an extension are not given
a second one in a subsequent year.   States may wish to ensure that
purchasers of vehicles are informed whether  the vehicles are still
eligible  for an extension.

1.3  Related Requirements

1.3.1  On-board Diagnostics

1.3.1.1  EPA Statutory Requirements

     Section 202  (m)  of the  Clean Air Act,  which was  added by
Section 207  (a) of the Clean Air Act Amendments  of 1990,  directs
the  EPA  to  promulgate  regulations  requiring manufacturers  to
install on-board diagnostic  (OBD)  systems on all new 1994 and later
model  year  light-duty  vehicles  and  light-duty  trucks.   At  a
minimum, these diagnostic systems  must be capable of:

a)   accurately  identifying,  for  the  vehicle's  useful  life,
     emission-related   system  deterioration  or   malfunction,
     including, at a minimum,  the  catalytic converter and oxygen
     (02)  sensor,  which  could  cause  and result in failure of  the
     vehicles to comply with emission standards;

b)   alerting the vehicle's  owner  or operator to the likely need
     for  emission-related   component  or system  maintenance  or
     repair;

c)   storing   or   retrieving   fault   codes  specified   by   the
     Administrator; and

-------
d)    providing access to  stored  information in a manner specified
     by the Administrator.

1.3.1.2  EPA Regulatory Requirements

     EPA's final  rule  on OBD requirements was published  in the
Federal Register February 19, 1993,  and was effective May 20, 1993.
As required by  the Act,  regulations  apply to  all  1994 and later
model year LDVs and LDTs for which emission standards are currently
in place or are subsequently adopted.

     Essentially, the  rule  requires  that an OBD  system must be
capable of detecting a malfunction or deterioration of emission-
related components or design elements before such a malfunction or
deterioration individually causes an emission increase  greater than
certain thresholds.  EPA will evaluate whether the OBD system is
properly monitoring  and  identifying  such malfunctions using the
Federal Test Procedure.   When such a malfunction  is  detected,  a
malfunction indicator light  (MIL) must illuminate on the dashboard
and  codes identifying  the  malfunction  must  be  stored  in  the
computer for access by a repair technician.

     For light-duty vehicles and light-duty trucks  with Otto cycle
engines,  EPA  has  explicit  requirements  to  monitor   and  detect
malfunctions in  the  catalyst system, the  oxygen  sensor  system,
engine misfire,  and electrical circuit continuity on most emission-
related powertrain components. When an engine misfires, the system
must store a code indicating which cylinder is misfiring or that
multiple  cylinders  are  misfiring.   For  other  emission-related
powertrain systems or  components,  and  the  evaporative  emission
control system,  manufacturers   are  provided the  flexibility to
either monitor and detect malfunctions, or ensure that malfunctions
will not occur or will cause negligible emission increases.  For
light  vehicles  and  light  trucks with  diesel engines,  EPA has
explicit  requirements  to monitor and detect  loss  of electrical
circuit continuity within emission-related powertrain components
sensed  by the  on-board  computer.   For  other  emission-related
powertrain systems or  components,  including  the  catalyst if so
equipped,  manufacturers are provided the same flexibility described
previously for Otto cycle engines.

     The  rule  also  requires  that  service  information be  made
available by manufacturers to anyone  in  a  standardized electronic
format.  This requirement is discussed in more detail in Section
1.3.3.  Finally, a readiness code must be stored in the on-board
computer to indicate  when the diagnostic system has completed all
monitoring checks and has determined the operational status of all
monitored systems and components.   The readiness code  will ensure
I/M  testing personnel  and service  technicians  that  malfunction
codes  have not  been cleared since  the  last OBD check  of the

-------
vehicle's emission-related control systems.

1.3.1.3  CARB Regulatory Requirements

     The California Air Resources Board  (CARB)  passed state OBD
regulations in 1985.  This set of regulations was known as OBD I
and  took  effect  beginning  with  the  1988  model  year.    The
regulations required the vehicle's onboard computer to monitor the
vehicle's oxygen sensor, the  EGR valve, and the evaporative purge
solenoid for  proper operation and to  provide  a warning  to the
vehicle operator when any malfunctions occurred.  However, since
OBD I did not cover several critical  emission-related components
(e.g.  catalyst,  evaporative  system  vapor leaks)  and does  not
require sufficient sensitivity to detect significant malfunctions
of components that are monitored,  CARB  has promulgated new OBD II
regulations.

     California's OBD II regulations differ from EPA's regulations
in  some  respects.   CARB  has  taken  more  of a  design-oriented
approach  than  EPA's,   which  emphasizes  emission  performance
standards.  CARB's OBD II requirements  include  catalyst monitoring,
evaporative emission control  system leak detection, monitoring of
the operational characteristics of the oxygen sensor, and detection
of  engine  misfire.   OBD II  requires  greater sensitivity  in
detecting malfunctions  than OBD I.

     EPA expects that manufacturers will  be  able to  develop one
system that complies with both EPA OBD and  California OBD  II
regulations.    However,   EPA  will accept compliance  with  the
California OBD II  requirements as  an alternative means of meeting
certain portions of the Federal requirements through the 1998 model
year.  Beyond the 1998 model year, full compliance with the Federal
OBD rule will be  required.   Beginning  with the  1999  model year,
California will also accept systems meeting Federal requirements as
automatically satisfying California OBD requirements for vehicles
designed to meet Tier 1  standards.

1.3.1.4  Capabilities and Limitations of OBD

     OBD will lead to the repair of malfunctioning vehicles that
contribute to air quality problems  throughout the nation.  Consumer
acceptance is crucial to  the  success  of  this  program,  however,
since OBD systems will have their greatest benefit when  the vehicle
owner  observes  the  warning signal and on his or her  initiative
obtains appropriate  emission system repairs promptly. A report was
prepared for EPA in  1990 by WESTAT, Inc. which surveyed motorists
on their responses to illuminated  MILs, which have been installed
                               10

-------
by manufacturers on  some  vehicles  for a number of years2.  This
study found that most motorists responded positively to the MIL.
If  a  car  was  not  running  satisfactorily  at  the  time  of
illumination,  87 percent of owners sought repair, and if  the car
was running satisfactorily, 60 percent sought repair.

     An OBD system  also has the capability  of  assisting repair
technicians  in  diagnosing  and  repairing  vehicles.    First,
technicians may access the OBD codes when vehicles are  presented to
them with symptoms of poor driveability or even just for  routine
servicing, and thereby discover emission malfunctions  of which the
owner  was  unaware.    Also,   OBD  will  speed identification  of
malfunctioning emission components, and help avoid trial and error
replacement of components  which the  repair technician  cannot
evaluate otherwise.   Moreover, the readiness code will indicate to
service personnel whether any repairs have been conducted properly;
if the readiness code appears indicating a full functional check
has been  completed without  any  malfunctions  being detected,  the
repair has been successful.

     OBD systems will also play  a role  in  I/M programs.  In fact,
the Act requires EPA to promulgate a rule which will require all
I/M programs to include code  inspections.   EPA will  propose and
promulgate  such a rule.   At the time  of the  I/M  test,  stored
malfunction codes can be scanned to identify vehicles  whose owners
did not seek repairs  when  the warning  signal  first occurred.  The
presence of one or more codes in  a vehicle indicates the current or
recent existence of a malfunction with the potential to cause high
emissions.  Eventually, OBD codes could possibly be used to  replace
other methods of identifying high emitting vehicles.

1.3.2  207(a)  and 207(b) Warranty

     Section 207(a)  of  the Clean Air Act establishes  the emission
design  and  defect warranty.   Manufacturers  must  warrant  to the
purchaser that the vehicle is designed, built and equipped  to meet
emission standards for  the useful  life of  the vehicle and  that it
is free of certain defects which would cause the failure  to meet
emissions  standards.    Section  207(b)  of  the  Act  requires
manufacturers to pay  for certain repairs necessary to  pass  an EPA-
approved State or local emissions test.  The  requirements  for the
Section 207 (b)  performance warranty  are  set forth  in  part  85,
subpart W, of the Code of Federal Regulations.

     Sections  207(a)  and  (b)  were  amended by the  Clean Air Act
Amendments of  1990.  Whereas  the  warranty period for light-duty
      Westat, Inc.  July 18,  1990.  Survey of Vehicle Owners in the On-Board
Diagnostics Program.  Prepared for Certification Division,  Office of Mobile
Sources, U.S.  EPA.


                               11

-------
vehicles and trucks had been  5  years  or  50,000  miles (whichever
first occurs),  the 1990 Amendments extend the warranty for major
emission  control  components  (catalytic  converters,  electronic
emissions control  units, onboard emissions diagnostic devices and
others the Administrator may designate) to 8  years or 80,000 miles
(whichever first occurs)  for 1995 and later model year vehicles.
The warranty period  for other components was reduced to 2 years or
24,000 miles (whichever first occurs).
     An extension  of the warranty period for the specified major
emission  control  components  is likely to  lead to  more  durable
designs for these components.   Reducing  the warranty period for
other emission control components will pass more repair costs along
to consumers and may affect component durability design.

1.3.3  Certification Short Test

     Ideally,  vehicles which pass  the Federal Test Procedure for
certification  should  also  pass   the  inspection  methods  and
procedures set forth by the  Section  207(b)  emission performance
warranty provision,  under conditions  likely to be encountered in
conducting I/M programs.   To  ensure  this,  Section 206(a)  of the
Clean Air Act requires that EPA develop new test procedures, to be
incorporated into  the certification process.  These test procedures
should be capable  of determining whether 1994 and later model year
light-duty vehicles  and trucks, when properly maintained and used,
will pass the inspection methods and procedures established under
207(b) for that  model  year, under  conditions  reasonably likely to
be encountered  in the  conduct of  I/M programs, but which those
programs cannot reasonably influence  or control.

     Thus, EPA finalized a rule on November 1,  1993 requiring a
Certification  Short  Test   (CST) .    This   rule  has  two  major
components.  The first  component replaces the six current steady-
state performance  warranty procedures available for use in basic
I/M programs.  These procedures include three  idle tests, a pair of
unloaded  two speed  tests,  and a  steady-state loaded  test.   The
second component incorporates the  CST  into the current procedures
for obtaining a  certificate of conformity for light-duty vehicles
and light-duty trucks.

     The CST is designed  to  prevent  the occurrence  of  what are
known as "pattern failures."  Certain groups of vehicles which pass
the FTP have  shown consistent patterns of  I/M failure.  EPA became
aware  of  these  pattern failures  as  I/M program  officials  have
sought  technical  support  or  assistance  in obtaining  Federal
emission  performance  warranty  coverage  for  owners  of  failed
vehicles.  By ensuring that  vehicle  designs are compatible with
performance waranty procedures through the CST,  the ocurrence of
these pattern failures should be avoided,  resulting in a reduction
of I/M-related repair attempts and I/M retests.
                               12

-------
     The  rule  does  not  presently  include  transient  loaded
procedures,  which would  reflect conditions  encountered  in areas
with enhanced I/M programs.  A proposed  rule is  currently being
drafted which will incorporate a transient loaded procedure as part
of the  menu of available performance warranty procedures and CSTs.
                               13

-------
1.3.4  EPA's Recall Program

     Section 207(c)(l) of  the  Clean Air Act states  that  if the
Administrator of the EPA determines that a substantial number of a
vehicle class do not conform to the Federal emission standards when
in actual  use  throughout  their useful  lives,  the  Administrator
shall notify  the  manufacturer to  submit  a plan to  correct the
nonconformity.  Light duty vehicle life  is defined as  five years or
50,000 miles (whichever first occurs) through the  1993 model year.
A longer useful  life  will be phased in beginning with  the 1994
model year  and  increasing  in  the  1996  model year to 10  years or
100,000 miles (whichever  first occurs), more reflective of actual
useful life.

     The EPA's  recall  program has  been active  since the  early
1970's.   Since the beginning of  the  program,   over 45  million
vehicles have been recalled.   Currently, the recall program tests
about  35  light-duty  engine  families  annually,   representing
approximately 35 percent of total  light  duty vehicle and light duty
truck production.

     There  are  three basic   types  of  recalls  --  voluntary,
influenced, and ordered.  When a manufacturer decides, with no EPA
involvement,  to  correct  an  emissions  nonconformity  it  has
discovered  on  its own,  a  recall  is described as  a "voluntary"
recall.  An "influenced"  recall occurs when an EPA investigation
identifies a noncomplying  family and the manufacturer  is convinced
to recall  without an order being required.   If a  manufacturer
declines to take appropriate action on a noncomplying family and
EPA orders  the company to correct the vehicles,  an  "ordered" recall
results.  Most vehicle recalls  are voluntary, although ordered or
influenced recalls affect more total vehicles.

     There  are  two  different  phases  of  recall  testing
surveillance  and  confirmatory   programs.     The   less  costly
surveillance program is used to initially identify engine families
showing  a  high probability of  failure and which  are  therefore
candidates  for  recall  and/or  confirmatory testing  and eventual
recall.  The confirmatory  program is  designed to  provide a larger
sample of  vehicles,  procured using more  rigorous  selection and
screening procedures,  which may be used to  support EPA's decision
in the event of a manufacturer challenge.

     In selecting engine  families  for recall testing, data from a
variety  of  sources  are  considered.    First,   surveillance  or
confirmatory  test data  from a  similar  engine  family  for the
previous year or an earlier model year are  considered.   Emission
results  from  certification  testing  and  manufacturer-provided
information on  the emission performance  of the vehicle  are also
considered.   Also,  I/M data  from several  states are  reviewed,


                               14

-------
including both idle only and simulated driving type test results
(IM240).   Information on any pattern failures documented in these
records is incorporated in the selection process.

     When  an  engine  family  is  recalled,  the manufacturer  is
responsible for  developing a repair  which (1) brings  the  mean
emissions, as  measured by EPA, into compliance,  (2) is adequately
durable,  and (3)  can be expected to be  successfully implemented by
the manufacturer's dealership  network.  Adjustment fixes, such as
an ignition timing change made by rotating the distributor housing,
would not be acceptable because of their unsatisfactory durability.
The emission reduction produced by a fix must show that if the fix
was installed on vehicles performing at  the mean  of  EPA's  test
sample,  the resulting emissions would be reduced to or below the
Federal standards.

     The  manufacturer must order, acquire and distribute any parts
and labels to  be  used by the mechanic performing the recall.   The
manufacturer must  also draft  a  letter to  be sent  to  each owner
explaining the steps  he/she must take to  have the recall completed
on  his   vehicle;  and he/she  must   draft  the dealer  bulletin
explaining how the recall is to be performed.

     Unfortunately, independent service facilities do not typically
have access to Original  Equipment Manufacturers'  (OEMs)  service
information,  and therefore may not be  aware that a vehicle coming
into their shop has been subject to a recall.   In addition,  they
may not be able to accurately determine whether  a recalled vehicle
has had  necessary corrections performed.   Thus, EPA will  soon
propose a rule requiring motor vehicle manufacturers to provide and
update  electronic  lists  identifying  vehicles   subject  to  an
emissions recall which have not  complied.   State agencies will be
able to use this  information to enforce compliance with emissions
recall campaigns in areas required to implement enhanced vehicle
inspection/maintenance  (I/M)  programs.    Such  a program  will
alleviate the  problem of having technicians unknowingly attempting
to  repair  emission problems in  cars  which have  not  had recall
repairs done.   This  rule  is expected  to  go into effect  in July,
1995 and will  start affecting motorists in  January, 1996.

     In addition, several efforts are underway which would provide
independent service facilities with greater access to OEMs service
information.  Section 202 (m) (5) of the  Clean Air Act, as amended in
1990 by Section  207(m)(5), requires the manufacturers to provide
promptly to any  person  engaged  in the  repairing or servicing of
motor vehicles or  motor  vehicle  engines  any and all  information
needed to make use of the emission control diagnostic system and
such other information, including instructions for making emission
related diagnosis and repairs.  As mentioned in  Section 1.3.1.2 of
this guidance, EPA's  February 19, 1993 rule on onboard diagnostics
requires  manufacturers to make emission-related repair and service


                               15

-------
information  (including  recall  information)   available  to  all
independent technicians.  Beginning in 1996, this information would
have to be provided in a  standardized electronic format currently
being  developed  by  SAE3.   Final  rules  on  service  information
availability are  not yet available, but will  be  contained in a
forthcoming  EPA  rulemaking.    In  addition,   several  companies
specializing in providing service information to independent repair
facilities   are   developing  databases  which  include  recall
information.

1.4  Effects of Requirements on Vehicle Repair Industry

     In order to fully assess training needs, it is important to
understand  how  the requirements under  the I/M rule  affect the
vehicle repair industry,  and what the technician's task really is
with respect to correcting emission failures.

     EPA's research on the causes of high emissions among in-use
vehicles has shown that a wide  variety of malfunctions can and do
occur. There are  a  few that  are particularly common,  especially
oxygen  sensor  deterioration.    However,  diagnosis of  emission
failure is not a simple matter,  since there are frequently multiple
causes of emission failure,  and repair of one  component may bring
a vehicle into compliance temporarily, but not solve the underlying
cause of the emission  failure.

     Repair technicians in current I/M programs are encountering
this variety of underlying malfunctions as they repair vehicles to
pass  the idle and  2500/idle tests that  are  now  dominant.  EPA
expects  that the  IM240  tailpipe emission  test will  find more of
these  diverse  malfunctions than   simpler  testing,  especially
NOx-related  problems.  Evaporative  system problems will  also be
detected  for the  first time in most I/M  programs.  However, EPA
expects  that the  range of problems will  be similar.   On one car
model a certain broken part may  cause an IM240 failure and an idle
test failure, while on another the same broken part may not affect
idle emissions very  much.   There are  few if any unique problems
which appear only with the IM240. The basic challenge of finding
the reason for high emissions will therefore be much the same  as at
present. Technicians will continue to use a combination of routine
tune-up checks and parts replacements, visual examination, on-board
diagnostic indicators,  special tools, systems logic, service manual
procedures, and a process of elimination.

     However, more vehicles will be identified as having problems,
and problems will have to be isolated and corrected  more thoroughly
for the  car  to pass  the  IM240  than for  the idle test,  since the
      SAE J2008:  Recommended Organization of Vehicle Service Information,
draft version, July  1993.


                               16

-------
idle test frequently passes cars that still have problems that the
IM240 can detect. The  IM240 will  be  less  susceptible  to vehicle
misadjustment and tampering as a ploy to get  a  car to pass without
performing truly needed repairs, since  the NOx standard will tend
to cause a vehicle to  fail if a ploy has been used to pass HC and
CO, and  vice versa. Consequently, technicians will have  to find and
fix  the true causes  of a  test   failure more often.  Also,  the
statutory $450 cost waiver limit  is higher  than  the cost waiver
limits typical of basic programs  in the past.   This higher limit
will close off one of  the alternatives  to repair now available in
current I/M programs.  Finally, because  enhanced I/M programs will
have official inspections performed in test-only networks, there
will be no opportunity  for an improperly performed test to be a
substitute for full repair.

     Due to the  reasons discussed  above, it will be necessary for
technicians to become  even more efficient in diagnosing problems.
Education is an important component, though technician education is
not the complete solution.   Many  factors may affect performance,
e.g., lack of technical information,   specialized  tools,  a good
working environment,  or the time allowed to do a complete job.

     The two areas of education that EPA perceives to be of primary
importance  at this  time are:    1)  the  education of  existing
technicians in the diagnosis and repair skills required to repair
vehicles failing the transient  test, and 2) bringing  the automotive
education offered by secondary and post-secondary schools, which
educate new technicians, up to  speed  on the  new  diagnostic and
repair  skills required  to repair  vehicles  failing  the transient
test.

     The focus for education of existing technicians should be on
the technicians that  already possess a  certain level of expertise
in automotive repairs  and will not have to be educated in general
system  repairs.   Likewise,  the  main emphasis of  diagnostic and
repair education for these experienced technicians should relate
primarily  to  the  rapidly  changing  technology,   particularly
electronics and computer controlled emission control systems, and
the practical effects  that these systems, in conjunction with the
basic engine mechanical systems, have on transient emission levels.
Therefore, such education should assume a basic knowledge of these
systems,  and  should   not  focus  on   general   repair  issues.
Technicians not fully understanding the basics  should be  given the
opportunity to  take  remedial and/or  refresher  courses.   These
courses  should  be coordinated  with the  advanced  level  course
schedule.  Further, the focus  should also be on generic training
and diagnostic strategies rather than emphasizing instructions for
performing specific repairs.  The variety of vehicles that may fail
the IM240 transient test will require the technicians to  use their
problem solving skills rather than 'cookbook'  repairs.
                               17

-------
1.5  Role of the Local or State Agency

     Natural market forces caused by vehicle owners' interest in a
convenient  and  economical  repair  can  create  an incentive  for
technicians and repair facilities to become more proficient,  and
for  more  persons  and  firms   to  enter  the  market.  However,
considerable stresses  in the repair market  could occur during a
transition phase,  to the detriment of the public.  Therefore, it is
desirable for local agencies to take an active role  in providing
and promoting education for in-service technicians.  In addition,
the  optional  certification of  technicians and  the  performance
monitoring program which is required by EPA's I/M rule will enhance
natural market forces.  Other important aspects that should be kept
in mind  while working  on  these three  areas are tools,  repair
methods,  and service information.

1.5.1 Technician Education and Certification

     Educating  in-service  technicians   requires  all  of  the
following:

     •    Classroom materials  such  as pre- and post-tests,  course
          outlines,   slides,    videos,   workbooks,    up-to-date
          diagnostic equipment,  and vehicle hardware.
     •    Instructors knowledgeable in the field and familiar with
          these materials.
     •    A place to train,  ideally including access to vehicles.
     •    Funding for the materials,  instructor,  and space.
     •    An audience  of  technicians  who are motivated  to take
          courses, despite the time it takes from their paying job
          or personal life and the direct out-of-pocket cost  if the
          course(s) is not free.

     If it is to be effective, education must be offered to working
technicians in a  form  and at  a  time  they will attend. Education
should be designed in modules or tiers,  so that technicians do not
have to sit through material they feel they know  in order to get
material they need.  Furthermore, it is  important  to pre-test, so
that technicians with comparable skills start at  the same level.

     While the start of enhanced I/M programs creates a  short term
need to  educate  practicing  technicians, in the  long  term  it is
preferable to impart emissions repair knowledge during vocational
education. The long-term task of upgrading vocational educational
programs is one which I/M agencies should pay attention to, but not
at the expense of educating in-service technicians in the short-
term. Considerable  coordination between  short-term  programs to
educate practicing technicians and long-term programs to upgrade
vocational educational programs might be possible, however.  For
instance, upgraded lab space,  equipment,  and instructors could be
shared.

-------
     Certification of  repair technicians  has  two benefits.  It
allows vehicle  owners  who need  a  more qualified  technician  to
locate those who exist, and it encourages other technicians to get
qualified. Certification does present challenges in terms of the
development of an appropriate test instrument,  administration of
the test,  motivation of technicians  to take the test, and education
of  the  public  about  the  benefit  of  patronizing  certified
technicians.

     Automotive Service Excellence, Inc. (ASE) has developed a new
test, the Advanced Engine  Performance Specialist (LI)  Test, which
is an advanced level exam requiring successful certification in ASE
Test A8,  Engine Performance.  This test  is  designed  to measure the
technicians'  knowledge of the  diagnostic skills  necessary  for
sophisticated emissions and engine performance problems.  The test
was first administered in May 1994  and will  be  given again from
time to time.  ASE  handles test administration and score reporting.
This  test  is  discussed in greater detail  in Section  5.4.1.   It
should be noted that  no certification test  is a perfect predictor
of job performance under constantly evolving technology and other
changing conditions.   Thus,  certification is a  supplement rather
than a substitute for a good performance monitoring program.

1.5.2  Performance Monitoring

     The concept behind performance monitoring  is  to  let vehicle
owners know how well competing repair facilities are doing in terms
of getting cars to pass re-inspection on the first trip back to the
inspection station.  Performance  monitoring must also let repair
facilities themselves know how they are doing so  they  can learn to
do better. Finally, performance monitoring should let I/M program
officials know  each  repair  facility's   success   rate  so  they  can
actively counsel the  repairers who are most frequently causing the
public the unnecessary inconvenience and expense  of multiple repair
trips .

     Performance monitoring is a new concept in most I/M areas, but
has been done in some areas for many years  with general acceptance
by the repair  industry and public  appreciation  for the  service.
Although  EPA makes  specific recommendations  in   this  guidance
document for developing a prototype performance monitoring program,
the I/M rule affords  areas considerable  flexibility in developing
and implementing a program.

1.5.3  Tools, Methods, and Service Information

     A more  satisfactory repair process  will also be  facilitated by
technical supports in  the form of improved  tools, methods,  and
service  information  for  technicians.  EPA and  various  industry
entities are pursuing some concepts for  such improvements. Perhaps


                               19

-------
the  most   important   is   development  of  advanced  diagnostic
procedures.  In  future  reports,  EPA hopes  to  describe in detail
advanced diagnostic procedures which can be used to more accurately
and  efficiently  diagnose  emission  failures.    Also,  EPA  is
collecting  data to  investigate  the  possibility of using the
second-by-second emissions  history during the  IM240  to provide
clues as to the malfunctions responsible for the  failing emission
level on the overall test.  Furthermore, the market is  starting to
undertake the development and distribution  of  advanced technology
repair tools, such  as boroscopes for diagnosing catalyst problems.

     Because  the  official   IM240  transient  emissions   test  is
performed with  specialized  testing equipment, diagnosing failed
vehicles and verifying that subsequent repairs were sufficient to
adequately reduce emissions to passing levels  may be considerably
easier with similar specialized equipment.   Thus,  EPA  conducted a
preliminary  study  of  a relatively low cost  repair  grade  IM240
system  (RG240).  The system  in EPA's preliminary  study should be
(1) affordable  enough  for a repair facility to  purchase  (in the
neighborhood  of $25,000  -  $40,000,  or  even  less if the  BAR90
analyzer is  already owned),  and (2)  accurate  enough  to indicate
when a  vehicle has had a substantial  emission  reduction and is
highly  likely  to pass  the official retest.   A  recent SAE  paper
describing EPA's RG240 system can  be  found in Appendix I4.

     Also included in  the  technical supports category  is the need
for priority to be  placed  on developing  and disseminating generic
methods for verifying basic closed loop operation, since many  other
malfunctions cannot be  isolated if closed loop  operation is not
present.  The garage-grade IM240 testing package  would be able to
generate this type of emissions history,  allowing the technician to
get information at each  step of repair without  returning to the
test-only station. The role  of  the state agency will be to help
communicate  to technicians  and  service  station  operators the
importance  and availability  of these  technical  supports.  This
includes making sure that education programs  are  kept current.
      Mickelson,  Jan B.  and William B. Clemmens.  IM240 Repair Verification:
An Inexpensive Dynomometer Method.  SAE Paper No. 940431.

                               20

-------
2.0   ENHANCED I/M AND  MOTOR VEHICLE  REPAIR

2.1  Preconditioning and Failure Verification

     Specific troubles  caused by poor preconditioning  include a
full canister which can feed too much vapor to the engine causing
falsely high exhaust emissions, a cold catalyst or oxygen sensor,
and timers in the computer which can  delay  closed loop  operation
and/or canister purge following an engine start or other specific
event. Repair technicians should interview the owner to  determine
if insufficient preconditioning at  the  time of the official test
was  a possibility  and/or  confirm  that  the vehicle  has  high
emissions before spending significant  amounts of time in diagnosis
and parts replacement.  Also,  it is important for technicians to
precondition  a  car  after a repair  is done before  retesting the
vehicle,  due to possible interference from  the adaptive learning
feature on many vehicles.

2.2  Diagnosis and Repair  of  Emission Failures

2.2.1  Types of Repairs

     A 1992 EPA study5  categorized motor vehicle emission repairs
according to the following systems  and  subsystems:

     1.    induction system
          •   heated  air  door assembly
          •   temperature  sensors
          •   air  filter  element
          •   hoses
          •   other  (e.g.,  gaskets)

     2 .    fuel metering system
          •   carburetor  assembly
          •   idle mixture adjustment limiter
          •   idle mixture adjustment
          •   idle  speed
          •   idle  speed  solenoid
          •   fuel  injection  components
          •   hoses,  lines, wires
          •   choke  adjustment --  notches
          •   choke  adjustment --  vacuum break
          •   choke  adjustment limiter
          •   fast  idle speed
          •   vacuum diaphragms
      McCargar, James A.  and Lisa M.  Snapp. 1992. Report on the
EPA/Manufacturer Cooperative I/M Testing Program.  Environmental Protection
Agency, Office  of Mobile Sources, Ann Arbor, Michigan.  EPA Report No. EPA-AA-
EPSD-I/M-92-01.


                                21

-------
     •    electrical controls
     •    exhaust heat control valve assembly
     •    other  (e.g., fuel filter, float level)

3.    ignition  system
     •    distributor assembly
     •    initial timing
     •    initial timing limiter
     •    spark plugs and wires
     •    vacuum advance assembly
     •    spark delay devices
     •    spark knock detector
     •    electronic timing module
     •    coolant temperature sensors
     •    hoses, lines, wires
     •    other  (e.g., points, distributor  cap)

4.    EGR system
     •    EGR  valve  assembly
     •    back pressure transducer
     •    delay solenoid
     •    vacuum amplifier
     •    vacuum reservoir
     •    coolant temperature sensor
     •    hoses, lines, wires
     •    other  (e.g., gaskets, plugged manifold)

5.    air injection  system
         air  injection assembly
         bypass valve, dump valve  —  air pump  system
         air  diverter valve
         check valve
         drive belt
         hoses, lines, wires
         other  (e.g., air  filter,  stuck valves)

6.    PCV system
     •    PCV  valve  assembly
     •    filters
     •    hoses and  lines
     •    other  (e.g., vent tube  seal)

7 .    exhaust system
     •    exhaust manifold, tailpipe,  muffler
     •    catalytic  converter
     •    other  (e.g., mixture set  tube)
                          22

-------
          evaporative  system
              evaporative canister
              canister filter
              canister purge solenoid/valve
              hoses, lines, wires
              other (e.g., gas cap, gaskets)

     9.    engine  assembly
          •    cooling system
          •    valve adjustment
          •    belt tensions
          •    hoses, lines, wires
          •    other (e.g., battery, transmission fluid)

     10.   three-way  catalyst  system
              electrical control unit
              oxygen sensor
              barometric pressure  sensor
              load sensor  (throttle position, manifold vacuum)
              engine speed sensor
              coolant temperature  sensor
              crankshaft position  sensor
              EGR position sensor
              EGR control solenoids
              air/fuel control actuator
              air bypass solenoid/valve
              air diverter solenoid/valve
              throttle kicker/actuator
              idle speed control system
              hoses, lines, wires
              diagnostic bulb check
              diagnostic warning
              other (e.g., switches)

2.2.2  Development of Diagnostic Procedures

     Clearly,  there are a large number of possible repairs which
may be necessary  to correct emission failures. Thus, accurate and
complete diagnosis is critical to effectively repair vehicles.  In
earlier EPA studies, one of the major causes of continuing to fail
emission  cutpoints  was insufficient  diagnosis.    Thus, EPA has
undertaken studies to  develop better  diagnostic procedures.  In a
recent study,  which has not  yet been  released in report form, EPA
used  "advanced diagnostic procedures"  to  diagnose  and repair 31
vehicles with failing  emissions.  These procedures  relied heavily
on wave  form  diagnostics  (RG240  and  other dynomometer emissions
data  were not used) .   All 31 of the  vehicles  were successfully
repaired.  9 of these vehicles (29%) required catalyst repairs, 21
vehicles (67%) required oxygen sensor  repairs, and 6  vehicles  (20%)
required  both catalyst  and  oxygen  sensor repairs.    Similar
                               23

-------
procedures are now being marketed  in  the  repair industry.

2.2.3  Trace-Based Diagnostics

     §51.368(a) requires that motorists that fail the I/M test be
provided   with  software   generated,   interpretive   diagnostic
information based on the particular portions of  the test that were
failed.  One way  this requirement could be met is through analysis
of IM240 trace patterns from  failing  vehicles.

     If the typical pattern of  second-by-second emissions  during
the IM240 driving cycle  is known for both a car in proper condition
and for cars with certain common defects, the repair technician may
be able to narrow the focus of his  or  her  diagnostic efforts just
by interpreting  the  data from  the official  emission  test.   For
example, a certain emissions pattern during the final deceleration
of the  IM240  might be  associated with leaking  fuel  injectors,  a
problem that is otherwise difficult to diagnose.   It is likely that
vehicles of different models would  have somewhat different typical
and aberrant emissions patterns, so the interpretation task would
be assisted by  a computerized  data  base  of  this  information.
Possibly, a computer could do  the pattern analysis also, and print
a list of likely problems which even less sophisticated technicians
could investigate.  While this idea is potentially very powerful,
it is  clear  that  a considerable data base of testing  and  repair
experience must be assembled before its practicality can be tested.
Meanwhile, I/M agencies should avoid  program  features  that would
complicate the transmission of second-by-second emissions data from
the test-only  station to the  repair technician.

2.3  Diagnostic Equipment and Tools

2.3.1  Basic Diagnostic Tools

     Repair facilities  should have a number  of basic  diagnostic
tools.   Following is a list  of these  basic  tools,  along  with a
brief description  of their functions6.

1)   digital multimeter (DMM)  --  a test  instrument  capable  of
measuring several properties of electricity. These properties are:

     a)   voltage -- the electrical force that pushes the electrons
          through the electrical circuit.  This force  is called the
          Electro-Motive Force  (EMF)  and is measured in volts.
      Descriptions  of the functions of these tools are paraphrased from the
following sources:  1) Duffy, James E. 1990.  Modern Automotive Mechanics.
South Holland,  IL: The Goodheart-Willcox Company,  Inc.  2) Duffy, James E.
1989. Auto Electricity, Electronics, Computers. South Holland, IL: The
Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.
                                24

-------
     b)    current  —  the movement  of electrons  in  a  circuit.
          Current   is   measured  in  terms  of  amperage,   which
          represents the number of electrons (expressed in units of
          coulombs, where one  coulomb = 6.28xl018 electrons)  that
          pass  through a  circuit  in a second.
     c)    resistance  --  the electrical force which  opposes  the
          movement  of  electrons through the circuit.  One unit of
          electrical  resistance  (which is  equal to  that of  a
          conductor in which a  current of one ampere is produced by
          a potential of one volt  across its terminals)  is referred
          to  as an  ohm.

     A  digital multimeter measures  direct  current   (electrical
current  flowing  in  one  direction)  and  alternating  current
(electrical  current  which alternates  direction).   If  a  repair
facility does not  have a  DMM,  they  should  have a AC/DC voltmeter,
an  ammeter  to measure  current,  and  an ohmmeter   to  measure
resistance.

2)   scanner — a  scanner is  also  known  as a diagnostic readout
tool.   It converts computer  pulses  or signals  directly  into  a
digital or number  display.  This device  makes it easier to read
electronic trouble codes.

3)   laboratory oscilloscope -- an oscilloscope is a cathode ray
tube that  displays a line  pattern representing voltages  in relation
to time.   Voltage  is  shown along  the  vertical  axis  and time is
shown along  the horizontal  axis.  Repair  facilities  may  have  a
laboratory oscilloscope as part of an engine performance analyzer.
An engine  performance analyzer  essentially  consists  of several
pieces  of  test equipment mounted  in  one cabinet.    Besides  an
oscilloscope, the  analyzer may include a DMM, tach-dwell, exhaust
gas  analyzer,  pressure-vacuum gauge,  cylinder  balance  tester,
compression  tester,  cranking  balance  tester,  vacuum  pump,  and
timing light.  An oscilloscope must have a time base and amplitude
resolution adequate for  troubleshooting vehicle sensors.

4)   temperature gauge   (pyrometer)  -- a temperature  gauge  is
frequently used to  measure the  temperature of various components,
such as radiator temperature.   The temperature obtained with the
gauge can be compared  to specifications.   An electronic digital
pyrometer is often  used to make very precise measurements, such as
the  temperature of the  exhaust  manifold at  each  exhaust  port.
Lower temperature at any exhaust port would indicate a misfiring
cylinder.

5)   pressure  gauge  --   a pressure  gauge  is  frequently used to
measure air and fluid  pressure  in various  systems and components,
such as fuel pump pressure or engine  compression stroke pressure.
Some pressure  gauges can also be used  to  measure vacuum.
                               25

-------
6)    vacuum gauge -- a vacuum gauge is used to measure vacuum, such
as the vacuum in an engine's intake manifold,  vacuum diaphragms,
vacuum solenoid switches, and the carburetor mixture solenoid.

7)    vacuum pump (hand held) -- a hand held vacuum pump provides a
source of suction and is used in conjunction with a vacuum gauge to
test various vacuum devices.

8)    gas flowmeter  --  is used  in detection  and diagnosis of purge
failures, as described in Section 2.5.1.

9)    compression tester or  cylinder  leak down  tester  —    a
compression tester  is used to measure the amount of pressure during
the  engine  compression  stroke.    A  cylinder  leak down  tester
performs a similar  function, measuring the amount of air leakage
out of  the  engine  combustion chambers.   If readings  from these
devices  are out of specifications,  such problems  as  bad  intake
valves, burned exhaust valves, bad rings, pistons, or cylinders, or
a blown head gasket may exist.

10)  timing light with advance capability  --  a  timing light with
advance capability  not only measures engine timing,  but also exact
distributor advance with the distributor installed  in the engine.
(Timing  advance occurs  when the spark  plugs  fire  sooner  on  the
engine's compression  strokes.  More  timing advance is needed at
higher engine speeds  to  give  compression  enough time  to develop
pressure on the  piston's power stroke.)  This type of timing light
has a  degree  meter built into the back of  its  case,  which will
register exact advance.  Most large engine analyzers  also have this
feature.

11)  four or five gas  exhaust  emission analyzer  --  an exhaust gas
analyzer  draws  a   sample  of  the  exhaust   gas  out  of the  car's
tailpipe.  A four gas  analyzer measures  the amount of CO, HC, C02,
and 02 in the  exhaust.   A five gas  analyzer, which  also  measures
NOX,  may be needed in enhanced  I/M areas, where there  is a  NOX
performance standard.   The  information provided  by  a gas analyzer
indicates the  air fuel ratio entering the engine.  Repair facilities
may have  a  gas  exhaust  emission  analyzer as  part of an  engine
performance analyzer.

12)  tachometer  --  the tachometer   measures   engine  speed  in
revolutions per  minute.  It is  used to adjust engine  speed settings
and perform other  tests.

13)  dwell meter or duty cycle meter -- a dwell meter measures the
amount of time  that  voltage is  applied to  the  ignition  coil to
energize it  (duration of distributor point contact) and  is measured
in  degrees  of  distributor  rotation.   A dwell meter  is  used
primarily with older ignition systems.  In  cars without electronic
ignitions,  variation  in  the  dwell  meter  reading  indicates


                               26

-------
distributor wear problems. With electronic ignitions, dwell change
with engine speed can be normal.

     A duty cycle  meter measures duration of an electronic pulse.
The duration is expressed as  a percentage representing the width of
the pulse relative to the width of the cycle from pulse to pulse.
In  a  vehicle  with an electronic  ignition,  the duty  cycle  will
increase at high speeds  and decrease at low speeds.

14)  breakout  box -- a breakout box is  essentially a  box with a
series of test terminals, or lugs,  which can be connected to the
vehicle's  computer  wiring  harness.   A DMM  can  be  touched  to
specific box terminals which correspond to  various systems,  and
test values can be compared to specifications.

15)  access to service information  in  electronic  form via modem
during operating hours

2.3.2  Advanced Diagnostic Procedures

     In order  to diagnose causes  of emission failures  in today's
complex computer-controlled vehicles, and to ensure that a repaired
vehicle will pass  a basic I/M or IM240 retest, advanced diagnostic
procedures  will  be  necessary  to  pinpoint  the  causes   of  many
emissions failures.   The  following sections briefly discussed how
advanced  procedures   such  as  wave  form diagnostics  using  an
oscilloscope and use  of repair grade IM240 can  be used to diagnose
emission failures.   Use  of  new technology  to  diagnose  catalyst
failure is also briefly discussed.

2.3.2.1  Advanced Diagnostic Strategy Involving Oscilloscope

     An  oscilloscope  can be  used  to  diagnose problems  in  any
vehicle system that has a  voltage output which changes in amplitude
over time.   The pattern of voltage values over  time is known as a
waveform.  A properly functioning vehicle system typically has a
characteristic  waveform  which a  repair  technician  can  easily
recognize.   Deviations from this characteristic waveform represent
some system malfunction,  and specific types  of malfunctions have
characteristic  deviations   in  some  property   of   the  waveform.
Waveform diagnostics  may be  particularly useful  in  diagnosing
problems with fuel injectors and oxygen sensors.

2.3.2.2  Advanced Diagnostic Strategy Using Repair Grade IM240

     Because  the  official  IM240  transient  emissions  test  is
performed with specialized  testing  equipment,  diagnosing failed
vehicles and verifying that  subsequent repairs  were sufficient to
adequately reduce  emissions  to passing levels may be considerably
easier with similar specialized equipment.   Thus, EPA conducted a
preliminary study  of a   relatively  low  cost repair grade IM240


                               27

-------
system  (RG240) .    The  results  of  this  preliminary  study  are
summarized in Appendix 1.  The prototype RG240 system consists of
a dynamometer with uncoupled twin rolls,  a  constant volume sampler
(CVS)  with a flow rate of 100 standard cubic feet per minute

-------
(SCFM), and a BAR 90  emissions analyzer with an additional nitric
oxide analyzer.

2.3.2.3    Advanced  Diagnostic   Strategy  for  Catalyst  Failure


     It can often be difficult to determine if catalytic converter
problems are  really  the  root cause of emission  failures.   Only
about 30% of vehicles with emission failures studied by EPA require
catalyst repairs. Sometimes, damage  to a catalyst  can be diagnosed
by tapping  on  the shell.  If the shell sounds hollow, the substrate
may be missing, or if it  rattles, the substrate may be broken up,
or the  inner  baffles and shell  may be deteriorated.   At  other
times, a repair  technician may  suspect  that  high emissions in a
vehicle are the result of  a damaged catalytic converter,  but his or
her suspicions may only be confirmed or contradicted by removing
the  catalyst  and  visually  inspecting  it  and/or  measuring  the
pressure drop across  the catalyst. Even then, visual inspection or
measuring   the  pressure   drop  might   not  detect   catalyst
contamination. Also,  replacing the catalyst may reduce emissions
enough to bring  a  vehicle into  compliance  but  still  not  correct
some other  malfunction, resulting in high emissions again shortly
after replacement of the  catalyst.

     EPA is investigating additional tools for visual diagnosis of
catalyst problems. A boroscope,  which  is a fiberoptic tool which
extends  down  through  the  02  sensor  to  the  catalyst,  may  be
developed  so  that it is  practical  for inexpensive routine  use
inspecting catalysts.

      Readings  from a  gas  analyzer may also  lead  a technician to
suspect contamination of a catalyst,  even when visual inspection or
pressure drop measurements   do  not  indicate a problem.    If 02
readings are above about 5%,  indicating there  is enough oxygen for
the catalyst to burn the emissions, but CO readings are still above
0.5%  (and  other  systems  are  operating properly),  this indicates
that the catalytic converter is not oxidizing emissions from the
engine and may need to be replaced.

     For the present, EPA's  advice is as follows:
         Always  check for engine problems before replacing the
         catalyst.
         If significant engine problems are found and then fixed,
         get another  test before replacing the  catalyst unless it
         is obvious   from external  inspection  that the catalyst
         content is  missing or  damaged.
         Observe  EPA rules  for   selection   of  a  replacement
         catalyst.   More  information on these  rules can be found
         in the  following sections.
                               29

-------
2.4  Parts and Catalyst Issues

2.4.1  Parts Issues

2.4.1.1  Aftermarket Parts and EPA Tampering Policy

     According to an EPA policy memorandum7, the Agency does  not
consider it to be tampering for automotive dealers (or any persons)
to use a nonoriginal equipment aftermarket  part as a replacement
part for the purposes of maintenance or replacement of a  defective
or worn out part, if the dealer has reasonable basis for  knowing
that such use will not adversely affect emissions performance.  The
same applies to  the  use  of aftermarket parts used as part  of an
add-on,  auxiliary,   augmenting,  or  secondary  part or  system.
Adjustments  or  alterations  of  a  particular part or   system
parameter, if done for purposes of repair or maintenance  according
to the  vehicle  or  engine  manufacturer's  instructions,  are  also
acceptable.   The policy memorandum  also  clearly  defines  what
constitutes a reasonable  basis for knowing that use of aftermarket
parts will not adversely affect emissions  performance.

2.4.1.2  EPA Aftermarket Part Certification Program

     EPA has a Voluntary Aftermarket Part  Certification Program.
This program was amended  in an August 8, 1989 rule8.   Essentially,
this rule states that any  aftermarket part manufacturer that wishes
to certify its emission-related part  must  demonstrate that use of
its  part  will  not   cause  a  vehicle  to  fail  Federal  emission
standards during the  vehicle's useful life.  Furthermore, the rule
specifies  that  vehicle  manufacturers  cannot  deny a performance
warranty claim on the basis  that  use of the aftermarket  part is
improper maintenance or repair if  the part is certified  under the
voluntary  aftermarket part certification regulations.   Finally,
this rule  has a durability demonstration  requirement.

     The final rule also specifies that when the demonstration that
a  part  will not  cause  an  emissions  failure  involves emission
testing, the Federal Test Procedure  (FTP)  is the only acceptable
test.  A proposed rule, also published August 8, 19899, would allow
use of a shorter test consisting of the first  505  seconds  of FTP,
called the cold  505 test.   However,  this proposed rule has not been
finalized.
      EPA Mobile Source Enforcement Memorandum No. 1A, Office of Enforcement
and General Counsel, June 25, 1974.


     8Federal Register 54 (151): 32566-32596 .


     9Federal Register 54 (151): 32596-32602 .


                               30

-------
31

-------
     It should be pointed out that,  to date,  no aftermarket part
has  been  certified  under  the  Aftermarket Parts  Certification
Program.

2.4.1.3  EPA Aftermarket Part Warranty Requirements

     The August  8,  1989 rule  also  requires  that  all  certified
aftermarket parts be  warranted by the part manufacturer  not  to
cause emission noncompliance of the  vehicle on which the part  is
installed.   Certified parts  must  be  warranted  for  the  remaining
warranty period of the vehicle,  as required under Sections 207(a)
and 207 (b)  of the Clean Air Act.  For  instance, the warranty period
under Section 207(a)  for emission  related devices is 50,000 miles
for pre-1995 light-duty  vehicles.  If the device is replaced with
an aftermarket replacement part at 25,000 miles,  the replacement
part is warranted for the next 25,000 miles,  when the mileage  on
the vehicle is  50,000 miles.  The vehicle manufacturer is required
to  repair  or  replace without  charge those  certified  emission
related components necessary  to remedy that emission failure if it
occurs  within  the  prescribed  warranty  period.    The  vehicle
manufacturer may then  obtain reimbursement from the  certified part
manufacturer for the warranty claim.  However,  since  no aftermarket
part has been certified under the  Aftermarket Part Certification
Program, manufacturers are not currently required to replace any
non-original aftermarket emission  related part free of charge.

2.4.1.4  Locating Parts

     As a  result of  more  stringent  I/M programs  and  increased
emission related repairs, especially on  older  cars,  location  of
emission related parts to make the necessary repairs could pose a
potential problem.  The California  Bureau of Automotive Repair has
addressed  this  problem by  establishing  a  parts  availability
hotline.  The hotline helps the public buy and locate new, used,
and rebuilt emission  parts.   Motorists  are given exemptions for
emission parts  which  are no  longer  available.  (Such exemptions
would not be permissible in  an enhanced  I/M  program except with
respect  to  visual  inspections.)     The  California  Bureau  of
Automotive  Repair has   a  contract   with  the  California  Youth
Authority to administer the program.

2.4.2  Catalyst Issues

2.4.2.1   EPA  Policy  on Sale  and Use of  Aftermarket  Catalytic
Converters

     According  to  Section  203 (a)  (3)   of  the  Clean Air  Act,  the
installation,  sale  or   manufacture   of   a  converter  which  is
ineffective  or less   effective  than  the new  original  equipment
converter could constitute tampering.  Thus, EPA issued an interim


                               32

-------
enforcement policy on August 5,  1986.10 As of January 1, 1988, only
converters meeting the requirements specified by this policy or new
original  equipment or  equivalent  converters  may  be  sold  and
installed.

     Aftermarket  converters  are required  to  have  a  five year,
50,000 mile warranty on the converter shell and end pipes.  They
are  also  required  to  be  warranted  to  meet  EPA's  emission
performance standards for 25,000 miles when the vehicle  is properly
used and maintained.  Used original equipment converters are only
required to meet the performance requirements that applied  at the
time  of   sale;   no  additional  warranty   is   required.     All
manufacturers  of  new  and  used  converters  who  meet  the  EPA
requirements  must state  that   fact  in writing.    Usually this
statement  is  made  in  the  warranty  information  or  vehicle
application catalog.

     Aftermarket catalysts  must also  be labelled according  to the
format specified in the August 5, 1986 interim policy.  The  labels
include information on whether the converter is new or used,  a code
which indicates the manufacturer, a numerical designation  of the
vehicle  application  or  part number, and  the month and year of
manufacture.

     Generally, aftermarket converters can  only be  installed in
three situations:  1) the converter is missing from the vehicle when
brought  in for exhaust  system repair; 2)  the state  and local
inspection program has  determined that  the existing  converter has
been lead-poisoned, damaged, or  otherwise needs replacement; or 3)
the vehicle is more than five  years  old or has more than  50,000
miles, and there  is a  legitimate need  for converter replacement
that has  been  established  and  appropriately documented (e.g.,  a
plugged converter or unrepairable exhaust leaks). Furthermore, EPA
specifies installation  requirements.  Among these requirements are
that the same type of converter  (oxidation,  three-way, or three-way
plus  oxidation)  be  installed,  the  converter  must be  properly
connected to any air injection  components,  the converter must be
installed  in  the  same  location as  the  original,  and  the same
configuration  (single exhaust, dual exhaust, dual in-line catalyst
catalysts, etc.) must be used.

     Aftermarket catalysts sold in California must be capable of
meeting more  stringent California  emission standards.  However,
these catalysts must meet the same warranty requirements specified
under  federal  policy;  that is,  the  vehicle must meet  emission
performance standards for 25,000 miles when the vehicle  is properly
used and maintained.
     1 0
      Federal Register, August 5, 1986, 51 (150) :28114-28119.


                               33

-------
2.4.2.2  Special Situations

     Often,  repair  facilities must repair vehicle emission systems
on vehicles which have modifications or other special situations
which make it  difficult for the facility to determine what it must
do to  comply  with  EPA policy.   For instance,  a  repair  shop may
receive a vehicle  in  which an  original  engine has been  replaced
with an engine from an older vehicle, and the  exhaust system needs
replaced.   The original  engine  may also  be smaller  (e.g.,  6-
cylinder) than the  replacement engine (e.g., 8-cylinder) .  In such
a case,  the facility must replace  the exhaust system  with one
equivalent to  the certified configuration of the same model year or
newer vehicle of this type.   If  the vehicle  was  certified for a
single exhaust with a three-way plus  oxidation catalyst, it must be
replaced  with   an   exhaust   system  of  this   configuration.
Furthermore,  the exhaust  system  (and  catalytic converter)  would
have to be able to handle the capacity of the larger replacement
engine.

     Repair facilities may also be  confused  about how  to  comply
with EPA policy when repairing vehicles which have been tampered
with by do-it-yourselfers.  Essentially, if a  repair facility must
perform  any  work  on any  part of  the  vehicle  which  has  been
previously tampered with,  the  facility  must  perform the correct
repair or not do it all in order not to be liable for tampering.
This is true  regardless of the age or mileage on the vehicle and
applies  to  any  motor  vehicle or motor vehicle engine  which was
designed  to meet  federal emission  standards  (all  1968  or newer
model year for passenger cars and light-duty trucks).

     There are  a number  of other  special situations  which could
cause  confusion for repair facilities  performing  exhaust  system
repairs.  If  a repair facility has questions about how to  comply
with EPA policy and what acts may constitute tampering, they should
contact EPA by calling the Field Operations and Support Division
 (6406J),  U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,  Washington,  B.C.
20460  (phone  (202)233-9100).

2.5  Causes and Repair of Purge and Pressure Failures

2.5.1  Purge Failures

     The  evaporative  purge  test  is conducted  during  an  IM240
transient dynamometer  test to detect vehicles with  inoperative
evaporative canister purge systems.   The test procedure  includes
disconnecting the test vehicle's vapor purge line running from the
canister to  the engine, and installing a gas flowmeter  in the line.
After installing the  flow meter in the  evaporative purge system,
the vehicle is operated  over the  IM240  transient  cycle, and the
cumulative vapor purge flow in  units of  liters are recorded.  The

                               34

-------
vehicle is recorded as a failure if its  cumulative vapor purge is
less than 1.0 liter.

     An alternative purge  test  can be used if the Administrator
determines that such a test would not  adversely affect  the proper
determination of system integrity  or  the proper operation of the
vehicle.    One   alternative  purge  test  has been   proposed  by
Environmental Systems  Products, Inc. (ESP) .ll The alternative purge
test  is  conducted by allowing  the helium to flow  through the
canister during the IM240 tailpipe test and the exhaust is analyzed
for the presence of helium  using a mass spectrometer.   The EPA has
approved this test in concept; however, the pass/fail  limits and
algorithms require additional research and development before this
procedure is ready for use in official  I/M test lanes.

     There  are  a number  of typical  causes  of  purge failures.
First, the canister purge solenoid or vacuum-operated valve can be
missing, disconnected or bypassed,  have vacuum leaks,  stick,  or be
otherwise inoperative.  In addition,  vacuum or vent  lines can be
disconnected or missing, plugged, damaged, or misrouted. Moreover,
the purge hose can be  disconnected, missing, split, or not sealed.
Also,  the  canister purge  thermal vacuum switch can be stuck, or
there  may be no  emissions control module signal to  the  purge
solenoid.    Furthermore,  simultaneous  purge  and pressure  test
failures can result  from a missing canister or EFE control switch,
a  disconnected  or  leaking  carburetor  bowl  vent   line,   or   a
disconnected  bowl  vent solenoid  or  fuel  line to  the canister.
Purge failures are usually  caused by an inoperative canister purge
solenoid  or valve,  or  disconnected,  missing, or  damaged purge
hoses .

2.5.2  Pressure Failures

     The pressure test, or evaporative  system integrity test, is
used to determine the  integrity of a vehicle's  evaporative system,
and fuel  tank.   In  order  to perform  evaporative system pressure
testing, the following equipment is needed -- an air or nitrogen
gas bottle, a standard regulator,  hoses connecting the tank to  a
pressure  meter  and   to  the  vehicle's  evaporative   system,  and
computer  hardware  to  interface  the  metering  system  with   a
computerized analyzer. The test  sequence consists of  the following
steps:

1)   Test equipment is connected to the fuel tank  canister hose at
     the canister end. The gas cap is  checked to ensure that  it is
     properly, but not excessively  tightened.
      Environmental Protection Agency.  1991.  Alternative Purge and
Pressure Test Procedures. Memo from Phil Lorang to Regional Air Directors.
July 14, 1994.


                               35

-------
2)    The system is pressurized to 14±0.5 inches of water without
     exceeding 26  inches of water  system pressure.   Fuel tank
     pressurization is done by modulating the nitrogen flow into
     the fuel  system by  successive  opening and  closing  of the
     control valve by the operator.   Modulating  the nitrogen flow
     into the system allows a higher  pressure nitrogen  flow to be
     safely used to pressurize the system.

3)    The gas cap  is loosened, and the vehicle is allowed to stand
     for up to  two  minutes to determine if it can continue to hold
     pressure.

4)    If pressure  in  the  system remains  above  8  inches of water
     after two minutes, the vehicle passes the test.

     An alternative test procedure may be used if is shown to be
equivalent or better to the satisfaction of the Administrator.  As
with the purge test, an alternative pressure test has been proposed
by ESP, Inc., and approved by the  EPA.12   The alternative pressure
test differs from the  standard test in that  the  fuel  tank is
pressurized  through  the  fuel  inlet  rather  than   through  the
evaporative  hose  from the canister  end.  The  canister  hose is
clamped in order  to seal the system while  the gas cap  is  checked on
a separate rig to  ensure that it  seals properly.

     Pressure failures indicate the potential existence  of leakage
on vehicles'  evaporative emissions   control  system components,
which  include  the  gas cap,  filler neck,  sending  unit, rollover
valve,  and vent hoses.  The most  common cause of a pressure failure
is a  faulty gas  cap.   As  mentioned in the  previous section,
simultaneous purge and pressure  test failures  can result  from  a
missing canister or EFE control  switch, a disconnected  or leaking
carburetor bowl vent line,  or a disconnected bowl vent solenoid or
fuel line to the canister.

2.6  Alternatives  to Repair

     The Clean Air Act Amendments  of 1990 define  "programs to
encourage the voluntary  removal  from use and the  marketplace of
pre-1980 model year  light  duty  vehicles  and pre-1980 model year
light duty trucks" as a transportation control measure  in Section
108(f).  A vehicle scrappage program  could be such a measure.   A
scrappage  program  has   the  potential   to  create   additional
flexibility, for governments and industry alike, by  allowing the
generation  of  emission  reduction credits from existing  mobile
sources that could be traded to  stationary  sources.   EPA analysis
      Environmental Protection Agency.  1991.  Alternative Purge and
Pressure Test Procedures. Memo from Phil Lorang to Regional Air Directors.
July 14, 1994.


                               36

-------
indicates that scrappage programs for pre-1980 model year vehicles
can exhibit a wide range of effectiveness,  depending on both the
program  design and  the  very uncertain  values of  a  number  of
important variables.

     A state or local government can design  a scrappage program as
a SIP  measure or,  in conjunction  with  a private company,  as  a
program to generate  emission credits  to  satisfy  existing or new
source-specific requirements.  Programs would basically work in the
following way.   A  state  or local  government  or company would
advertise for the purchase of certain vehicles.  Owners would then
voluntarily sell  their vehicles  to  the sponsor of the program and
the vehicles would be removed from the fleet.   The sponsor would
receive an  emission  credit  for  each car removed  from operation
equivalent to the difference between the emissions  from the retired
vehicle  and  the  emissions  from  the replacement  vehicle.    An
agency-sponsored scrappage program could be financed by a surcharge
on registration or testing.

     There are a number of variations on this basic program, which
could  decrease  fraud  and  misuse,   decrease   the   effects  of
uncertainty,  and increase cost effectiveness.   For instance, the
Environmental  Defense Fund  and  General Motors Corporation  have
proposed  a  scrappage program design  that  targets  high-emitting
vehicles regardless of age,  awards emission reduction credits on
the basis  of emissions  testing  for  each  scrapped  vehicle,  and
creates an emissions reduction "pool"  for the purpose of nullifying
the incentive to tamper  with individual vehicles.

     Also, programs  that  use a  remote  sensing device  (RSD)  to
target vehicles for participation in a scrappage  program may reduce
some of the uncertainty  found in programs with  eligibility based
only on age  and improve cost-effectiveness.  Specifically, RSD may
increase program  cost-effectiveness by helping identify older cars
that are higher emitters than the average car of their age, and it
may reduce credit overestimation  by helping identify vehicles which
are actually  in active service and not just being stored or used
very infrequently.  Scrapping only  vehicles identified by on-road
remote sensing should, therefore, produce  more emission reductions
per scrapped  vehicle.

     Adding a vehicle scrappage option to an I/M  program is another
way to improve program benefit and/or reduce costs.  Vehicles that
fail  an  I/M  test,   and  which  have  not  yet  been  successfully
repaired, or  are  known  to  need repairs  costing greater  than  a
predetermined  amount,  would  become  eligible  for   a  scrappage
program.  Depending  upon the  estimated  cost of repair, emission
reduction credits would be based  upon either the vehicles' emission
levels from an IM240 test,  or emission estimates from the MOBILE
model.  Scrappage program designs that incorporate an I/M element
in this  way will  not only have greater  assurance that they are


                               37

-------
retiring high emitting vehicles,  but could possibly offer lower

-------
incentives since the vehicle owner is faced with immediate repair
costs if the vehicle is not scrapped.

     While no  owner would be pleased  to have  to  get rid  of  a
difficult-to-repair car and purchase a  new or used vehicle as  a
replacement,  the reality is that  it might be the logical thing to
do for some cars. An option to scrapping the old car is to sell it
to an owner living  outside the boundary  of the I/M program. The
free market will surely see some  of this happen. I/M agencies may
wish to discourage or facilitate it. They certainly should consider
and be ready to deal with the issues of  purchasers who commute into
the I/M area,  I/M  area residents who  try  to  use  an  out-of-area
address or name to register a vehicle while garaging the vehicle in
the I/M area,  and the  issue of consumer protection for the person
who may buy a high emitting vehicle without  realizing its history.
                               39

-------
3.0   TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE FOR REPAIR INDUSTRY

3.1  Providing Information to Repair Facilities

3.1.1  Regulatory Requirements

     §51.369 (a)  of the I/M rule addresses the  issue of providing
technical assistance to the repair industry:

     The oversight agency shall provide the repair industry with
     information  and  assistance  related  to vehicle  inspection
     diagnosis and repair.

This technical assistance  requirement  applies  to  both basic and
enhanced I/M areas.   also states:

     The  [oversight]   agency   shall   regularly   inform  repair
     facilities of  changes in the  inspection  program,  training
     course  schedules,  common problems being found with particular
     engine  families,  diagnostic tips and the  like.

3.1.2  Newsletters

     The most  obvious  approach  states  can  use  to  meet  this
requirement  is through distribution of  a newsletter.  Several I/M
areas and states already distribute their own newsletter, developed
specifically  for that  nonattainment  area.    Examples  are  the
California Bureau of Automotive Repair's Repair Reporter and the
State of Wisconsin Department of Transportation's The VIP Analyzer.
Sample  copies of  these newsletters can be  found  in Appendix 2.
Also,  some  states  in the  process of  developing enhanced  I/M
programs are requiring the I/M contractor to develop an approach to
meet the technical assistance requirement.

     If a state does not  wish  to  develop its  own newsletter, or
lacks the resources to do so, it can use  I/M newsletters reproduced
by other  organizations.    One  such newsletter  is The  CSCV  I&M
Quarterly Update.  This newsletter was  developed by the Coalition
for  Safer,  Cleaner  Vehicles  expressly  to meet  the  technical
assistance requirement of the rule, and is  published for CSCV by
the Aftermarket  Research  Institute,  Inc.    (CSCV  is a nonprofit
organization formed to assist  states in the  adoption of effective
emissions and safety inspection programs.)   A sample copy of this
newsletter can also be found in Appendix 2.    It should be noted
that some of the  individuals participating  in CSCV are  associated
with firms that may bid on competitive solicitations for education
programs, hotline services or I/M testing and diagnostic equipment.
More information on The CSCV I&M Quarterly Update can be obtained
by writing to:
                               40

-------
     Coalition for Safer, Cleaner Vehicles
     321 D Street NE
     Washington,  DC   20002

     Phone:   (202)543-4499
     Fax:     (202)544-7865

Newsletters  are  also  published by  several private  companies.
Technician ONLINE  publishes a  monthly  newsletter,  Driveability
Technician.  Automotive Information Systems, Inc.  also publishes a
newsletter, Autoliner.  Additional information and addresses for
these  companies   can  be   found   in   Appendix  3.     Brentwood
Communications publishes  a  newsletter  titled  Emission  Repair
Monthly,   which   provides  information   on   emissions   theory,
diagnostics   and   computerized  vehicle  repair   procedures.
Information on this newsletter can be obtained by writing to the
following address:

     Brentwood Communications
     P.O. Box 2595
     Vista, California   92083

     Phone:   (800)697-9678

In  addition,  Carter  Environmental  Communications  publishes  a
newsletter titled  I&M Update, which provides information on I/M-
related  issues in  Maine  and other states.   Information on this
newsletter can be  obtained by writing to  the following address:

     Carter Environmental Communications
     18 North Street
     Portland, Maine   04101

     Phone:   (800)246-3388

Another  newsletter,   The  Automotive  Emissions  Repair  Network,
provides information on IM240 emissions and diagnostics, including
working with scan tools,  multimeters,  lab  scopes, 4 and 5 exhaust
gas analyzers and  repair  grade  IM240  equipment.   Information on
this  newsletter  can  be  obtained  by writing  to the  following
address:

     The Automotive Emissions Repair Network
     RR No. 1 Box  122
     Barnstead,  NH   03218

     Phone:   (603)664-2955
                               41

-------
3.1.3  Service Information

     In order to effectively correct emissions problems on current
technology vehicles, it is  critical  that  repair  facilities have
access to model specific repair manuals.  Of course, a collection
of model specific repair manuals can occupy substantial space in a
repair  facility, and  quickly wear out or  are  misplaced.   These
problems can be eliminated by using computer-based repair manuals.
A number of  publishers  already have  repair manuals available in
electronic form.

     Also,   in order  to effectively  repair emission  problems,
independent  repair  facilities must  have  access  to  the  service
bulletins  that  original   equipment  manufacturers  provide  to
dealerships.   As  discussed in Section 1.3.3,  EPA's forthcoming
final service information  availability rule will require original
equipment manufacturers  to provide this information  to independent
facilities  in a standardized electronic  format  currently being
developed by  SAE.

3.1.4  Electronic Bulletin Boards

     Although §51.369(a)(1)  of the I/M rule does  not suggest the
use of electronic bulletin boards  as an approach for  addressing the
technical   assistance   requirement,   states   should   consider
establishing  electronic bulletin  boards as a  way to communicate
with the repair community.   Bulletin boards  could,  in fact, be used
in a multitude of different ways to share I/M-related information.
For instance, electronic bulletin boards could be accessible to the
public as well as repair  technicians, and could include information
on status of  regulations, downloadable standardized  forms, pattern
failure data, and  IM240  test data for  cars  coming in for repairs.
Furthermore,  bulletin  boards could  provide an  opportunity for
technicians to describe hard to solve emission problems and solicit
solutions from other technicians.  Moreover, electronic bulletin
boards  could  include  performance  monitoring  statistics  and
information  provided by  repair   facilities  on  their  skill  in
repairing  specific  makes   of  vehicles  or older  versus  newer
vehicles.

     One state has already discussed plans to develop an electronic
bulletin board to provide technicians and  repair  facilities with
access to performance results and  I/M program information.  This
bulletin board  could  reduce printing and  mailing  costs  for the
state.   In  addition, EPA is aware  of  at least  one  electronic
bulletin board  which  has  been established informally  by repair
technicians to share information  on I/M issues.  Also, Technician
ONLINE, a private company, operates an electronic bulletin board
which  enables a technician to  access  technical  bulletins  and
service information compiled directly from field experiences. This


                               42

-------
43

-------
bulletin  board also  functions  as  a  hotline  service.    It  is
described in greater detail in Appendix 3.

3.2  Hot Line Services

3.2.1  Regulatory Requirements

     Section 51.369(a) (2)  of  the Inspection/Maintenance Program
Requirements published November  5,  1992  in the Federal Register
states:

     "The (oversight)  agency shall provide a hot line service to
assist repair  technicians  with specific  repair problems,  answer
technical questions that arise in the repair process, and answer
questions related to the legal requirements of state and federal
law  with regard  to emission  control  device  tampering,  engine
switching, or similar issues."

     In essence,  this  regulatory language  contains three distinct
service areas that a program agency is required  to provide through
a hot line.  These three areas are:

     (1)   provide specific repair advice,
     (2)   provide technical information during the repair process,
          and
     (3)   respond to legal  and agency policy questions on specific
          vehicle conditions/repair strategy needed for compliance.

     The provision for a hot line service is required in both basic
and enhanced I/M  areas.   This  includes  the areas  of the country
that choose  to opt into either  the basic or enhanced  I/M programs
if they seek the corresponding level of emission reduction credit.

     Further,   §51.369(d)    requires   that    the    SIP    (State
Implementation Plan) "...  include a description of the technical
assistance  plan  to  be   implemented,  ...."    The  "technical
assistance"   language  refers  to  the  requirements  of §51.369(a),
which includes the hot line service requirements.

3.2.2    Minimum  Hot   Line Capabilities   that Meet  Regulatory
Requi rements

     The state program agency must provide a hot line  service that
provides a basic level  of technical service in order  to assist the
technician   (or   anyone   seeking    technical  advice,   e.g.,
do-it-yourselfers) during the repair process  and also answers the
legal and policy questions  as they relate  to specific vehicle
conditions and repairs.   The state may choose to contract for some
of these services if certain conditions, as discussed in Section
3.2.3,  are met.
                               44

-------
     With  regard  to  providing  repair  advice  and  technical
information during the repair process,  the staff on this hot line
must have an understanding of the I/M test procedures used in that
state,  and  an understanding  of the  basic  vehicle  systems  and
components,  as well as a working knowledge of how the two relate to
each other in  order to answer generic repair  questions.  It is not
necessary that such a service offer repair advice on an in-depth
vehicle-specific level which is available from many commercial hot
line services  (e.g.,  "What is the voltage on pin 9 of model xx?" as
opposed to a generic question, "How could a purge failure affect
IM240 emissions?") .  Therefore, the  staff of any technical hot line
service offered under §51.369 (a) (2) must at least have a general
understanding of emission repair diagnostic procedures.

     With  regard  to  responding  to   legal  and  agency  policy
questions, the hot line  staff that is chosen  must be familiar with
state and federal  specific I/M rules, regulations, and policies in
regard  to all  aspects  of  the  I/M program  (tampering,  engine
switching policy,  catalyst replacement policy, consumer protection
policy, location of I/M  test stations,  I/M cutpoints for different
model years, waivers, reinspection, etc.).

     For minimum  access requirements,  it is preferable,  but not
required,   that   the  technical   hot   line  established  under
51.369(a) (2)  be  separate  from  the  public  awareness  information
number  which  could be  established by  a state  under 51.368(a).
However,  technicians  (or  others)  in  need  of advice  during the
repair  process should not be made  to wait while general program
information is disseminated.  If a  state chooses to operate only
one hot line,  it must ensure that the hot line has enough capacity
or special routing features so technicians will not have to wait
for repair information.

     If  the  repair  questions  are  more vehicle-specific  than
generic, hot line personnel must be  able  to refer the technician to
additional  sources of information  that could further assist the
technician in  the  repair process. At a minimum,  hot line personnel
should  be  prepared  to  provide  the  technicians  with  general
information summarizing methods  to access available commercial hot
line services that support the specific  area of the question,  as
well as their  general capabilities and costs. The section titled,
"Guidelines for Selecting Commercial Hot Lines"  discussed later in
this document  (Section 3.2.5) may provide a starting point for the
states  in preparing this information.

     A  state may also wish to propose alternatives to this basic
referral requirement, such  as referring technicians to a specific
repair manual.  However, the burden would be on the state to show
how such alternatives would work in practice (e.g., would the hot
line operator have specific knowledge of appropriate repair


                               45

-------
manuals; where  would the  technician obtain  the manual  if  the
technician did not have it, etc.).

3.2.3  Options for Hot Line Management

     There is considerable  flexibility with regard to how the rule
is administered.

     Conceptually, paraphrased areas (1)  and  (2), which address the
issues  of   providing   specific  repair  advice  and   technical
information  during  the  repair process,  probably have  the  most
flexibility.  Some of the options available  to the states include
the following.

     1)  The  state could operate  the entire  repair  information
     function itself.

     2)  The  state could have  a contractor handle all  the repair
     information  hot line   functions  including  detailed  repair
     questions.

     3)  The state could  provide a repair hot line that provides a
     basic level of technical  service, and refers detailed repair
     questions to commercial repair  sevices.  With this approach,
     the referral could be:   (1)  to a specific  hot  line service
     under contract,  (2) to one of several  hot  line services under
     contract, (3)  to one or many hot line services that meet state
     requirements (but not under contract) , or  (4) any service that
     the state  has  identified that can provide  support  for  the
     specific repair questions  asked by  the  technicians  (i.e.,
     essentially a free market with  minimal oversight  to assure
     that the minimum referral requirements  in Section 3.2.2  are
     met) .

     4)  The state could  turn over the operation and management of
     a basic repair hot  line to the  state  I/M contractor, and the
     contractor  would  subsequently  refer   the  more  detailed
     questions to commercial hot  line services, or

     5)  The state could work in partnership with an I/M contractor
     in establishing and operating  a hot line  service  (i.e.,  a
     combination of  options 3  and 4 above).

     Other options in admininstering the functional requirements of
the repair hot line  may exist.

     Paraphrased  area  (3)  of  the rule  encompasses a  variety of
services.   The  most straightforward service  requirement  is  the
dissemination of  the legal  requirements and policies  of the  I/M
program.  A more complicated service  requirement  is responding to
questions from the service  industry  that may involve interpreting


                               46

-------
both Federal and State legal  and policy guidelines for individual
situations.  Interpretation of legal  and policy guidelines may be
considered "an inherently governmental function" in many states.
As an aside, Federal regulations prohibit the Federal government
from performing an inherently  governmental function under contract.

     EPA feels that  a state  could contract out  area  (3)  if the
following conditions are met:

     1)  the state can  legally do so (i.e.,  this activity would not
     be considered an inherent governmental function under state
     law) ,

     2)  the state is  comfortable with the contractor making these
     decisions,  and

     3)  the hot  line  staff  that  is chosen should be familiar with
     state  and   federal  specific  I/M rules,  regulations,  and
     policies in  regard  to  all aspects  of the  I/M  program,  as
     discussed in Section 3.2.2.

     Assuming that the above criteria are met,  and a state could
contract out a legal/policy hot line,  EPA still recommends that the
state program agency itself  establish a hot line  to  answer the
questions related to  the  legal requirements and interpretation of
state and federal laws and  the state  I/M program  itself.  This is
because  there  can  be  unique  repair  situations  that  do  not
conveniently fit  within  frequently  encountered  legal  and policy
guidelines.  For  this  reason, many states  currently offer hot line
services to address  such  unusual circumstances.   In addition, one
of the purposes of this section of the I/M rule was to encourage
the states to work more closely with  the repair industry.  If the
state contracts  out all of the interface with  the  repair industry,
including the legal  assistance, this interface  element with the
repair industry envisioned by the regulations will be lost.

     Another reason supporting the recommendation that the state
operate the legal hot  line is because of the volume and variety of
state and  local  laws  that  a given hot line  service  may handle.
Because there currently are a limited  number of commercial hot line
services,  it is  reasonable  to  assume that  any given  hot  line
service contracted by a state will in reality also be supporting
many  different  states.   Unless  a   contractor  assigns  specific
personnel for each state, there  could be difficulties experienced
by a contractor  in becoming familiar with the  many state and local
laws and regulations,  as well as the federal laws  and regulations.
This could be particularly problematic if  the  contractor personnel
are also providing detailed repair advice.  If the hot line service
contractor is capable  of establishing a  hot  line service with a
dedicated legal  interpreter  for each particular  state,  then the
possibility  of  the   contractor  successfully  handling  the  legal


                               47

-------
questions will be much greater.  If a state chooses  to contract out
this area, the state  will ultimately have to deal with situations
that could  arise  if  the  information provided  by the  hot  line
service is in error.

     In summary, the  state must provide a mechanism to ensure that
a hot line service will exist that addresses the three areas listed
in  Section   3.2.1.    We would  expect  that  most states  would
physically operate a  hot line that handles  the  basic functional
requirements  (including legal  issues),  and  employ  one  of  the
referral  options  discussed previously.   The states  are free,
however, to propose other methods for administering the required
hot line service,  as  long as sufficient information is provided to
allow a  reasonable  expectation  that  the alternate method would
result  in   a  system  that   would   meet  the  requirements   of
§51.369(a)(2).  Finally, §51.369(d) requires that  the SIP include
a  "...  description  of  the technical  assistance  program to  be
implemented . . . . "  A description of the method (s)  that  will  be used
to administer the hot line and the functions/capabilities that will
be  offered  by  the   service  are considered  to  be  part  of  the
description  of  the   technical  assistance  program  required  by
§51.369(d).

3.2.4  Repair Support Enhancements

     In addition to the  approaches that have been discussed above,
the  state may opt to enhance  its  program using  other approaches
beyond  the minimum program that is  required.    Listed  below  are
several ideas, some  of  which  states  are presently proposing,  as
enhancements  to   technician  assistance.   This  may not  be  an
exhaustive list, but  should still be useful.  Individual  states may
wish to develop other enhancements to meet their specific needs.

     1)  The state  (or its contractor) may wish to negotiate pricing
     and access  arrangements with one  or more  national repair hot
     line services which a registered technician  could call  for
     free, or at nominal charge, or  at cost.

     2)  The  state  may wish  to  identify minimum qualifications for
     referral services to be included  on  the state referral list.
     For  example,  repair subjects covered,  access requirements,
     hours of operation, etc.

     3)  The  state  (or  its  contractor)  could set up  a diagnostic
     center,  establish electronic (phone or other) communication
     capabilities  with in-field BAR90 analyzers or other diagnostic
     equipment, and could provide the capability for technicians to
     take cars to  the center  if the  over-the-phone  approach  is
     unsuccessful.

     4)  The state  (or its contractor)  could set  up an electronic


                               48

-------
     library from which the technician could down-load information
     or otherwise access.

     5) The state (or its contractor)  could establish a library of
     failure information on vehicles in the  local fleet that was
     electronically accessible.


3.2.5  Guidelines for Selecting Commercial Hot Lines

     Listed below are guidelines state agencies could consider for
selection or development of a hot line service.  This list may not
encompass all the criteria necessary to consider in choosing a hot
line; however, the list should be broad enough to provide useful
guidance.  Even so,  individual  states  may  have  specific needs not
mentioned here, and of course,  those would need to be considered
when using the following guidance.  In preparing these guidelines,
EPA reviewed  the guidelines  from several  sources,  including the
Coalition for Safer,  Cleaner Vehicles'  (CSCV), Education/Training
Advisory Board.  Some of those  guidelines  were  incorporated where
appropriate.

     Even though these  guidelines are directed  more  toward the
commercial  services,  many of  the  criteria  specified  in  these
guidelines would still be applicable to a state-run program.  When
reviewing these  guidelines it  is important  to remember that the
IM240  data  are not yet  available.   A hot line  should  have the
capability to use and incorporate these data when they do become
available.

3.2.5.1  Guidelines for Enhanced I/M Areas

     1)  A  hot  line  service  should  provide  the  auto  repair
     facilities   with   comprehensive  technical   information.
     Personnel providing repair information  should have in-depth
     knowledge of the vehicle in question.

        The  hot line should be capable of providing assistance in:
     a)  diagnosis  and  repair   of   malfunctions   in  computer
     controlled,  closed  loop vehicles (e.g.,  1981  and later)  as
     well as earlier vehicles  (e.g., those with oxidation catalysts
     or non-catalyst) to which the I/M program  applies,  b)  the
     application of emission control theory and diagnostic data to
     the diagnosis and repair on the transient emission test and
     the evaporative system functional checks, and c)  the use of
     diagnostic  information  on systematic or  repeated failures
     observed in the transient  emission test and the evaporative
     system functional checks.

     2) The hot line capacity should be sized  to minimize access
     time during periods of high demand.


                               49

-------
3)  The hot  line should provide a mechanism to ensure that the
necessary preliminary systems checks have been completed prior
to making the initial repair call.  This will minimize the hot
line service from being  flooded with inquiries relating to
basic service questions.  This may take the form of a standard
checklist to be provided by the hot line service or initial
questioning by the hot  line  technician to determine if these
checks  have  been  made.    The  existence  and  necessity  of
conducting  such   preliminary  checks   should  be   widely
distributed to the repair industry.

4)  The information should be provided in a timely manner after
receipt  of a  call.   In  general, the  information  should be
provided almost immediately  (e.g.,  within an hour).

5)   The hot line  should be  convenient  and cost  effective
(local, 800, or 900 number)  with minimum  operating hours that
cover  the  hours  of  normal  repair shop  activity in  the I/M
area.

6)  The service should have a complete collection of factory
service manuals,  wiring diagrams, factory service bulletins,
PROM update information, and a demonstrated ability to acquire
and to  incorporate  the most  recent  information available.
This  collection  should  generally  be for  all model  years
covered by the I/M program.

   Several   efforts  are   underway   which  would   provide
independent service facilities/hot lines with greater access
to  OEMs service  information.   EPA's  September  24,  1991
proposed rule on onboard diagnostics requires manufacturers to
make   emission-related  repair  and   service   information
(including recall information) available to all independent
technicians and  services.    Portions  of this  proposal are
expected to be finalized in 1994.  Also, beginning in 1998,
the  proposed  rules would  require this information  to  be
provided in a  standardized  electronic format currently being
developed by the  Society of  Automotive Engineers (SAE)  under
SAE  J2008:    Recommended Organization  of Vehicle  Service
Information.  A draft version of this document was released in
July of  1993.

7)   The hot line  should have  available current access  to
various service information in electronic form.  The service
should be upgradeable to SAE J2008 format when available.

8)  The service should remain current with the local I/M fleet
as the model year mix changes with time.

9)  The  hot  line  service should create  a database  with the
repair   knowledge   (not  IM240  data)   gained  through  the


                          50

-------
assistance provided by the  service.  This database will give
historical perspective on a particular vehicle and/or vehicle
type.  The database should be accessible such that  it could be
                          51

-------
     easily downloaded to local  or  county air pollution program
     databases.

     10)  Bilingual services are  appropriate  in areas  with large
     non-English speaking populations.

     11)  The hot line should have facsimile  (fax)  capabilities.

3.2.5.2  Guidelines For Basic I/M Areas

     The guidelines state agencies can consider for selection or
development of a hot line service listed in Section 3.2.5.1 will
generally also pertain to the basic I/M areas.  Again, this list
may  not  encompass  all  the  criteria necessary  to consider  in
choosing or developing  a  hot  line.    Individual  states  may have
specific needs not mentioned here. It is also  possible  that states
with long-running basic I/M programs already have a state operated
hot line in place that meets and/or exceeds these guidelines.

3.2.5.3  Enhanced Capabilities

     There are several other enhanced capabilities states may look
for  when selecting  or  developing  a  hot  line service.   These
additional capabilities require more  equipment and expertise on the
part of the  hot line service.  It  should be noted that,  in order to
be in compliance with Section 51.366 of the I/M rule,  states are
required to collect the repair data.

     1) The capability for modem to  modem transfer  of data from
     specific types of diagnostic equipment  (e.g.,  BAR  90, scan
     tools,  etc.) to the commercial  hot line.  This includes the
     ability to provide direct computer access to symptom/emission
     failure specific repair information.

     2) If possible,  the state may want to provide a mechanism for
     the hot line service to:  1) accept from the program agency I/M
     repair data  for  all  the  repair  facilities, 2)  analyze the
     data, and 3)  incorporate the data into its database.  The hot
     line service would then have a much larger database to draw
     from when providing assistance  to repair technicians.

3.2.6   Available  Commercial  and Product Information  Hot Line
Services

     Currently,  at least six companies operate commercial hot line
services. A bibliography of these commercial  hot line  services is
given in Appendix 3.

     There  are many  other companies  that  sponsor  technical hot
lines relating to companies' own parts.  Many of these other hot
lines  are designed to answer specific questions on products of


                               52

-------
particular companies;  thus, they vary in usefulness and scope.  If
you are a customer of  these products,  the  hot  lines  are usually
free,   but  may  be  limited to  directions  on how  to install  a
particular product.  Since the hot lines specified in §51.369(a) (2)
are diagnostic  in nature,  these  other  hot lines  will  not  be
discussed here.

3.3  Technician Assistance Centers

     Another possible  approach  for providing technical assistance
to the repair industry  is  by  establishing  technician assistance
centers where technicians  can  take  difficult to  repair  cars for
expert diagnosis.   Of  course, it could be logistically difficult,
time consuming and expensive for technicians to leave their shops
and take  a  vehicle to  an  assistance  center.   However,  if  such
centers are conveniently located,  and if technicians can receive
prompt service,  such  centers can be useful when  a technician is
faced with a particularly difficult diagnostic  challenge.

3.3.1  Texas' Research/Outreach Program

     The  Texas   Natural  Resource  Conservation  Commission  is
currently in the process of developing  a Research/Outreach Program
with  two  facilities    (one  in  Dallas/Ft.  Worth  and  one  in
Houston/Galveston), which would be  equipped with two IM240 lanes.
These lanes would be used to  develop diagnostic procedures which
would  then  be  disseminated to technicians in  the  Texas repair
community.

     The  centers   will  also  provide  vehicle  emission  repair
technicians in and around Texas nonattainment areas with technical
assistance.   First,  state-certified technicians  would  have the
opportunity to access  stored Research/Outreach Program data which
can be of assistance  with  emissions repairs.   Information would
also  be  disseminated  through a  newsletter and an  electronic
bulletin board.   Furthermore,  Research/Outreach Center personnel
would conduct periodic seminars in the  nonattainment areas.  Also,
the centers would be available to state- certified technicians with
problem vehicles needing expert diagnosis.  In addition,  Texas may
establish a hot line to the centers at a later  date.
                               53

-------
4.0   PERFORMANCE MONITORING

4.1  Summary of Recommendations

     As part  of  the I/M  rule's  requirements to  improve  repair
effectiveness, state oversight agencies are required to monitor the
performance of  individual repair  facilities.   In  enhanced  I/M
areas,  oversight  agencies must provide to the public at the time of
initial I/M failure, a  summary  of the performance of local repair
facilities that have repaired vehicles for retest.  The I/M rule
specifies four statistics  to be included in performance monitoring
programs.  These statistics are the number of vehicles  submitted
for a retest after repair by the repair facility,  the  percentage
passing on first retest,  the percentage requiring more than  one
repair/retest trip before  passing,  and  the percentage receiving a
waiver.   These  four  statistics are  required,  unless  programs
provide alternative statistics which convey similar information on
the relative ability of repair facilities  in providing effective
and  convenient   repair,   in  light   of   the  age  and   other
characteristics of vehicles presented for repair  at each facility.
Any  alternative   statistics  will  need  to  be  supported  by  a
reasonable rationale of why they provide similar information before
the Administrator  can  allow  their  substitution  for the required
statistics.    The  rule also   specifically  requires that  these
statistics (or acceptable  alternatives) must  be provided  to  the
public at the time of initial  failure.

     Programs  must also  provide  feedback to individual  repair
facilities on at  least  an  annual basis  regarding their success in
repairing vehicles. Also,  a prerequisite for retest is a completed
repair form that indicates which repairs were performed,  as well as
any technician recommended repairs  that were  not  performed,  and
identification of  the facility that performed repairs.

     Many states already have performance  monitoring programs or
have proposed such programs.   Performance monitoring programs
already  exist in  Arizona;  Florida;   New  York;  Wisconsin;  and
Louisville, Kentucky.   Also,  AAA has  an Approved Auto  Repair
Program which allows consumers to identify  repair facilities which
perform consistent, high quality, effective repairs. In addition,
several performance monitoring programs proposed by states in early
SIP submittals are discussed for reference purposes.  Currently,
however, many do not meet all the requirements for a performance
monitoring program  as specified by the I/M rule.

     This section  also discusses a number  of possible  additional
statistics and criteria not required by the I/M  rule.   From this
list  of  required  and potential   statistics   and  criteria,  a
description  of what  EPA  considers  to be  a model program is
presented.    EPA  strongly  encourages  states  to  consider  the

                               54

-------
components of this model program in order to develop an optimally
effective performance monitoring program.  It should be emphasized
that  the program  components beyond  what  is  required  are  not
intended to be EPA criteria for program evaluation.   EPA recognizes
that states will have to  develop  a program tailored to specific
situations and  resource limitations.  The  components of  a model
program are:

Model Repair Grading Program

     Items la through Id  below  are required by the rule, unless
programs provide motorists with alternative statistics meeting the
specific criteria discussed in the rule.  The rule also requires
that a grading report including these items must be  provided to the
public at the time of initial failure.

1)  The method of grading repairs would include:
     a)   the number  of  vehicles submitted by each  repair facility
          for retest,
     b)   the pass   rate  on  the  first  retest by each  repair
          facility,
     c)   the fraction  of retest vehicles requiring more than one
          retest (for each facility),
     d)   the fraction  of retest vehicles receiving a waiver (for
          each facility), and
     e)   a Repair Effectiveness Index, based on the methodology in
          Appendix 4, for each facility.

2)   The  repair  grades  would be computed  separately  for  each  of
three  age categories of vehicles  for  each  shop.   The  categories
include:
     a)    0 to 3 years old,
     b)    4 to 10 years old,  and
     c)    10 years or older.
3)  Except  for  the  number  of  vehicles  submitted for retest,  the
grading  would be  computed using  a three  month  time  weighted
average, using data from the previous 12 months and weighting the
most recent three month period more heavily.  Vehicle number would
be reported as the  number of vehicles submitted for retest in the
previous 12 months.  (The methodology for calculating time weighted
averages is discussed in Appendix 4.)

4)  The grading reports  would  be  available to the public and meet
the following criteria:

     a)   Reports  available on a zip code basis;
     b)   Reports   available  for  the  customers  by vehicle  age
          category;
     c)   Reports  recalculated and updated monthly; and


                               55

-------
56

-------
     d)    Grading reports provided along with emission test report
          to all  motorists whose vehicles failed the enhanced I/M
          test.

     In addition, during program start-up it is recommended that at
least 2  months of repair data be collected from the  date of initial
lane  operation  before repair  grading statistics  are  compiled.
Collection of data should be fully automated.  After a 3 month lane
start-up time,  grading reports shall be available to the public.
In the interim,  motorists should be provided with information on
whether facilities have staff which  have passed  the ASE Test A6
(electrical/electronic systems), Test A8 (engine performance), and
the Advanced Engine Performance Specialist  (LI)  test.

     Finally, an  incentive  program  for  repair  shops  is highly
recommended  in   which  repair   facilities  would   apply  for
participation in a "Certified Repair  Facility" program based on
such  criteria as  availability and use  of  up-to-date  equipment,
employment  of certified technicians, opportunity  for technical
education as technology changes, and continued  certification of
technicians.

Model Feedback Program

     The I/M rule does not provide  specific requirements for the
statistical and  qualitative  information  which must be provided to
repair  facilities, only  that  it must indicate their  success in
repairing vehicles,  and be provided on at least  an annual basis.
Thus, the  components of the model feedback program described below
are all recommendations and not requirements.

1)    Periodic feedback  information  provided to a  repair facility
should:

     a)    include the  same statistics as provided to the public,
          including model  year grading categories;
     b)    include  statistics   (same   as   "a")    on  individual
          technicians  when  requested  by  individual  shops or the
          technicians   (technician  statistics should  be  treated
          confidentially);
     c)    be provided  in graphical form covering the previous four
          months; and
     d)    be compiled  and plotted  on a monthly basis.

2)   Graphical representation of IM240 second by  second data  (for
HC, CO,  C02, NOX,  and  purge)  should be provided  to each motorist
whose  vehicle   has  failed  the  I/M  test,  and  the   graphical
information  should  be  available   to  the  repair  industry.   In
addition,  the model program would  have a  provision which would
allow individual  repair shops to  access IM240 second by second data
in electronic form.

-------
3)  Feedback reports should  be  sent  to  each shop on a quarterly
basis.  However, during the first four months of program start-up,
reports should be on a monthly  basis.   Also,  prior to start-up,
facilities should be provided with complete information on how the
program will operate.

Model Repair Form

     To comply with the I/M rule, item d below must be included,
the repair shop must be  identified  (either by an identification
number or  some other method) ,  and the repair form must indicate any
recommended repairs that were not performed.

     The model program would require a completed repair form prior
to a retest.  The repair form would:

     a)    include  the  information   contained   in  a  national
          standardized form  (when developed);
     b)    include a repair shop identification number;
     c)    include a technician identification number;
     d)    identify repairs performed;
     e)    include repair cost information: parts  and labor;
     f)    provide a comment section where technicians could provide
          additional information, including any recommended repairs
          not performed.

     In addition,  the  model program would have a provision which
would allow individual repair shops to return a completed repair
form  for  the  customer to the  I/M program  office  by  electronic
means.  This could eliminate the  need  for manual entry of data from
repair forms at  the testing  facility.  It  would also prevent loss
of  information  due  to misplaced repair  forms  and  fraudulent
alteration of information on repair forms.

4.2  Regulatory Requirements

     The minimum requirements for  I/M performance  monitoring in
§51.369(b) are:

1)   In enhanced  I/M  program areas,  the  oversight agency shall
     monitor the performance of  individual motor vehicle  repair
     facilities,  and provide to the public at the time of initial
     failure,  a   summary  of  the  performance of  local  repair
     facilities that have repaired vehicles for retest. Performance
     monitoring  shall  include:

     i)    statistics on the number of vehicles submitted for
          retest  after repair by the  repair facility,

     ii)  the percentage passing on the  first retest,

-------
     iii)  the   percentage   requiring    more    than   one
          repair/retest trip before passing,  and

     iv)   the percentage receiving a waiver.

     Programs may provide motorists  with  alternative statistics
     that convey similar information  on the  relative ability of
     repair  facilities in  providing  effective and  convenient
     repair,  in  light  of the  age  and other characteristics  of
     vehicles presented for repair at each facility.

2)    Programs shall provide  feedback,  including statistical  and
     qualitative information to individual repair facilities on a
     regular basis  (at  least annually) regarding their success in
     repairing failed vehicles.

3)    A prerequisite for a retest  shall be  a completed repair form
     that indicates which repairs were performed,  as  well as  any
     technician recommended repairs that were not performed,  and
     identification of the  facility that performed repairs.

It should  be noted that item  1  above provides to I/M  programs
flexibility  to  develop  alternative  statistics.   However,  for
alternatives to be  considered acceptable,  they must be considered
to be  reasonable  representations  of  the required  statistics.
Although EPA presents a number  of components of what it considers
a model performance monitoring  program in  this guidance document,
states are only compelled to meet the requirements in §51.369(b).

4.3  Existing and Proposed Performance Monitoring Programs

     Many states or metropolitan areas  already  have  performance
monitoring programs or  have  proposed  programs.    States with
enhanced I/M are considering a number of different approaches to
meet the performance monitoring requirement in the I/M rule.  The
following sections  describe  some of these differing approaches  and
aspects of both existing and proposed programs.

4.3.1  Existing Performance Monitoring Programs

     In this  section, existing performance monitoring programs from
several states or metropolitan  areas  are summarized,  as well as a
repair  effectiveness  monitoring program administered  by AAA.
Additional information on the programs in states or metropolitan
areas can be  obtained by calling  the EPA Regional I/M contact  for
that area  to get a  referral  to  the appropriate state  or local
staff.
                               59

-------
4.3.1.1  Arizona

     Monitoring in Arizona is  based on the total number of repair
jobs, the percent passing, and the percent  failing.   The repair
completion form is on the back of the  inspection  form.  The repair
facility identification number is the phone number.   Individual
technicians  are  not  tracked.     Repair  facility  performance
information is available at the inspection facility.

4.3.1.2  Florida

     The State of Florida also  has a performance monitoring program
in place.   For  the first year of its program,  Florida  produced
repair grading reports.    The  grading reports included statistics
on the total number of repair jobs,  the  percent passing,  and the
percent failing.  Statistics also include whether mechanics are ASE
certified and whether facilities have a four gas analyzer.  These
reports were available at each  inspection facility and were updated
monthly.   No  recommendations were made  by program  personnel,
because of state concerns regarding legal implications.

     After one year,  Florida discontinued issuing grading reports
for several reasons, including a low rate of return of repair forms
(which is optional for reinspection facilities not licensed by the
state),  a  suspicion that  the volume of  information on  repair
grading reports overwhelms consumers,  and difficulty in avoiding
multiple reports  for particular repair shops.  As an alternative to
grading reports,  Florida plans to provide  consumers with a listing
of  repair  shops  which  meet  certain  criteria  for repair  shop
excellence.   These  criteria  will  include, at  a  minimum,  the
employment of technicians which have passed an emissions-related
repair  education course  developed by  a  private  vendor  under
contract  to  the  state,  and  the  use  of  four  gas  analyzers  to
diagnose repair problems.

  In  the Florida  program,  the repair form  is on the  back of the
inspection  certificate.    The  identification number  for  repair
facilities is based on the phone number, in  part since it is easy
to remember.  Unfortunately, Florida has found it difficult to sort
statistics by phone number, since many repair shops have more than
one telephone number, and  technicians for  a particular  shop may
report  to  more  than one number.     This  frequently  results  in
multiple summaries of repair  experience  for the same  shop.   The
form also includes boxes which the mechanic  can check to indicate
what types of repairs were performed, and also includes a section
for noting cost of labor and parts.  However, since completion of
the repair form is not a prerequisite for retest, the return rate
is only 5 to 10 percent.
                               60

-------
4.3.1.3  Louisville, Kentucky

     Louisville,  Kentucky is a basic I/M area and has had a program
since 1984.  Approximately 400 facilities are monitored.

     Both technicians  and  repair facilities are tracked by  a 5
digit registration number.  Louisville uses an algorithm to convert
9 digit federal employee numbers  or business  tax numbers to the 5
digit numbers.   Every facility doing emission  repair work must
register and is assigned a  number.   The technician identification
number is related to the facility identification number.  In order
to get  registered,  technicians  must  attend 3  hour  orientation
classes which  are  taught by Jefferson County  employees  who  are
master certified technicians.  Upon completion of the class,  the
technicians  receive   their   registration   numbers,   completion
certificates, and billfold cards  identifying them  as registered
technicians.

     The back of the  inspection  certificate  is  the  form  for  the
completion  of repairs.    The  facility  and repair  technician
identification number  is required on this form, along with the cost
of repair,  a  yes  or  no  answer  on whether the car has  had a
Louisville Low Emission Tune-up,  and a yes or no  answer on whether
there were extenuating circumstances associated with the  repair.
The form also contains a space  for  the technician to describe the
nature of extenuating  circumstances.  These  comments are put on
file and reviewed when a motorist applies for a waiver.

     There is  no set  waiver  amount in the  Louisville  program.
Instead the car is evaluated  by one of the staff master certified
technicians.   As a  result of  these evaluations, Louisville  has
found that 35% of these potential waiver  cars in their basic I/M
program can be brought  into  compliance with a simple adjustment
requiring  no  parts.     Such  repairs  are   done by   the  master
technician.  If parts are required, the master certified technician
may call the original  repair  facility, tell  them what  needs to be
done, and arrange with the motorist and the facility  to get the car
repaired.  One of the  master technicians  on staff also acts as a
liaison with the repair industry.  The master technician will do
free audits at the request of the repair  facilities,  perform gas
analyzer checks,  and mediate between the facility and dissatisfied
customers.  If a repair was done that was not necessary,  a staff
master technician will call the facility and negotiate with them to
perform correct  repairs.

     Many factors are  considered  in granting a waiver.  Among them
are how much money was  spent,  whether the car showed improvement in
emissions, whether an  engine replacement  was done under previous
ownership, the condition of the vehicle, and personal circumstances
 (such as financial constraints) of the owner.  In 1993,  the program


                               61

-------
averaged only about 50 waivers per month.   If  a repair facility
shows a high waiver rate, program officials  may look closely at
performance monitoring data to isolate the problem.  Officials can
look at statistics  such  as  repairing different  makes  and model
years to help isolate the problem.

     A summary of performance monitoring statistics is  available at
each  inspection  facility upon  request.    Motorists  can  obtain
information on specific  repair  facilities or  repair facilities
within a zip code by calling the  inspection facility.  The report,
which is updated quarterly, includes  information on  whether the
technicians are registered by the process  described above, whether
the facility has  an analyzer,  the total number of cars repaired,
the number  of first time passes, the  number  of waivers,  and the
number of  vehicles not  in compliance after repair. Reports can be
generated for the year  to date, the  last twelve months, or longer.
Louisville has found that some facilities have ceased conducting
repairs on failed I/M vehicles as a result of public  performance
monitoring.

     Louisville also provides data on a  quarterly  basis  to each
repair  facility on  their performance.   It is  actually provided
along with a newsletter and is given in coded form on the mailing
label along with  sort  codes.  Repair facilities are provided with
information to interpret  this  coded information.  The newsletter
itself includes information on changes in the program and repair
tips.   Louisville  is  also producing a quarterly report  for the
first time this year which gives  all registered mechanics a repair
success rate.   It is published quarterly,  but is  not available to
the public.

4.3.1.4  New York

     New  York  recently   implemented  the  Sign  of   Automotive
Excellence Program  (SAEP).  The SAEP is a voluntary repair facility
recognition program  which consists of  a number  of  components,
including technician education in emissions repairs.   Facilities
which meet  SAEP  requirements  can advertise  with SAEP  displays.
Technician  certificates  must  also  be displayed publicly  in  a
customer waiting room.  The  Department  of Motor  Vehicles also
provides publicity  support through shop decals,  radio, press, etc.
Although the SAEP  does not  keep records  on  passing  and failing
vehicles  in I/M  tests,  there  is a  tracking component  to this
program.  Repair  facilities must  exhibit  a  pattern  of  quality
repairs as reflected by the Department of Motor Vehicles' repair
facility records and  files  to remain in  the  voluntary program.
Other SAEP requirements include  having at  least one technician in
the  repair  facility  who  has  completed  all four courses  in New
York's Auto Technician Training  Program  (ATTP). Additionally, 50%
of the technicians in the  facility must have completed  at least the
first course in the ATTP  sequence.   Facilities must also reapply


                               62

-------
for SAEP recognition annually,  and after a two year initial SAEP
                               63

-------
recognition period,  50% of employees must have completed all four
ATTP courses.

4.3.1.5  Wisconsin

     The Wisconsin pilot  program was developed  to  meet  Federal
requirements as well  as  to provide an integral  part  of  an auto
emission/repair technician education program.   The  program also
provides  an opportunity  for  vocational  technician  education.
Wisconsin's  agreement with  area  vocational  education  schools
provides an opportunity for on-site education in the I/M test lane.

     The  pilot testing   site,  which  is  located  in  Northwest
Milwaukee,  averages  about 10,000  vehicles  per month.   Vehicle
inspection reports (VIR)  were collected from January 1992 through
July  1993.    The  VIR is  presented  at  the  time  of retest  or
application  for a waiver.   Repair data information  for  failed
vehicles are recorded by the repair technician,  and are required
for reinspection or waiver.  Data are entered into a database at
the test lane for later analysis.

     Wisconsin found the basic design and process of the program to
be adequate.   However, the  production  of adequate  reports  was
difficult due to data collection and data entry flaws.  Problems
have  been  identified and  will  be  remedied  (mainly by  fully
automating data entry/retrieval) prior to  implementation  of  the
final program.

4.3.1.6  AAA

     AAA has an Approved Auto  Repair Program which allows consumers
to  identify repair  facilities which  perform  consistent,  high
quality, effective repairs.  AAA's  program is general rather than
strictly emission  repair-related. AAA currently has 4,200 approved
facilities in 30 states,  including dealerships,  service stations
and independent repair facilities.  AAA facilities must employ ASE
certified technicians, use up-to-date equipment,  and maintain a
minimum  level  of  85%  customer satisfaction.   The procedure  for
facility  certification   includes:   facility   application,   AAA
inspection of facility, equipment,  and technician qualifications,
and  facility service  evaluation.  AAA  also conducts  an  annual
inspection and coordinates education sessions for  shop personnel.
Members are guaranteed that the price of the repair will not exceed
the estimate by more than  10%  (unless consulted), a 90  day or 4000
mile warranty (whichever comes first) on repairs, and the return of
old parts if desired.  The facility  in turn can display  an Approved
Auto Repair  sign  and  a Certificate of Approval  in  the customer
waiting  area.   The facility can also use  the  AAR logo  in  its
advertising.  The facility is subject to an annual inspection by
AAA and  also coordinates education sessions for shop personnel.
                               64

-------
     Each repair facility approved for program participation enters
into  a  written agreement  with  AAA.   AAA maintains  a  feedback
reporting system on the AAA member customer evaluations of repair
services.  Objectives of this system  are  to provide:  1)  the AAA
member with a method to register complaints or comments regarding
service,  2)  AAA with  a  means  to  continually monitor  services
provided by approved facilities,  and  3) the repair  facility with an
effective management tool for improving operations and service.  In
entering into this  agreement,  the repair facility agrees to offer
the following benefits to customers:

     1)    Offer a  written  estimate  with  customer  authorization
          needed for an increase of  greater than  10 percent

     2)    Make available  any  replaced  parts except those returned
          to  manufacturer under  warranty

     3)    Guarantee repairs for  90  days or 4000 miles

     4)    Agree under contract to cooperate with AAA investigation
          and resolution  of disputes.

     AAA has  an enforcement mechanism in which customer complaints
must be satisfactorily resolved by the shop within 5 days or AAA
becomes involved.   Should AAA become involved,  one or more of the
following  techniques will  be employed in  the  resolution  of the
complaint:  conciliation,   mediation,  or  arbitration.    Service
complaints registered  via  the service evaluation  card  or other
communications represent only 1% of all work completed;  however,
the level of customer satisfaction has averaged 96%.

     While non-AAA members do not receive the  same benefits that
AAA members  are entitled to,  they  can make use  of the  facility
knowing it has met  the AAR standards.   Complaints by non-members
are  recorded and  the  facility  is  made  aware that there  is  a
problem, though arbitration by AAA is  not part  of the process for
non-members.   For  further  information,  contact the AAA National
Headquarters, 407-444-7000, or write  to the following address:

American Automobile Association
1000 AAA Drive
Heathrow, FL   32746-5063

4.3.2   Performance Monitoring  Programs  Proposed  in Early SIP
Submittals

      [Since this document is intended to provide guidance to states
on how  to  develop  a performance program,  but  is  not intended to
provide formal reviews of individual states' programs in the early
SIP submittals,  various aspects of monitoring programs proposed in


                               65

-------
early SIP  submittals  will  be discussed, in most  cases,  without
identifying individual states.]

4.3.2.1  Repair Grading

     As  discussed  previously,   the  rule  requires  performance
monitoring  to  include  statistics  on  the number  of  vehicles
submitted  for  retest  after  repair by  the repair  facility,  the
percentage passing on the first retest,  the percentage requiring
more than one repair/retest trip before passing,  and the percentage
receiving a waiver.  States have the option  of providing motorists
with alternative statistics conveying similar information on the
relative abilities of repair facilities to provide effective and
convenient repair, in light of the age and other characteristics of
vehicles presented for repair at  each facility.  This information
must be made available to the public.

     The proposals and draft RFPs  discussed  in this section are not
complete in many cases;  however,  it is important to note that the
examples  presented  may  not,  in  themselves,  meet  all  of  the
requirements  for  tracking  in the I/M rule.   They are discussed
strictly for reference purposes.

          In its  draft  RFP,  one  state  requires  a repair report
     card,  which provides customers with a listing of registered
     repair facilities ranked in order of repair cost-effectiveness
     of I/M transient emissions repair as reported  on after-repair
     tests.  Cost effectiveness is expressed in terms of average
     cost of repair relative to average level of emission reduction
     (i.e., dollars/gram) .    The report  card  will  not  contain
     specific  cost  data,  but merely   list  facility names  and
     addresses in rank order of more effective to  less effective.
     This report card is to be updated each month.

          Another state plans to  require statistics from the I/M
     contractor on  the  average  increase or decrease  in  vehicle
     emission levels after repairs, by model year and vehicle type,
     for vehicles receiving  an I/M test.   In  its proposal,  this
     state also includes the percentage of vehicles which failed
     the retest after  the motorist  refused  recommended repairs as
     a performance monitoring criterion.   However,  the  RFP  only
     states that repair performance data  would be made  available to
     customers in the  form of a randomly generated list of repair
     facilities in a designated area,  and does not specify  that the
     performance monitoring  statistics  it  is  requiring  would be
     made available to the public.

          Yet another state  plans  to provide  motorists  with the
     four statistics in the I/M rule, along with three additional
     categories -- the total number of vehicles for which motorists
     refused recommended repairs, the percentage of those vehicles


                               66

-------
     which then failed a subsequent retest, and the average age and
     make of vehicles.  These statistics will  only be provided for
     facilities  which are certified by  the state.   In providing
     information,  this  state also wants to segregate statistics by
     zip code  to  categorize the certified facilities on the list
     that will be  handed to  the motorist.  Motorists will also be
     provided  with the address and phone number of the facilities.
     The  state  also  wants  to  compare performance  monitoring
     statistics of repair facilities with state certified emission
     technicians to on-average statistics from non-certified shops
     and "fix-it-yourselfers".  Data to the public will be updated
     monthly and will only go back three months, so that facilities
     will be evaluated strictly on  recent repair performance.

4.3.2.2  Feedback to Repair Facilities

     The  rule also requires feedback,  including statistical and
qualitative information to  individual repair  facilities   on  a
regular  basis  (at  least  annually)  regarding  their  success  in
repairing failed vehicles.  Once again,  the  proposals and  draft
RFPs discussed in  this section are not  complete in many cases, and
do not necessarily meet requirements in the I/M rule.

          As part  of its Smog Check program, the California Bureau
     of Automotive Repair is proposing to  include more specific
     information  in its Smog Check  station reports,  in order to
     assist smog  technicians  in improving  performance.    Such
     information  may  include  ability  to perform diagnostics by
     vehicle  age  group  --  pre-1980  vehicles,   1980-84  minimum
     function  computer systems, 1985-88 mid-tech level cars, and
     1989 and newer high-tech  vehicles.   Information could also
     include age of vehicle, make, model, and engine certification
     group.  Technician score would be compared to the "pool" of
     technicians  who are repairing  these various generations of
     vehicles. Reports could also include an assessment of whether
     technicians  are interpreting fault codes correctly.

          Another  state is  considering  development  of a scoring
     equation  which includes parameters such  as pass rate,  repair
     methodology,    and   proximity   to  original  certification
     standards.  The state mentioned  in the previous section,  which
     plans to provide  cost-effectiveness  data  to  customers of
     registered  repair  facilities,   also plans  to send quarterly
     reports to each registered repair  facility that indicate the
     cost-effectiveness of repairs performed  by that facility and
     a  ranking of where  that  facility fits  in with  all  other
     facilities'  repair effectiveness.

4.3.2.3  Repair  Form

     The rule  also states that  a  prerequisite for retest shall be


                               67

-------
a  completed  repair  form  that  indicates  which  repairs  were
performed, as well as any technician recommended repairs that were
not performed, and identification of the facility that performed
the repairs.   The  proposals  and  draft  RFPs  discussed  in  this
section do not necessarily meet the requirements in the I/M rule,

          In its draft RFP,  one state required repair facilities to
     present repair  reports to owners or leaseholders of vehicles
     upon delivery of repaired vehicles.  Repair report forms would
     be provided by the state and would indicate that the repair
     facility has been licensed and endorsed by the state,  would
     contain the name, address,  and  license number of the repairer,
     and would have  spaces  to indicate the cost of parts and labor
     for emission-related  repairs  and the nature  of  the  repairs
     performed.   Although this  state's  RFP  had very  detailed
     requirements for repair reports, it did not specify that these
     reports should include technician  recommended  repairs  that
     were not performed.   Although  not  explicitly  stated in the
     RFP, this repair  form  would have to be required for a retest.

          Another state is developing a simple, one-sided repair
     form required for retest it considers "user-friendly."  This
     state is  concerned  that  technicians will not fill  out the
     repair form properly if it is overly complicated.  This state
     also wants to develop a system that accounts for fraudulent
     alterations to the form by the consumer after repairs.

          Yet another  state's  form will consist of  a  one-sided
     check list segregated  by different vehicle systems with check
     boxes for different repairs.   Repair  facilities would give a
     score of  1,  2,  or  3  in  the appropriate  boxes  for  repair,
     replace, or adjust,  respectively.  This  state is also looking
     at  a  software  package to  generate  this  form  for  certified
     repair facilities.  In addition, the  state is considering an
     undefined, as yet, method for bar coding repair information
     for ease of data entry.

          Still another  state is considering  a similar approach
     with  a  list of  emission  components segregated by  vehicle
     system,  followed by a list of boxes indicating whether repairs
     to  the   component were  recommended,  recommended  but  not
     performed, and whether the components were  adjusted, waivered,
     replaced, or  repaired.    Furthermore,  the form would  also
     identify facilities and technicians by name and identification
     number.    It would  also contain  a  signature  box  for the
     technician  to  sign certifying  that  the   repairs were  done
     solely  in order  to bring the  vehicle  into  compliance  with
     emission standards.

4.4  Discussion of Performance Monitoring Criteria
                               68

-------
     This section discusses the regulatory requirements followed by
a  number of  possible  additional  statistics  and criteria  not
required by the I/M rule.  From this list of required and potential
statistics and criteria,  a description of what EPA considers to be
a model program is presented.  EPA strongly encourages  states to
consider the components of this model program in developing their
performance monitoring program.   It should be emphasized that the
program components beyond what is required are not intended to be
EPA criteria for program evaluation.   EPA recognizes  that states
will have to develop a program tailored to  specific situations and
resource limitations.  Although performance monitoring is required
only in  enhanced  I/M  areas,  it  is encouraged in basic  areas as
well. Also, while states switching from basic to enhanced programs
are not required to have enhanced I/M until 1995,  they may wish to
consider developing a pilot performance monitoring program as part
of  their pre-1995  I/M  program  in  order to  refine  it  before
implementing enhanced I/M.

4.4.1  Repair Grading

4.4.1.1  Requirements

     §51.369(b) (1) of  the  I/M rule specifies four  statistics to be
included in performance monitoring.   These four statistics are:

1)   the number of vehicles submitted for a retest after repair by
     the repair facility;

2)   the percentage passing on first retest;

3)   the percentage requiring more  than  one  repair/retest  trip
     before passing;

4)   and the percentage receiving a waiver.

Note:  The denominator of the last three statistics is the number
of cars  submitted for  retest.  The  sum will not  be  100  percent,
since there is likely to be a  small number of vehicles which do not
eventually pass inspection or are waived,  but instead are either
sold outside the I/M area or are scrapped.   If retest repairs on a
vehicle are done at more than one facility, that vehicle will be
included in the statistics for each  facility.   Also,  the retest
following  repair  by  a  second facility is  considered the  first
retest for that facility.

     These  four statistics are required unless  programs provide
motorists  with   alternative  statistics   that   convey   similar
information  on the  relative ability of  repair facilities  in
providing effective and convenient repair, in light of the age and
other characteristics  of  vehicles  presented  for  repair  at  each
facility.  Any alternative statistics will need to be supported by


                               69

-------
a reasonable  rationale  of why they provide  similar information
before the  Administrator can  allow  their substitution  for  the
required statistics.  §51.369(b)(1) also specifically requires that
                               70

-------
these statistics (or acceptable  alternatives) must be provided to
the public at the time of initial failure.

4.4.1.2  Discussion  of Additional Methods and Criteria for Grading
Repairs

Methods for Grading Repairs

     The  following  identifies  and  discusses  other methods  for
grading  the  repairs performed  by  individual  repair shops.   In
general, all  of the items listed  are considered enhancements to the
required  grading   statistics,   and   not  alternatives   to  the
requirements.    The  following  items  discussed  are  not  all
recommended as part  of a model performance monitoring program.  The
specific EPA recommendations for grading repairs in a model program
are given in Section 4.4.1.3.

1)   Age  and/or mileage  of  vehicles  repaired  -- Shops  which
specialize in repairing older  vehicles  or higher mileage vehicles
(e.g.,  independent   shops  versus  dealerships)   may have  lower
successful repair rates since emissions problems in older or higher
mileage vehicles may be more difficult to repair.

     Average age or mileage of vehicles repaired  at  a  facility
could be provided.  Alternatively, performance statistics could be
broken down based on cohorts of  vehicles.  For instance,  separate
statistics could be  provided for vehicles zero to  three years old,
4 to 10 years old, and greater than 10 years  old.  Mileage cohorts
could be established in a similar manner.  Thus,  motorists would
have a better idea of how effective shops are at repairing vehicles
of different ages.   These statistics  could also be provided based
on emission control  technology,  but providing information on this
basis may not be useful to most motorists.

2)   Repair effectiveness  index (RED  -- An REI quantitatively
measures the  overall effectiveness of  an individual shop to conduct
proper repairs of vehicles failing IM240.  A methodology for an REI
is provided in Appendix 4.   This REI  contains two elements: (1)  a
measure of the  amount  of emission  reduction achieved,  and (2)  a
measure of how  far  below the  IM240  cutpoint the  emission levels
were after repair.   In addition,  both of  these measures contain a
heavy penalty for retest failures. By balancing the measures in an
overall score, appropriate repair behavior  can be reinforced.  In
particular, shops that consistently repair vehicles to well below
the IM240 cutpoint will receive a better score than those that just
marginally pass. Further, those that  consistently repair vehicles
to well  below the  IM240 cutpoints will be  penalized  less  for  a
small number of retest failures if large emission reductions are
achieved.  On the other hand,  the "emission  reduction" element of
the REI  would account for shops that  repair a  large  portion of
older vehicles that may have higher initial test scores  than new


                               71

-------
cars, and therefore cannot reduce emissions to well below the IM240
cutpoints.  In short, the REI is an effort to equalize the grading
across the range of vehicles in the I/M fleet,  and to provide an
incentive for proper repairs.

3)    Technician Certification --   A performance  summary  to  the
public could also include information on whether technicians  are
certified  by  the   National   Institute  for  Automotive  Service
Excellence (ASE)  or not,  and  whether  they have passed ASE Test A6
(electrical/electronic systems),  Test A8 (engine performance),  and
the  Advanced Engine  Performance  Specialist  test.    Additional
information on these ASE tests can be obtained by contacting  ASE
at:

     13505 Dulles Technology Drive
     Herndon, Virginia   22071-3415
     Phone:   (313)713-3800

4)   Cost  of repairs -- States  could evaluate cost effectiveness in
terms of average cost  of  repair  relative  to  average  level  of
emissions reduction (e.g.,  dollars per gram/mile reduction).  One
problem  with providing  such a  statistic  is  that   shops  which
specialize in  hard  to  repair emissions problems  possibly would
charge more relative to the level of emissions reduction than shops
who  perform  more simple  repairs.    They would  have  lower cost
effectiveness ratings which would not necessarily reflect the value
in terms  of cost  of the repairs they are  performing.  Since repair
forms will  include information  on types  of repairs  performed,
statistics could conceivably be  compiled  on  average  costs  of
various  types of  repairs.  This might give a  clearer picture of the
value of repairs,  since  it  would reflect  whether  the  shop  is
performing more difficult repairs, and provide the consumer with
relative  costs  charged by various shops  for specific  repairs.
However,  repair facilities might also be encouraged to use lower
quality  parts which might  also  be less  expensive.   Also,  a cost
effectiveness  statistic  would have to  somehow  exclude  warranty
repairs.   Finally, compiling such detailed statistics  could involve
a large  amount of data  processing and make performance reports to
the public difficult to easily interpret.

5)   The percentage of failed retests for which the motorist did not
make  all  recommended  repairs  --  Such a  statistic  would  be
relatively easy to develop, since the I/M rule requires that repair
forms include  information  on recommended repairs that  were  not
performed. Such a statistic could provide a more  accurate and fair
picture of repair facility performance, since ideally it would give
motorists an  indication  of how  many  vehicle  failures the repair
shop was actually  responsible  for and how many resulted from
motorists not having recommended repairs performed. However, there
is  a danger  that repair shops  could include a  laundry  list  of
repairs in order to  shift  responsibility for  vehicle retest failure

                               72

-------
to the customer, and to artificially improve the facility's rating.
To  discourage  such  a practice,  this statistic  could also  be
presented  along  with the  percentage  of  vehicles which  failed
subsequent retest.  It would reflect poorly on a repair facility if
it had a relatively high number of vehicles  pass retests after the
recommended repairs were  refused.  However, repair facilities are
often likely to recommend emission repairs  that go beyond what is
necessary to pass an I/M  test because  they may still be necessary
for proper  functioning of the emission system over  an extended
period of time.

6)  Special tools/capabilities -- Statistics could also be included
on whether repair facilities have  repair-grade IM240 equipment or
other specialized diagnostic equipment, such as four gas analyzers
or wave form diagnostic tools.  Such information may be available
if the state performs periodic inspections of the facilities and
could be provided to motorists as a yes or no  question in a report
facility performance  report.  It  should be noted,  however,  that
some  shops  which  choose  not  to purchase  more  sophisticated
diagnostic equipment  such  as  repair-grade  IM240  may  have  highly
skilled technicians who are as  successful at repairing  cars as some
shops with the more sophisticated equipment.

7)   Emission Failure Category --  The  type  of failure -- VOC, CO,
NOX, purge, pressure -- could be provided.   This information could
be very  useful  to  a vehicle owner, particularly one  with a NOX
failure  vehicle,  since  technicians  could have  an easier  time
correcting VOC or CO failures  than NOX  failures.   However,  it may
be difficult to present these statistics in  a  concise manner which
could be quickly interpreted by the vehicle owner.

8)   Mass reductions  and  fuel  savings --  The mass of  emissions
reduced would be reported for each  facility.  The mass of emissions
reduced is calculated as  follows:

Mass  reduced =  (IM240 Mass Initial  Test)  - (IM240 Mass  After
Repair)

This calculation would be  done for  each vehicle  for  HC,  CO,  and
NOX.    The  total  mass reduced  would  then  be  the  sum of  the
reductions  for  all  of  the vehicles  sent  for  a retest  (i.e.,
repaired  by  the shop) over a particular  reporting  period.   A
similar computation would be done  for  fuel  economy savings,  since
the IM240 test results also include miles/gallon for each vehicle.
This information provides both the  motorist and the repair industry
with actual benefits achieved by the program, and serves  to promote
the program.

9)   Vehicles repaired at one repair facility, which failed on the
retest and were repaired  again at a different repair  facility --
Such statistics could be  compiled  by computer and would indicate,

                               73

-------
at least partially,  the degree of consumer satisfaction with the
level  of  repair  at shops.    However,  other  factors  could  be
involved;  for instance, second repairs  could  be  done  at  another
station because of  convenience or  could be  done  at a  dealership
rather than an independent  facility because necessary repairs are
covered under warranty.

10)   Type  of repair facility  -- A  code  could  indicate  whether a
repair facility is a dealership or independent service facility.
However, such information may be obvious just by the name of the
facility.   Also, many people will probably  already be aware of the
dealerships and independent service facilities in their immediate
area.

11)   Types  of vehicles facilities specialize  in repairing -- Along
with repair statistics,  grading reports  could include information
on whether  facilities  specialize  in,  or do not  repair,  certain
types  of vehicles.   Such  information  could be provided  at the
discretion of repair facilities for the  convenience of motorists.

12)   List of repair facilities which do not meet a minimum level of
performance -- This would involve establishing criteria  for what is
considered a minimum level of performance.

13)   Comparison of  repair  statistics   of  shops  with  certified
emission repair technicians to on-average  statistics  from shops
without certified technicians and from  "fix-it-yourselfers"

14)   Positive incentive to  repair  shops to  demonstrate superior
performance -- To provide incentives to  repair facilities, states
could initiate a program where automotive repair facilities would
apply for  participation in a "Certified Repair Facility"  program
based  on  such criteria  as availability  and  use  of  up-to-date
equipment,  employment of certified technicians,  opportunity for
technical education  as technology changes, continued certification
of technicians, etc.  Equipment  requirements  should be flexible
enough, however,  to  allow  shops with  limited  resources  the
opportunity to participate.  Shops receiving approval for inclusion
in the certification program would  be identified  though award of
a certificate and window decal. As an additional incentive, states
could also  consider  refusing to approve  repair waivers from shops
which are not certified.  Certified  shops could also  be included in
a brochure  which  would explain the benefits  to  the consumer of
using a certified  repair facility.  Shops would also be encouraged
through  this  program   to   publicize  staff  qualifications  and
education.     A mechanism  would   have  to  be  established  for
reconsidering a shop's certification if,  for instance, performance
monitoring feedback indicated a shop could not conduct effective
vehicle repairs and/or  the  state received a significant number of
customer   complaints.    By   establishing   a   mechanism   for
decertification,  states would  be able  to  ensure  that  facilities


                               74

-------
have  a  demonstrated ability  to  consistently perform  effective
emission related repairs while maintaining consumer confidence.
                               75

-------
     There would be three target audiences  in  the  incentive and
public relations efforts of this program.

1) Auto repair facility - owners wanting to increase the volume of
   their business as well as improve the quality of service.

2)  Technicians wanting to improve  their  status in the industry -
    to be considered a high-tech repair person.

3)  Consumers - seeking a reputable shop to perform effective
    repairs.

     Methods  to promote public awareness  and  incentives  for the
industry could be the  use of brochures as mentioned above as well
as newsletters.    Ideally,  shop  owners would  be  motivated  to
participate in the program.   Shop  owners would be  encouraged to
publicize  that  their  technicians  are  educated in the  areas  of
electronics,  emission control technology, computer systems, fuel
management, engine diagnostics,  etc.

Discussion  of  Criteria  for  Availability  of  Repair  Grading
Information

1)  Ease of availability -- Repair  performance statistics must be
easily and publicly available to all motorists.   Ideally,  these
statistics would  be  provided to motorists  at the point  of and
immediately upon  completion  of  the inspection when  they obtain
other test-related paperwork.

2)  Automation of data handling --  Automated handling of data by
the I/M testing contractor is considered by EPA to be an element
necessary to  manage the program.  In developing a program, states
should pay close attention to  programming and data management,  or
they will not be  able  to  provide statistics in a timely manner.
States may require automated handling  of  data  in  the  testing
contract scope of work.

3) Program start-up -- During program start-up, approximately two
months of repair data  should be collected from the date of initial
lane  operation  before  repair  grading  statistics  are  compiled.
After I/M testing starts, a lead time of about 3 months before a
state/contractor starts making performance information available to
the public should be adequate, especially if handling of the data
is completely automated.  Also, states could provide  information on
the certification level  of technicians employed by the facility in
the  interim.   For  instance,  motorists  could  be  provided with
information on  whether facilities  have  staff  which  have passed
various ASE tests.

4)   Updating  Frequency --   Frequent  updating of  performance

                               76

-------
monitoring data provided to  the public is very important.  Repair
facilities should be weighted more heavily for recent performance.
This  can be  done  by  using  time  weighted  averages of  repair
statistics.  For instance, data for the last year  could be analyzed
with the previous three months'  data weighted more  heavily.   Of
course,  time  weighted  averaging would  not be meaningful  for  a
statistic such as the number  of vehicles submitted for retest after
repair by  the repair facility.   A  discussion  of  time  weighted
averaging  can be found  in  Appendix 4.    Alternatively,  repair
facilities  could  be evaluated  only on  the  last  three  month's
performance.

5)    Segregation of  statistics  by zip  code  --  This would help
account for the impact  of demographics  on performance monitoring
statistics.   For instance,  shops in  less affluent  areas  could
possibly get  older,  harder to  fix  cars and  may have  a  higher
failure rate as a result.  Separate lists by zip code  would also be
more  convenient  to  the  public  as  a means of  targeting  repair
facilities within a vehicle owner's  specific area.

4.4.1.3  Model Repair Grading Program

     In this section, a description of a model program is provided,
based on the discussion above.  States must provide enough repair
performance information to the public for them to make an informed
judgement  on  whether  to take a  vehicle to a specific  shop  for
repairs.   However, the  information  provided must be concise  and
easily interpreted.   Furthermore,  the amount of data  compiled and
analyzed must be limited to  a manageable level.   EPA has developed
its model program with these considerations in mind.

     Items la through Id  are required by the rule, unless programs
provide motorists with alternative statistics meeting the specific
criteria discussed in  the rule.   The rule also  requires  that  a
grading report including these items  must be provided to the public
at the time of initial failure.

1)   The method of grading repairs would include:
     a)   the number  of vehicles submitted by each repair facility
          for retest,
     b)   the  pass  rate  on  the first  retest   by   each  repair
          facility,
     c)   the fraction  of retest  vehicles requiring more than one
          retest (for each facility),
     d)   the fraction  of retest  vehicles receiving  a waiver (for
          each facility),  and
     e)   the Repair Effectiveness Index for  each facility.

2)    The  repair grades  would be computed separately for  each  of
three  age  categories of vehicles  for each  shop.   The categories
include:


                               77

-------

-------
     a)    0 to 3 years old,
     b)    4 to 10 years old,  and
     c)    10 years or older.

3)   Except  for  the number of  vehicles  submitted for retest,  the
grading would be computed using a three month time weighted average
using data from the previous 12 months.  Vehicle number would be
reported as  the  number of  vehicles submitted for  retest  in  the
previous 12 months.

4)   The grading reports would  be available  to the public and meet
the following criteria:

     a)    Reports available  on a zip code basis;
     b)    Reports  available  for  the   customers  by vehicle  age
          category;
     c)    Reports recalculated and updated monthly; and
     d)    Grading reports provided along with emission test report
          to all motorists whose vehicles failed the enhanced I/M
          test.

     In addition,  during program start-up it is recommended that at
least 2  months of repair data be collected from the date of initial
lane  operation before repair  grading  statistics  are  compiled.
Collection of data should be fully  automated.  After a 3 month lane
start-up time, grading reports shall be available to the public.
A sample repair grading form  is provided  in Appendix  5.   In the
interim, motorists should be provided with  information on whether
facilities have staff which  have passed the ASE  Test A6, Test A8,
and the Advanced Engine Performance Specialist (LI)  test which ASE
has recently developed.

     Finally,  an  incentive  program for repair  shops  is  highly
recommended   in  which  repair   facilities  would   apply   for
participation  in  a "Certified  Repair  Facility"  program based on
such  criteria  as  availability and use  of  up-to-date  equipment,
employment  of certified technicians,   opportunity  for  technical
education as  technology  changes,  and  continued  certification of
technicians.   Such  a  program could be  set up  as  discussed in
Section 4.4.1.2.

4.4.2  Feedback to Repair Facilities

4.4.2.1  Requirements

     The I/M rule requires that  feedback  to repair  facilities
includes providing statistical and  qualitative information to
individual repair facilities on a regular basis (at least annually)
regarding their success in repairing failed vehicles.  No specific
details on what information  is to  be provided is specified in the


                               79

-------
rule.

4.4.2.2  Discussion of Additional Feedback Measures

     §51.369 (b) (2)  required that the I/M program provide the repair
industry with  statistical performance measures.  It  can be assumed
that the minimum statistical measure for grading repairs would be
those provided to  the public.   However,  I/M program offices may
wish to consider additional feedback measures which could enhance
the quality of  repairs  in the program  area.    Some  of  these
additional measures are discussed below.

1)   I/M test reports -- The oversight agency could make I/M test
reports for individual vehicles,  including IM240 second by second
data in graphical form  (for HC,  CO,  C02, NOX,  and purge),  available
to the  repair facility.   Test  reports  could be compiled  in an
electronic database so that the  repair facility could access them
modem to modem.   This  information could also be made available to
each motorist.

2)   Frequent feedback to repair facilities on performance --  Data
reports could  be provided quarterly.  However, during start-up, the
program could provide feedback reports every month to individual
shops.  Feedback  of statistics could also be presented in graphical
form.   Also, prior  to  start-up,  facilities could be provided with
complete information on how the program will operate.

3)   Periodic inspection of repair facilities and follow-up -- The
oversight agency could inspect shops to  determine  if  certified
technicians work there, whether  shops have necessary equipment to
do effective repairs,  whether they  have access to repair manuals,
repair and parts databases,  etc.

4)   Tracking of repair technicians as well  as repair facilities --
The repair form  is  required to have  information on both the repair
facility and the technician.  Individual repair technicians could
be identified  by a  number assigned  through a registration process
or even a social security number.  Such a grading of technicians
could be a very  important quality assurance tool for shop owners.
It  would   also   deter  technicians   from  giving  out   their
identification numbers or signing off on repair jobs  done by others
without adequate review.

5)   Information  on the probability of types of failures based on
IM240 data --   Probabilistic analysis  of data from a large sample
of vehicles could  indicate correlations between vehicle type and
various types  of  failures, both within and across models and model
years.   Based  on   analysis  of  this  data,   information  on  the
probability of certain types of failures  associated with engine
family, and possibly with trace  patterns could be provided.  Such
information could potentially provide a valuable diagnostic tool to

                               80

-------
repair  facilities.   This  information,  presented in an  easy to
understand format,  could also be provided to motorists in order to
meet the requirement under §51.368(a) that motorists  that fail the
I/M  test  shall   also   be  provided  with  software-generated,
interpretive  diagnostic  information  based on  the  particular
portions of the test that were failed.

6)  Failure by emission control technology -- Although information
on  failure by  emission  control  technology is  not  likely  to be
useful  to most  motorists,  such information could be  helpful to
repair facilities.   Vehicles  could be grouped by similar emission
control technology like that  proposed by the California Bureau of
Automotive Repair -- pre-1980 vehicles, 1980-84 minimum function
computer systems,  1985-88 mid-tech level cars,  and 1989 and newer
high-tech vehicles.

4.4.2.3  Model Feedback Program

     The I/M rule does not provide specific requirements for the
statistical and qualitative information which must be provided to
repair  facilities,  only that it must  indicate  their  success in
repairing vehicles, and be provided on at least an annual basis.
Thus, the components of  a model program for feedback  to the repair
industry are  all recommendations and not requirements.  This model
program, based on the previous discussion, is provided below.

1)  Periodic  feedback  information  provided to the repair facility
should:

     a)   include the  same statistics as provided to the public,
          including model year grading categories;
     b)   include  statistics   (same  as   "a")   on  individual
          technicians  when requested  by individual  shops  or the
          technicians   (technician  statistics   should be  treated
          confidentially);
     c)   be  provided  in graphical form (e.g. bar or line graphs)
          covering the previous four months; and
     d)   be  compiled and plotted on a monthly basis.

2)  Graphical representation of IM240 second by second data  (for
HC, CO, C02,  NOX,  and  purge)  should  be provided to each motorist
whose  vehicle  has  failed  the   I/M  test,  and  the  graphical
information  should be  available  to  the  repair  industry.   In
addition, the model program would have  a provision which would
allow individual repair  shops to access IM240 second by second data
in electronic form.

3)  Feedback reports  should  be  sent  to each shop on a quarterly
basis.  However, during  the first four months of program start-up,
reports should be  on  a  monthly  basis.   Also,  prior  to start-up,
facilities should be provided with complete information on how the


                               81

-------
program will operate.
                               82

-------
4.4.3  Repair Form

4.4.3.1  Requirements

The I/M rule gives four criteria for a completed repair form:

1)   is a prerequisite for a retest;

2)   must indicate which repairs were performed;

3)   must indicate any technician recommended repairs that were not
performed;

4)   and must identify the facility that performed the repairs.

4.4.3.2  Discussion of Repair Form Issues

1)   A standardized national repair form -- Although such a form has
not yet been  developed,  it would  help  standardize  data  capture
among  IM240  programs.   It  should be noted that  a  standardized
repair form  would  make it  easier  to perform  analysis of  trace
patterns associated with various types of failures.  It would also
help ensure  that IM240 data  among states  are  more  comparable,
enabling regulatory agencies to more easily analyze test data from
various programs.  Several industry groups are currently working on
developing such a form. Of course, use of such a standardized form
by the states would not be required.

     Two draft  approaches  to  a standardized repair  form  can be
found in Appendix 6.  Both have strong points.   Draft approach 1
focuses on the  root cause of failure  (which is  one  of the many
tasks in the new ASE Advanced Engine Performance Specialist test),
requires the technician to consider mechanical causes as  well as
electrical causes (also a  task in the new ASE test), and minimizes
the number of entries required by the technician.  Additionally,
the section on secondary causes provides data that are expected to
allow analysis programs (with large numbers of vehicles)  to sort
out  the  true  "root"  cause,  or  at  the  very  least  identify
combinations of causes/failures for particular groups of vehicles.

     Draft approach 2  in  Appendix  6  has more  information on the
facility  and   technician.     It  also   has   a   more  specific
identification  of   the component(s)  that  were repaired.    An
interesting feature of approach 2 is that the software program that
generates the  form in  the repair  shop  also imprints  a bar code
representation of the filled in repair form.  In this manner, when
the motorist returns for  a retest,  the  I/M inspector merely needs
to scan the bar  code to  enter  the information  into  the I/M data
base.

-------
     As more effort is  expended on standardization of these draft
approaches, it is  expected that the strong points of each approach
will be integrated into the final form.

2)    Facility  number  or code  for each  repair  facility  --  The
facility would be required to display this number or code on the
repair receipts.   The facility could use its  state business or tax
number.  The  state  could also require  facilities  to  fill out an
application which would be used to assign  a number or obtain a list
of service centers from Dunn and Bradstreet and use this number.

3)    Electronic return of repair  forms by  repair facilities to
testing facility -- This could eliminate the  need for manual entry
of data from repair forms at  the  testing  facility.  It would also
prevent loss  of  information due  to  misplaced repair  forms  and
fraudulent alteration of information on repair forms.

4)   Technician Identification --  The  technician  who  repairs the
vehicle would  be  required  to enter a  technician  identification
number which has been  assigned to him  on the  repair  form.  This
would enable  tracking  of individual  technician  performance,  and
technician performance statistics could be provided to either the
technicians  or the  facilities  employing  those  technicians  on
request.   Of  course,  such  information would have to  be treated
confidentially.

5)    Emissions using repair grade IM240 equipment before and after
repairs -- These  data would be  useful  in developing  a large
database to accurately  assess the correlation  between emissions
measurements using repair-grade IM240 equipment and actual IM240
measurements.

6)   Repair  form printed on the back of  the initial test results --
This could be  done  if  the repair  form  is one page  long or less.
This would save paper  and help ensure standardization of the form
so that all repair facilities in a state would be using the same
form,  and  help  ensure a  form  that   is more  easily used  and
understood.

4.4.3.3  Model Repair Form

     The model program  would require a completed repair form prior
to a retest.  To  comply with the I/M rule,  item d below must be
included,   the repair  shop  must be  identified  (either by  an
identification number or some other method), and the repair form
must indicate any recommended repairs that were not performed.  The
repair form would:

     a)    include  the  information  contained   in   a  national
          standardized form (when developed);


                               84

-------
     b)    include a repair shop identification number;
     c)    include a technician identification number;
     d)    identify repairs performed;
     e)    include repair cost information:  parts and labor;
     f)    provide a comment section where technicians could provide
          additional information, including any recommended repairs
          not performed.

     In addition, the model program would have a provision which
would allow individual repair shops to return a completed repair
form  for  the  customer to  the  I/M program office  by  electronic
means.

4.4.4  Customer Feedback and Satisfaction

     When enhanced I/M programs are implemented, state oversight
agencies will have to  develop  public  confidence in the program.
This  could  be  facilitated  by  providing  customers  with  an
opportunity to evaluate  facilities.   In turn,  positive customer
responses could be integrated into an incentive program such as the
one discussed above.

     In order  to provide  a forum  for  appropriate feedback  to
consumers as potential customers, the repair facility could provide
a shop report card or facility service evaluation similar to the
AAA mechanism discussed  in  Section  4.3.1.6.   Customers could be
selected  to  evaluate  the  repair facility  based  on  a  random
selection of repair orders.  The  evaluation/survey would be sent to
this population  of customers as a return postage  paid card.   A
significant percentage of negative responses would result in states
considering decertification of a repair facility.  Questions on the
survey would focus on  quality  of repair,  but could also address
such items as reasonableness of charges for repairs, promptness,
courtesy,  and overall customer recommendation.

     Customer satisfaction could be handled in a second phase of
this program after more  experience  is  gained.   In order to gain
public confidence in the enhanced I/M program,  the consumer should
have recourse against improper repairs, overcharges for repairs, or
blatant mistreatment.   There should be a mechanism to assure that
the  repair  facility  accepts  responsibility  for the  repair and
guarantees the work performed.   Such a mechanism for the handling
of customer complaints and dispute resolution could be considered
in the second or  final phase of the program at either the state or
regional level.

     Customer  feedback  will provide an additional  incentive  to
assure that  repairs  are properly performed  in a cost-effective
manner.  Feedback will assist in improving customer satisfaction
and will ultimately build integrity into the program.
                               85

-------
5.0   EDUCATION AND  CERTIFICATION

5.1  Regulatory Requirements

     Section  51.369 (c)   of  the  Inspection/Maintenance  Program
Requirements issued November 5,  1992 states:

          The state shall assess the availability of adequate
     repair technician training in the I/M area and,  if the
     types of training  described in paragraph  (c) (1) through
     (4)  of this section are not currently available,  shall
     insure that training is made available to  all interested
     individuals in the community either through private or
     public facilities.  This may involve working with local
     community colleges or vocational schools to add curricula
     to existing programs or start new programs or it might
     involve attracting private training providers to offer
     classes  in the area.   The  training  available  shall
     include:

     (1)  Diagnosis  and repair  of malfunctions  in computer
     controlled, close-loop vehicles;

     (2)   The  application  of  emission  control theory  and
     diagnostic data to the  diagnosis  and repair of failures
     on the  transient  emissions  test and  the evaporative
     system functional checks;

     (3)  Utilization of diagnostic information on systematic
     or repeated failures observed  in  the transient emission
     test and the evaporative system functional checks;

     (4)  General training on the various subsystems  related to
     engine emission control.

     Mandatory technician certification is  not  a requirement  of the
I/M rule but adequate training must be made available in both basic
and enhanced I/M areas.  The rule does  require  that  the state take
action to get adequate training programs started at  local community
colleges  or  vocational  schools,  or  action to attract  private
training providers to offer the  kinds of training needed.  The rule
does  not  require the  state  to  conduct  training  or  require
technician or facility certification.  Clearly, the rule allows the
states significant flexibility in insuring these minimum levels of
service are available.

     Section  51.369(d)   of  the  Inspection/Maintenance  Program
Requirements issued November 5,  1992  states the SIP  requirements as
being:
                               86

-------
          The SIP shall include a description of the technical
     assistance program to be  implemented, a  description of
     the procedures  and  criteria to be used  in meeting  the
     performance monitoring requirements of this section,  and
     a description of the repair technician training resources
     available in the community.

     Since  the  I/M  rule  was  published,  it  was  suggested  that
'education'  would  be  a  more  appropriate  term  to  use  than
'training'.  As a result,  'education' is used in this document in
place of  'training' whenever possible.

5.2  Strategies for Meeting the Regulatory Requirements

     As mentioned in the previous section, states have considerable
flexibility in meeting  the  education requirement.   This section
suggests some strategies that can be followed to accomplish this.

    Initially,  survey  techniques  could  be  used  to  identify
availability and  accessibility of the subject matter.   Either  a
state agency or a contractor could conduct  such surveys.

     If adequate courses  are not available or not accessible, then
the state or I/M program office needs  to identify a method or plan
to address  the  deficiencies.   Once again,  there  is  considerable
flexibility.  The  state can provide a list of the required subjects
to public institutions,  and work with them  to develop and deliver
acceptable courses.   The state or program office (either  directly
or under  contract)  can  review  offerings by  commercial education
companies, and arrange for such companies to  offer courses in the
program  area.   The  only  issue  remaining would then  be whether
courses from one  or more  companies  would be  widely available for
the duration of the I/M program.  Finally,  the state could choose
to contract  (or  develop on its own)  the requisite  courses,  and
could choose  to  contract the  delivery  of  the courses to assure
availability.

     Compliance with §51.369(d)  (discussed  in Section 5.1) should
be rather  straightforward,  in  that the SIP  needs  to contain  a
description of the education programs  available or being developed
and the method(s) that the state  will use to  assure  that courses
with the required  subject matter actually become widely accessible.

5.3  Subject Criteria for an Effective Education Program

     The following section presents  general  and specific subject
matter criteria  that  an education program must cover in  order to be
effective.   EPA  strongly urges  states  to  use these  criteria  to
evaluate education programs.   A  state  is  free to propose  other

                                87

-------
subject matter.   For  example,  some states have  in  place,  or are
developing, their  own technician  certification  testing programs
which include similar advanced level tasks.  The state may choose
to  use  NATEF   Certification,   offered  by  ASE,   or  its  own
certification testing program to determine if  adequate education is
available   to   meet  that   state's  particular   education  and
certification needs, as long as the requirements in §51.369(c)(1)
through (4) are met.

5.3.1  General Subject Criteria

     The subjects listed in the "content areas" of the ASE Advanced
Engine  Performance   Specialist   (LI)   test   specifications  (or
equivalent) are  related to  the  four  areas  specified  in Section
51.369 (c)   and  must  be generally  covered in order  to have an
effective program.  For reference,  these are:

     A.  General Powertrain Diagnosis
     B.  Computerized Engine Controls
     C.  Ignition System Diagnosis
     D.  Fuel System and Air Induction Systems Diagnosis
     E.  Emission Control Systems Diagnosis
     F.  I/M Failure Diagnosis

More  information on  the  ASE  technician  certification program,
including  the  newly  developed  LI   test,  is  provided  in Section
5.4.1.

5.3.2  Specific Subject Criteria

     To ensure an effective  program,  all of  the specific "Tasks"
listed  under  content   areas   "E"  and   "F"   in   the  LI   test
specifications above  (or  equivalent)  must be  generally covered.
Moreover,   emphasis  should  be  given  to  the  following selected
"Tasks" from these content areas (listed verbatim from the ASE LI
Task list).  Note also  that  some of these tasks are necessary in
enhanced I/M areas, but not  in basic areas.    However, basic I/M
areas are encouraged to consider including these tasks as well.

     1.   Locate and  utilize  relevant service information.-
           (content area "E",  Task 2)

     2.   Differentiate between  emission control mechanical
          and electrical / electronic problems.-(content area
          "E",  Task 5)

     3.   Determine   root   cause   of   multiple  component
          failures.-(content area "E", Task 11)

-------
4.    Utilize test  instruments to observe, recognize,  and
     interpret  electrical  /  electronic   signals.
     (content area "F",  Task 1)
     (Note:   The  Agency   interprets  this  task  to  include
     exposure to test instruments such as scan tools,  emission
     analyzers,  digital multimeters,  lab  oscilloscopes,  and
     other similar diagnostic equipment)

5.    Evaluate HC,  CO,  NOx,  C02,  and 02 gas  readings;
     determine  the  failure  relationships.  -  (content
     area "F", Task 2)   (Note:  EPA interprets  this task
     to   include    the   theoretical   and   practical
     application of combustion chemistry.)

6.    Diagnose  the  cause   of  HC  emission  failures
     (content area "F",  Task 4)  - "Basic"  I/M  areas

7.    Diagnose  the  cause   of  CO  emission  failures
     (content area "F",  Task 5)  - "Basic"  I/M  areas

8.    Diagnose cause of  IM240 HC failures - (content area
     "F", Task 7)  - "Enhanced" I/M areas

9.    Diagnose cause  of  IM240 CO  failures  -   (content
     area "F", Task 8)  -  "Enhanced"  I/M areas

10.   Diagnose cause  of  IM240 NOx failures -  (content
     area "F", Task 9)  -  "Enhanced"  I/M areas

11.   Evaluate emission  readings obtained during an IM240
     test to  assist  in emission  failure diagnosis  and
     repair. - (content area  "F",  Task 10)   - "Enhanced"
     I/M areas
     (Note:    EPA   interprets    this   task    to   include
     familiarization with  the second-by-second IM240 emission
     traces.)

12.   Verify effectiveness of repairs in preparation for
     IM240 retest. - (content area  "F", Task  11)

13.   Diagnose  causes of  evaporative  emission  system
     pressure test failures. -  (content area  "F",  Task
     12)  - "Enhanced" I/M areas

14.   Diagnose  causes of  evaporative  emission  system
     purge flow test  failures. -  (content area "F", Task
     13)  - "Enhanced" I/M areas

-------
5.4  Existing and Proposed Certification Programs

     The  certification  of   technicians  and  the  licensing  or
certification of repair facilities is not mandated by the I/M rule.
The  states  will  be  able  to  use their  own  discretion  when
considering these issues  though many  states have  licensing and
certification policies already in effect that  could be built upon.
Discussed below are various certification programs  known to EPA.

     The  following   information on  certification  programs  is
provided for reference only.   EPA does not endorse any particular
program.   If  EPA  becomes aware  of any  additional  sources  of
certification information, they  will be added  to future updates of
the guidance document.   It is expected  that  the  state and local
agencies will determine which, if any, of these programs can assist
them  in  meeting  the  education  needs  in   their   state.    The
information below was provided  by  the  organizations,  states,  or
companies that operate or are developing certification programs,
and EPA makes no claims on the accuracy of the information.

5.4.1  Technician Certification

5.4.1.1  ASE Technician Certification  Program

     The technician certification system of the National Institute
for Automotive Service Excellence  (ASE)  consists  (at the present
time)  of eight separate exams with each focusing  on one specific
area of vehicle repair.   Upon passing at least one exam and after
providing  proof  of   two years of  appropriate  hands-on  work
experience, the technician becomes  ASE certified to do repairs in
that particular area.  When all eight exams have been successfully
completed,  the  technician is then certified as  an  'ASE  Master
Technician.'  Recertification tests are given  every  five years and
cover  the  same content  areas as  those  in  the  original  exams.
However,  the  number  of  questions  in  each  content area  of the
recertification  test  will   be  reduced  by  about   one-half.
Representatives of the auto service industry review  and revise the
repair tasks and test questions to ensure they remain current.  The
eight test areas are:

          Engine Repair [Test Al]
          Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
          Manual Drive Train  and Axles
          Suspension  and Steering
          Brakes
          Electrical/Electronic Systems [Test A6]
          Heating and Air Conditioning
          Engine Performance   [Test A8]
           (includes  emission  control systems)

     In  addition,  a  new  test,  the Advanced Engine Performance


                               90

-------
Specialist (LI)  Test has been added.  It is an advanced level exam,
requiring  successful  certification  in  ASE  Test  A8,  Engine
Performance.  This test  is  designed  to  measure the technicians'
knowledge of  the  diagnostic skills necessary  for sophisticated
emissions and engine  performance problems.  The  test  was first
administered in May,  1994.   More  information on the content areas
for Tests A6, A8,  and the  LI Test is provided in the  following
section.  For more detailed information about the test program and
the content areas of other test areas, please contact:

          National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence
          13505 Dulles Technology Drive
          Herndon,  VA  22071-3415
          703-713-3800

5.4.1.2  Test Content Areas for ASE Tests A6, A8, and the Advanced
Engine Performance Specialist (LI) Test

     States may set technician  certification standards by using
preexisting certification testing.  Several states have adopted the
ASE Electrical/Electronic Systems  (Test  A6), Engine Performance
(Test A8) ,  and  the  new LI  Test as their basis for establishing
technician certification. Included below is a list of the content
areas of these three tests.
Electrical/Electronic Systems  (Test A6)

Content Areas

A.  General Electrical/Electronic System Diagnosis

B.  Battery Diagnosis and Service

C.  Starting System Diagnosis and Repair

D.  Charging System Diagnosis and Repair

E.  Lighting Systems Diagnosis and Repair

F.  Gauges, Warning Devices, and Drivers
     Information Systems Diagnosis and Repair

G.  Horn and Wiper/Washer Diagnosis and Repair

H.  Accessories Diagnosis and Repair

Engine Performance  (Test A8)
This test is presently undergoing revision.

Content Areas

                               91

-------
A.  General Engine Diagnosis

B.  Computerized Engine Controls Diagnosis and Repair

C.  Ignition System Diagnosis and Repair

D.  Fuel, Air Induction, and Exhaust Systems Diagnosis and Repair

E.  Emissions Control Systems Diagnosis and Repair

F.  Engine Related Service

G.  Engine Electrical Systems Diagnosis and Repair


Advanced Engine Performance Specialist  (Test LI)

Proposed Content Areas

A.  General Power Train Diagnosis

B.  Computerized Engine Controls Diagnosis

C.  Ignition System Diagnosis

D.  Fuel Systems and Air Induction Systems Diagnosis

E.  Emissions Control Systems Diagnosis

F.  I/M Failure Diagnosis and Repair


5.4.1.3 Association of Diesel Specialists TechCert Certification

     The Association of Diesel Specialists (ADS), in the spring of
1994,    introduced   "TechCert".      TechCert  is   a  technician
certification program,  developed in  cooperation with ASE,  and
upgraded from its original  program.  The program consists, at the
present time,  of four separate exams  (TC1-TC4) with each focusing
on one specific area of diesel fuel injection.  Three additional
exams, TC5-TC7,  will be available in 1995.  The seven test areas
are:

          TCI  -  Diesel Engine Theory and Operation
          TC2  -  Rotary Fuel Injection
          TC3  -  Inline Fuel Injection
          TC4  -  Rail Fuel Injection
          TC5  -  Turbochargers/Blowers (May 1995)
          TC6  -  Injectors/Unit Injectors  (May 1995)
          TC7  -  Diesel System Diagnostics (November 1995)
                               92

-------
     In order to take test TCI  the  technician  must certify that
he/she has at least one year of shop experience.   In order to take
TC2-TC6,  the technician must have a minimum of two years of shop
experience and must  have  passed TCI along with  current factory
training in  the  specific  test area.  Upon passing TC2-TC6,  the
technician becomes ADS TechCert  certified  to  perform repairs in
that particular area.  When the six exams have been successfully
completed, and the technician meets factory training requirements,
he/she is  then certified  as an  ADS  TechCert Certified  Master
Technician.

     Recertification tests are given every five years and cover the
same content areas as those  in  the  original  exams.  For further
information please contact:
          David A Fehling
          Director of Technical Education and Services
          9140 Ward Parkway
          Kansas City,  Missouri  64114
          816-444-3500
          Fax:  816-444-0330

5.4.1.4 State Technician Certification Programs

Proposed Program - Texas  Natural Resource Conservation Commission
(TNRCC)

     The TNRCC certified emissions repair technician (CERT) program
is strictly voluntary.   To become a CERT, a technician must:

     •    Demonstrate  a  minimum  of  three  years  of  full-time
          automotive repair experience

     •    Must be certified in four tests offered by ASE.   These
          four tests are:   Engine  Repair (Test Al) ,  Electrical/
          Electronic Systems (Test A6),  Engine Performance  (Test
          A8) , and the  new Advanced Engine Performance Specialist
          (Test LI).

     •    The  TNRCC  may   consider   future   development   of  a
          certification  program  in  which   repair  technician
          certification  is  based upon  performance,   since  test
          scores are not necessarily indicative of actual ability.

     •    To  maintain  their  certification,   each CERT  may  be
          required  to  take retests  and refresher  courses  when
          available.

     •    CERTs will also be charged a $25 annual fee which will
          fund certification cost, auditing activities, seminars,


                               93

-------
newsletters, and educational materials supplied to the
CERTs.
                     94

-------
     For further information and/or a copy of the proposed Texas
program, contact EPA Region  6,  State Planning Section,  214-655-
7584.

Proposed Program - State of Maryland

      Maryland currently has  a voluntary certification program as
part  of  its  basic  I/M  program.     To  receive  certification,
technicians must complete a state-approved 40 hour education course
taught by  a  state-certified  instructor,  or pass  a  waiver test.
However, there is no ASE  certification requirement to  receive state
certification.

     The state is developing a voluntary certification program for
enhanced I/M emission repair  technicians, which would include ASE
certification as a prerequisite.  The  state does not have authority
to require technician certification under the enabling legislation
for enhanced I/M.   However, the proposed approach where voluntary
state certification is contingent on  ASE certification has merit,
and somewhat parallels the Texas approach.  Maryland  has developed
essentially a two-tiered  approach  for certifying  technicians.
Technicians  will   be certified as   Basic  Certified  Emissions
Technicians  (CETs)  during the  transition  period from  basic  to
enhanced I/M.  All Basic  CET certifications will expire by December
31, 1995.  After this  date,  technicians must be certified as Master
CETs.   This  level  of certification has a more  stringent  set  of
criteria.  The criteria  for these two  levels of certification are
given below:

Basic Certified Emissions Technician

     •    Two  years  of  experience  as an automotive  technician
          performing  emissions related repairs.

     •    Current, valid ASE certification in Electrical/Electronic
          Systems  (Test  A6)  and Engine Performance  (Test A8) .

     •    Requirements will be waived for  a person with current,
          valid certification as  a certified emissions technician
          as of December 31,  1994.   Certification is valid until
          December 31,  1995.

     •    Certified emissions  technicians  will  periodically  be
          audited on  the basis of performance.

Master Certified Emissions Technician

     •    Five years of experience  as an  automotive  technician
          performing  emissions related repairs.
                               95

-------
     •    Current, valid ASE certification in Electrical/Electronic
          Systems (Test A6) , the Engine Performance  (Test A8) ,  and
          the Advanced Engine Performance Specialist (Test LI).

     •    Successful completion of a State orientation course.

     •    The certification for technicians is valid until either
          Test A6, A8, or LI certification expires, or three years
          from the date certification is granted, whichever is the
          earliest.

     •    Certification renewal is dependent on the possession of
          current valid applicable ASE  certifications, whether or
          not the technician  has communicated false or misleading
          information regarding the vehicle emissions inspection
          programs,   or  has   attempted  to  fraudulently  obtain
          certification.

     •    Certified emissions  technicians will periodically  be
          audited on  the  basis of performance.  The  audit  will
          include an  evaluation  of vehicle repair  history,  and
          failure of a performance  audit is cause for the state to
          suspend,  revoke, or deny the renewal  of  certification.

For further information concerning the  proposed Maryland program,
contact EPA Region 3, Program Planning Section, 215-597-6863.

Proposed Program -  State of Michigan

     In 1976  the State  of Michigan Bureau of  Automotive  Repair
(BAR)  began enforcement of the Michigan Motor Vehicle Service and
Repair Act.  This law not only regulates the practice of servicing
and  repairing   motor  vehicles,   but   also   makes   technician
certification mandatory.   The certification program  allows  for
technician  certification  as  master  automobile  and  heavy-duty
mechanics,  specialty  mechanics,   and   issues  mechanic  trainee
permits.   Emission  repair  technicians,  in order to  diagnose  and
repair vehicle which have failed emissions tests, must be certified
in Engine Tune-Up/Performance.

     In order to prepare  technicians for  the IM240 test procedure
and the diagnostic/repair skills that  will  be  necessary,  the
Michigan BAR has scheduled a "train the  trainer"  workshop.  This is
the workshop offered by the National Center for Vehicle Emissions
Control and Safety at Colorado State University and discussed in
Appendix 1, page 1.   The  workshop  will  be  offered at no charge to
selected instructors who will then educate the technicians working
in the  IM240 area.

     To ensure that  the technicians keep pace with the technology,
the Michigan BAR is proposing technician recertification every 5


                               96

-------
years in the following categories:

          1.  Engine Tune-Up/Performance
          2 .  Electrical Systems
          3.  Brakes and Braking Systems

The technician,  in  order to meet this recertification requirement,
must do one of the following:

          1.  Pass the latest Michigan certification test.
          2.  Show  proof of  ASE recertification  (in  applicable
          category).
          3.  Successfully  complete a  State  approved  education
          program.

5.4.2 Repair Facility Certification

5.4.2.1 American Automobile Association (AAA) Approved Auto Repair

     AAA's Approved Auto Repair Program certifies facilities based
on a number of criteria.  This program is discussed in detail in
Section 4.3.1.6.

5.4.2.2 State Programs

New York Program

     The State  of  New York has recently instituted the  Sign of
Automotive Excellence  Program  (SAEP)  in  order to  certify repair
facilities.  Performance monitoring aspects of this  program are
discussed in Section 4.3.1.4.  At the time of SAEP certification;

     •    One or more  of the  technicians  employed by  the repair
          facility must have completed the four courses offered by
          the New  York Automotive  Technician  Training  Program
          (ATTP).  These  four courses are:   Fundamental Engine
          Electronics Training, Systems Training in Emissions and
          Performance,  Computerized Automotive Performance  Systems,
          and Fuel Injection Systems Training.

     •    At least one-half of the other technicians employed by
          the facility must have completed the first ATTP course
          (Fundamental Engine Electronics Training).

     •    The repair  facility  must  also  exhibit a pattern of
          quality repairs as discussed in Section 4.3.1.4.

     Once the facility is certified, the initial certification is
good for two years.  To be re-recognized after two years, 50% of
all employees must  have completed all four ATTP  courses, along with
an updated application form.   Re-certification then takes  place


                               97

-------
annually by completing the application sent to the repair facility,

-------
     When the repair facility is certified, the facility is allowed
to display the ATTP "Sign of Excellence" and use this certification
in its advertising.  For more information contact  EPA,  Region 2
Implementation Section,  212-264-2517.

Proposed Program -  Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission
(TNRCC)

     The TNRCC  certified emissions repair  facility  (CERE)  program
is strictly voluntary and consists of  the following requirements:

     •    A minimum of one TNRCC CERT  (Certified Emissions Repair
          Technician) must be employed on  a full-time basis for a
          vehicle repair facility.

     •    Only  if the emissions repairs were performed by a CERT at
          a CERE will the expenses incurred  be  applied  toward a
          waiver.

     •    Only  CERT's will be able to access repair information and
          newsletters free of charge.  All other technicians will
          have  to pay for  the access to  this  information.

     •    Signatures and certification identification numbers of
          the CERE and the CERT performing repairs must be included
          on the  repair form  to  serve   as  proof  of  certified
          repairs.

     •    A CERT will be allowed  to supervise  emissions  repairs
          performed by  non-certified personnel after the initial
          emissions diagnosis is  performed.

     •    Any  repairs signed off by a  CERT will be recorded as if
          they  were  conducted by  the  CERT and, therefore,  will
          affect his/her performance.  (As a  result,  the  cost of
          these repairs  apply towards  the waiver.)

     •    The CERE may subcontract repair work.  However, the CERE
          will  be held accountable for  such repairs  that relate to
          emissions repairs  affiliated with  the I/M program.

     •    The CERE is required to inform the TNRCC of any change in
          CERT  employment  status.

     •    The  CERE  is required to operate  and maintain a specific
          list  of repair equipment in order  to  be  certified and
          retain certification.

     •    The external and internal appearance of the CERE must be
          kept  clean and neat, with clean, safe,  and comfortable


                               99

-------
          facilities for its customers.

     •    Any complaints will be taken into consideration for audit
          or decertification purposes.

     •    Provided that the requirements are met,  any interested
          repair facility or technician in Texas, whether in a non-
          attainment area or not, will  be  eligible  for emission
          repair certification.

     •    A TNRCC  CERF  may be audited  at  least once  a  year  to
          verify compliance with certification requirements,  and
          each CERF's performance monitoring  statistics  will  be
          closely reviewed.

     •    The  TNRCC  proposes  that  regional  peer  groups   be
          established in the non-attainment  areas  that could  be
          used for discussion of  TNRCC information concerning the
          possible  decertification  of  a  facility.    The  TNRCC
          retains final authority in all  decertification cases but
          will weigh the recommendation of the regional peer group.
          Any  decertified  facility  must  wait  one  year  before
          reapplying for certification.

     For further information and/or a copy of the proposed Texas
program contact EPA, Region  6,  State Planning Section, 214-655-
7584.

Proposed Program - State of Maryland

     The State of Maryland  is  developing a voluntary program  of
repair facility certification as part of  its enhanced  I/M program.
A certified facility must:

     •    Maintain a repair facility capable of making emissions
          related adjustments and repairs.

     •    Have a  state-certified emissions  technician diagnose
          emissions  related faults,  and  supervise  or  perform
          emission related  repairs.

     •    Employ at least one full-time certified technician who is
          routinely scheduled to work during the advertised working
          hours of the facility.

     •    Completely fill out the vehicle repair form which must be
          signed by a certified technician.

     •    Possess all required equipment,  including standard tools,
          as well  as an OBD scanner,  BAR-80  engine analyzer,  modem
          or fax machine to  receive IM240  second-by-second data


                               100

-------
          from the  test  lane in  graphical  form,  and  access  to
          diagnostic information less than two years old (in the
          form of an on-line service or manuals).

     •    Allow access of the facility and its  records to periodic
          quality  assurance  audits   (approximately  every  two
          months).  Audits  will be  conducted at random and with no
          prior notice,  and  will  include checks  of  whether the
          facility has  all required equipment.

     •    Maintain quality assurance records,  audit records, and
          vehicle repair records for at least  three years.

     Repair facility certification  is  valid for  three  years,  at
which time the facility  may apply  for renewal.  Certification can
be  suspended,   revoked,  or  denied  if  the   facility  knowingly
communicates any false,  inaccurate, or misleading information to
any person or in any certificate, record, or document regarding the
vehicle emissions inspection program; fraudulently or deceptively
obtains  or attempts to  obtain certification;  fails  a  quality
assurance audit; or exhibits evidence that vehicles repaired by the
facility repeatedly fail reinspections.  For further information
concerning  the  proposed Maryland  repair  facility certification
program, contact EPA Region 3, Program  Planning Section, 215-597-
6863.

5.4.3 NATEF Education Facility Certification

5.4.3.1 Certification Program

     To  help  recruit,  mentor,  educate future technicians,  and
improve  technical   instruction,   the   National   Institute  for
Automotive Service  Excellence (ASE) offers certification for three
education programs.  Automobile, Autobody, and Medium/Heavy Duty
Truck  training programs  can earn ASE  certification  upon  the
recommendation of  the National  Automotive Technicians  Education
Foundation  (NATEF).   NATEF is  a  sister  organization  of  ASE.
Through its certification process,  NATEF examines the structure and
resources  of  the  education programs and  evaluates  them against
nationally accepted standards of quality.  Described briefly below
are  the major  steps  involved in  the  NATEF  education facility
certification process.  For  detailed  information,  contact  NATEF
directly:

               NATEF
               13505 Dulles Technology Drive
               Herndon,  VA  22071-3415
               703-713-0100

     The NATEF certification process  is  a comprehensive process
governed by a  detailed set of standards that will not be discussed


                              101

-------
here.   The  certification process is basically  divided  into six
phases, each varying in length and complexity.

     Any  secondary,   post-secondary,   technical  institute,  or
community college program may apply for certification. The process
begins when  the program desiring certification sends its request to
NATEF, with  the appropriate fee,  and indicates which of the three
areas  it  would like  to be certified.   NATEF  will  then  send the
appropriate  evaluation materials.

     An advisory committee, appointed by the institution requesting
certification  according  to the NATEF specifications, will  then
conduct a self-evaluation  of  the  education program based on the
NATEF  standards.   Upon  completion  of the  self-evaluation,  the
materials are sent  to the NATEF office  where they will be reviewed
to  determine  if  the  program qualifies  for  the   on-site  team
evaluation.

     If the  program qualifies, an Evaluation Team Leader will be
assigned  from within that  specific state  to conduct the on-site
team  evaluation.    The Evaluation  Team  Leader  is an  educator
certified by ASE and trained by NATEF's educational consultants.
The Team Leader and the team members conduct a two-day evaluation.
The program  is  reviewed to determine  if the equipment, curriculum,
instructional  system,  job  placement program,  staff credentials,
safety  features, cleanliness,  and professionalism meet  industry
standards.  If the requirements are  met,  the program will become
certified by ASE for five years.   The program will receive an ASE
plaque, promotional packet, and a  wall sign.  The  certified program
will also be encouraged  to put on a graduate's  diploma  the fact
that they have completed an ASE certified  program and the diploma
should  include the ASE logo.

     The Automobile Training Program certification requires that
the facility be certified  in at least  four of the eight ASE test
areas  (listed in Section  5.4.1.1)  . At  the  present time, three are
required:  Brakes  (Test A5),  Electrical/Electronic Systems  (Test
A6) ,  and  Engine  Performance  (Test A8) .    As of  January  1,  1996,
Suspension and Steering (Test A4)  will become the fourth required
area.   There has  also been  discussion  of  NATEF  certifying in-
service  technician education programs  that would  focus  on the
criteria  in the Engine Performance Test and the new LI test.

5.4.3.2 EPA/NATEF Grant

     In September  1992, EPA awarded a three-year grant to NATEF to
improve the  quality and increase the number of automotive education
programs  in  specific urban areas  that have the worst air quality.
The objective of the grant is to  increase  the number of industry-
certified secondary and post-secondary auto tech programs in areas
that are  not in attainment with the  National Ambient Air Quality


                               102

-------
Standards (NAAQS)  for  ozone and CO.  The  grant authorizes NATEF to
set  up   a   mentoring  process   between   automotive   education
institutions in selected areas so that schools that do not have ASE
certification can be assisted by qualified personnel from an ASE
certified program to achieve certification of their programs.  The
mentoring process involves an  advisor  from the certified school
working with  the  school that  wishes  to become certified.   The
advisor works  with  that  school to improve  its program  so  it is
better able  to meet ASE/NATEF's  standards for certification and can
receive certification.

     Meetings are  held in each targeted state with NATEF personnel
and state  educators to discuss the program and begin developing the
mentoring process.  The  purpose of the meetings is to explain how
the program works, and the benefits to be gained in terms of clean
air, as well as better programs for the student,  the school, and
the community.  Lists of certified and  uncertified  programs are
started to  begin  pairings  for  the mentoring process.   EPA has
identified areas  in sixteen  states that will  receive  assistance
from this  grant.  The list of  areas  and the schedule is as follows,
though  depending  upon  program  needs,  there  may  be  slight
adjustments made to the third year target cities:

     September 2,  1992 - September 1,  1993
          Illinois - Chicago
          Indiana -  Lake and  Porter Counties
          Maryland - Baltimore  and surrounding B.C.  suburbs
          Michigan - Muskegon
          Wisconsin  -  Milwaukee,  Kenosha,  and Racine

     September 2,  1993 - September 1,  1994
          Colorado - Denver
          Connecticut  -  Bridgeport, Hartford,  New  London,
               New Britain, and New Haven
          Maine -  Portland
          Nevada - Las Vegas
          New Hampshire  - Nashua
          Pennsylvania - Pittsburgh,  Harrisburg,
               Allentown/Bethlehem/Easton
          Rhode Island - Entire state
          Texas -  Houston

     September 2,  1994 - September 1,  1995
          Georgia -  Atlanta
          Massachusetts  - Boston
          New York - New York City

     In the  first  year of the  grant, 78 auto tech programs in five
states  were targeted  to  receive  assistance  in  obtaining  ASE
certification by  NATEF.   Forty-seven of  these  schools  received
self-evaluation  materials,   two  have  been certified,  and  the

                               103

-------
remaining forty-five are working on  upgrading  their  programs to
qualify for certification.

     For more information regarding  the  EPA/NATEF  grant,  please
contact:
                               104

-------
          Casey Caccavari
          U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency
          Office of Mobile Sources (6406J)
          401 M Street,  S.W.
          Washington.  B.C.  20460
          202-233-9302
          Fax:   202-233-9556
5.5  Repair Technician Education Programs

     The following information on existing or proposed education
programs and other resources  is provided  for reference only.  EPA
does not endorse any particular program and/or resource.   If EPA
becomes aware of any additional sources of education information,
they will be added to future updates of the guidance document.  It
is expected that the state and local agencies will determine which,
if any,  of these programs/resources can assist them in meeting the
education needs  in their state.  The information below was provided
by the local or state-affiliated organizations, states that operate
or are developing education programs/resources,  and EPA makes no
claims on the accuracy of the data.

5.5.1  Existing or Proposed Local and State-Affiliated Education
Programs

     The program information that is provided in this section is a
combination  of  local  and state-affiliated  education  programs.
Descriptions  of education programs  offered  by  non-profit  and
commercial entities are provided  in Appendix  7.  Other sources of
education/reference materials are described in Appendix 8.

5.5.1.1  State of California,  Bureau of Automotive Repair  (BAR)

     At present, the State of  California's  Bureau  of  Automotive
Repair  (BAR) has a  program in  effect  that  educates  and licenses
Smog Check Technicians for California's Smog Check Program.  BAR
has  since  proposed  a series  of enhancements  to its program and
these will be included in the discussion of the BAR below.

     The BAR proposal recommends  the following enhancements:

     1)   the  setting  of  prerequisites  to   take  the  BAR  smog
     technician exam as ASE certification,  or an  equivalent;

     2)  implementing a multi-level licensing strategy;  and

     3)  developing a mentoring system which provides the technician
     immediate feedback on his/her own job performance.

     At present  there are  two ways to qualify to take the BAR Smog


                               105

-------
Check Technician licensing examination.  One is to have two years
of  experience  in  tune-ups,  and  emission  system diagnosis  and
repair.  The other is  through BAR's Clean Air Car  Course.   The
Clean  Air   Car   Course  prepares  prospective  technicians  with
coursework needed for BAR's Smog Technicians exam and is provided
by community colleges, trade schools, adult education centers, and
other providers of automotive education programs.   BAR certifies
both the schools and instructors, and  provides  the  framework to
teach the course.   The  course requires 80 hours of  lecture and
hands-on lab work which BAR deems as no longer adequate.

     BAR  is  revising   the  Clean  Air  Car  Course  program  to
incorporate the following:

     1)  a prerequisite  of 12 months  of vocational experience, or
     nine semester units  in  emission  theory  and  tune-up from an
     accredited school/college, or 180 hours of emission education,
     or ASE certification in Engine  Performance (A8);

     2)  the course providers will receive  an ongoing report card
     indicating the percent of students passing each element of the
     Smog Check exam; and

     3)  the  student must  demonstrate  competency mastered, not hours
     spent,  to graduate  from the program.

     The BAR Smog Check  technician exam has traditionally been a
multiple-choice written  exam which measures  knowledge directly and
ability indirectly.  BAR is developing an  interactive exam using
computer software that is pictorial and gives realistic interaction
that poses repair and diagnostic  scenarios.

     The  California  BAR  has   also  proposed  other   minimum
requirements for its licensure program.  The minimum requirements
for licensure  are coupled  to a multi-level license concept that is
tied to the technology of  the vehicles.  The minimum requirements
for licensure  would be the ASE certification or its equivalent in
Electrical/Electronic Systems (Test  A6), Engine Performance  (Test
A8) , and the new Advanced Engine Performance Specialist (Test LI)  .
BAR acknowledges that latitude exists in recognizing and approving
programs that would meet  or exceed ASE's certification requirements
in the areas of  education  and experience; thus, ASE or equivalent
will be used.

     The proposed multi-levels of  licensure, their qualifications
and performance duties  are outlined as follows:

Level 1 - Entry Level

The objective  of entry level licensure is to provide a career path
for  aspiring  technicians  and to develop  their  skills.    This

                               106

-------
licensing  is  not  mandatory  and  the  number  of  entry  level
technicians would be limited to two per station in order to prevent
station owners from hiring only entry level personnel.

Qualifications:   Enrolled in, or a recent graduate of,  the BAR
Clean Air Car Course with no  ASE certification or its equivalent.
This person would work under the general supervision of a mentor
smog technician who has  no  legal  action pending against his/her
license.   This  licensure is  good for one year  depending on the
person obtaining ASE certification in A6 and A8 or the equivalent,
showing  proficiency in a Partners in Clean Air audit, performing
at  an  acceptable level  of   emission  reduction  verified  by the
centralized database,  having no  legal  action file against their
license, and passing the BAR smog technician exam.

Performance Duties:   The duties of an entry level  technician may
include repairs  to tampered emission control systems, adjustments
to lower emissions,  service  and  maintenance  of  emission control
systems  under  the  direction  of  a  Level  3  technician,  and
performance of emission inspections.

Level 2 - Engine Performance Technician

Qualifications:    The  Engine Performance Technician  must  have a
minimum  of  two  years  practical  experience,  ASE  A6  and  A8
certification (or equivalent),  passed BAR's smog technician exam,
and have no  pending legal action against his/her  license.   The
Engine Performance Technician must also perform at an acceptable
level  of emission reduction  and be able to perform basic diagnosis
and maintenance  of  emission  control  systems as verified by the
centralized database.   This  licensure would be good for two years
based  on  the  technician's   job  performance,  compliance  with
rules/regulation, and maintenance of his/her ASE certification.

Performance Duties:  The performance duties would include moderate
emission systems diagnosis and repairs encompassing the ability to
diagnose and repair  basic computer systems.

Level 3 - Electronic Emission Diagnostic Technician

Qualifications:   The Electronic Emission Diagnostic Technician is
a smog technician with more  than  two years of experience, who has
passed the LI test,  and  has  also passed the  BAR smog technician
exam.  The Electronic Emission Diagnostic Technician possesses a
high  degree  of  technical skill,  especially as  it relates  to
diagnosis,   fault code  interpretation,  and  multiplexing.   The
technician's work environment  should be  conducive for  effective
repairs and his  repairs  should result  in an  acceptable level of
emission reduction as  verified by the centralized database.  This
license is  good for two years  based on performance, compliance with
BAR rules and regulation, and maintenance of ASE certification.


                               107

-------
108

-------
Performance  Duties:     The   duties  of  an  Electronic  Emission
Diagnostic  Technician  include  the same  skills  as the  Engine
Performance Technician  as well as  the  ability to  diagnose  and
repair future  computer technology, including but not  limited to On
Board Diagnosis II (OBD II).

     Two  other  ideas that  California BAR  has suggested are  a
minimum of 40  hours of required education that would be completed
annually and performance monitoring of  Smog Check technicians.  The
education would focus on the  latest  changes  in technology as well
as  what  is  learned   through the  repairing of  vehicles.    The
education would be mandatory.

     California BAR is proposing a performance monitoring program
that would  provide   the  technicians with a sense of  their  own
performance (Section  4.3.2) .  BAR  is  proposing that feedback be
provided  on maintenance and service,  diagnostics,  repairs,  and
tampering repairs. If a technician is  found  deficient in an area,
the technician would be able to get specific information  on his/her
area(s) of weakness.   The  program would  also provide enforcement
against the technician and/or shop that exhibits a pattern of abuse
or a reluctance to improve.

     For more  detailed information  on  the California BAR existing
certification program and its proposed enhancements, contact EPA
Region  9, Mobile Sources Section,  415-744-1230.

5.5.1.2 State of New York

     To meet the increasing demands for the  repair industry,  the
New  York State  Automotive   Technician  Training  Program  (ATTP)
(described in  Section 5.2.2.1) has developed an educational program
that is nationally recognized.   This program develops curricula,
trains instructors, approves  training agents, and delivers courses
to in-service  automotive technicians state-wide.  The ATTP consists
of six  separate courses:

     1)  Fundamental  Engine Electronics Training
     2)  Systems Training in Engine Performance
     3)  Computerized Automotive Performance Systems
     4)  Fuel  Injection Systems Training
     5)  Training in  Anti-lock Braking Systems
     6)  Systems Training in Air Conditioning

The  first  four  courses  are  core courses which  must  be taken in
order  to  become  a recognized New York  STAT Approved Automotive
Technician.    For   more  information  contact  EPA  Region  2,
Implementation Section,  212-264-2517.
                               109

-------
5.5.1.3 State of Florida

     After  a  year  of  study  by  the  Florida  Department  of
Environmental Regulation (FDER)  and  the American Lung Association
of Florida (ALAF) , the state of Florida has developed a new 60-hour
automotive   service   technician   education  program   entitled
"Automotive Skills Enhancement  Repair  Training"  or "ASERT".   An
advisory panel made up of representatives from the  FDER, ALAF, the
Department of Education, the Department of Highway Safety and Motor
Vehicles, the Florida Energy Office,  and the Department of Consumer
Affairs as well as others from environmental and industry groups
was formed.  It was decided to model the program, with some changes
and enhancements, on the New  York  Department of  Motor Vehicles'
ATTP program.  ASERT will be offered as a complete, user-friendly,
ready to operate program to schools  approved by the Department of
Education.   For more information  contact  EPA Region  4,  Mobile
Source Team, 404-347-2864.

5.5.1.4 State of Washington

     The  State  of  Washington,  as part  of   its I/M program,  has
adopted  an  Emission  Specialist  Certification.     To  become  a
certified emission specialist, an individual shall pass a course of
study  that has  been  approved  by  the  Washington  Department  of
Ecology (DOE). This course must include motor vehicle maintenance,
engine and exhaust  analysis equipment usage,  and emission control
system repair and maintenance.  The certified specialist must also
agree in writing to the  following section on maintenance  of his/her
certification.

     To   maintain   certification   the  technician  must:     1)
successfully complete a DOE course on emission repair within the
second year after the date  of  certification,  and each second year
thereafter,  2)  sign  for all repairs and adjustments,  3)  record
emission  readings  after work is  completed, 4)  not  tamper  with
emission controls or manufacturer's  specifications,  5)  not obtain
or attempt to obtain a waiver  by providing  false information, and
6) not aid or abet  any individual in committing violations of the
program.

     The Emission Specialist Certification  also provides a system
and conditions  under  which a certification can  be temporarily
revoked.    The  certification  can  be   permanently revoked  for
continued  willful  violation  of  the  certification  maintenance
conditions described above.  An appeal process is also provided.
For  more  information,   contact EPA  Region 10,  Air  Programs
Development Section, 206-553-4198.

5.5.1.5 Commonwealth of Massachusetts

     The  Commonwealth  of Massachusetts established  the  Special


                              110

-------
Commission on Vehicle  Inspection  and  Maintenance  to investigate
alternative vehicle inspection and maintenance education program
designs that would satisfy the requirements of the Clean Air Act
Amendments  of  1990.   As  a  result  of  the  commission's  work,
legislation was written.   The  proposed legislation to enhance the
I/M program includes a requirement  for  the formal education and
certification  for  both inspectors and  repair technicians.   No
specific details are available at this time.  For more information
contact EPA Region 1, Technical Assistance  Section, 617-565-3224.

5.5.1.6  State   of  Wisconsin  Pilot  IM240   Demo  Lane/Technician
Education Project

     The Wisconsin Department  of Transportation,  funded in part by
a  grant  from   the Department  of  Transportation's  Congestion
Management  and  Air  Quality  Improvement  Program   (CMAQ),  is
establishing a model IM240 project.  The project sets up a pilot
IM240 test lane within a current I/M program facility in southeast
Wisconsin.   Performance  monitoring aspects  of  this  project are
discussed in Section 4.3.1.5.   The goal of  the pilot lane is for
the repair technician to  identify  the  causes of the emission test
failures and to correctly repair failing vehicles.  Seminars will
be developed from the information learned through these repairs to
educate vocational school  instructors  and  enable  them to modify
current   curriculum   to   include:  IM240   testing   procedures,
interpretation of inspection  results,  and  diagnostic  and repair
strategies.  Selected  vehicles from  the  pilot test  lane will be
referred  to  local vocational  schools  and  will provide student
technicians with practical diagnostic and repair  application.  For
further information,  contact EPA Region 5, Air Planning Section at
312-886-6043.

5.5.1.7 Racine,  Wisconsin's Transportation Youth  Apprenticeship
Program

     The Racine Unified School District in Wisconsin is developing
a Transportation Youth Apprenticeship Program whose primary goal is
to assist  targeted youth to  prepare  for employment  as educated
automotive service professionals.   The program is consistent with
the  certification criteria established by ASE  and  NATEF.   A
secondary goal  of the program  is to assist those  that complete the
program to attain a certificate of achievement from the Wisconsin
Department of  Industry,  Labor, and Human Relations  attesting to
their  academic  and  occupational  proficiency  attained in  the
program.  This program will be used as a model program for other
Wisconsin automotive technology education institutions.  For more
information, contact the  Racine Unified School District, 414-631-
7090.

5.5.1.8 New Jersey Mechanic's Education Association  (MEA)
                               111

-------
     The New  Jersey  Mechanic's Education Association  (MEA)  was
created  by auto  technicians  interested  in  solving their  own
problems by pooling  their talents  and resources.   MEA  hired
instructors,  built  classrooms, bought  and  equipped an  on-site
training van,  and also purchased other diagnostic equipment.  MEA
operates daily phone,  fax,  and on-site,  on-the-job education as
well  as  apprentice and  journeyman evening hands-on diagnostic
troubleshooting classes at central  locations.  Several courses each
week are focused on the apprentice  technicians  and several new and
advanced  classes  each  month  are offered  to  the  journeyman
technicians.  MEA supplies through  the MEA membership over 40 hours
of class time  and over 200  hours of hotline time each month.  The
MEA organization is  also  very active  in representing the  auto
technicians' interests to consumers and  government agencies.  For
more information, contact:

               Mechanic's Education Association
               1805 Springfield Avenue
               Maplewood, New Jersey   07040
               201-763-0086

5.6 Guidelines to Consider when Selecting or  Developing  a Model
Education Program for In-Service Technicians

     The  development  of  a model  education  program  requires
planning,  advance  preparation, and a  commitment  backed by  the
needed  resources.    There  must also  be an  effective  means  of
assuring that  education for in-service technicians is adequate to
meet the demands increased by the  new I/M programs.  The  general
and specific subject  criteria in Sections 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 of this
guidance must be covered to have  an effective education program.
The course(s)   offered should be  focused on getting the  crucial
information and  skills to the technicians and then measuring the
changes on their abilities  and  performance.  The effectiveness of
education should not be viewed as strictly the number of hours that
it would take  to complete  the  course(s).   It  has  been  generally
found that  there  is no direct correlation between how many hours of
education  a technician receives  and his/her  ability to  perform
competent repairs.

     It  is important  that  any  education  program  provide  for
adequate pre-testing of the participants.  The pre-test should be
comprehensive  enough  so  that  it  successfully accomplishes  an
adequate pre-qualifications screen of the class.  If this is not
done,  the less  experienced or entry level technicians will slow the
class down  which will limit the  amount of information presented and
increase a skilled technician's frustration.

     It is  recommended that the  education provided take a proactive
approach rather  than  a reactive  approach.   This means  that  the
development of  the  programs  and the  education   of in-service


                               112

-------
technicians  should  take place before  the increased  demand  for
satisfactory repairs becomes a  reality with the new I/M programs.
If  the  public  is  not  able  to obtain  adequate  repairs due  to
insufficient  education,  it may  undermine the entire  program's
effectiveness.

     Further, it is  desirable that the subject matter is provided
in a self-contained course.  If  the  subject  matter  is taught  in
several related courses or a series of courses,  the state should
make sure that the required subject matter is not dispersed over so
many courses  that the  context  of the  subject matter is lost,  or
that the technicians are required to attend so many courses that it
becomes a significant burden.

     Listed below are guidelines state agencies  can consider for
the selection or development of  a  technician education program.
This list is not meant to  encompass all the criteria necessary to
consider in choosing or developing education.  Individual states
may have specific needs not  mentioned  here.   In  preparing  these
guidelines,  EPA reviewed  its  own  internal  correspondence,  the
guidelines from the Coalition for Safer,  Cleaner Vehicles' (CSCV),
Education/Training Advisory Board,  several draft documents on the
training  and education of  Smog Technicians  from the  State  of
California,  and various other position  papers.   Some  of  these
guidelines were incorporated where appropriate.

•    The education program should be compatible with the existing
     in-service educational systems, e.g., public school programs,
     existing   post-secondary   facilities,    community  college
     programs.

•    The in-service education program should reflect,  at a minimum,
     the  information  required  to  pass  the  ASE  A8,  Engine
     Performance Test, and the new LI Test.

•    Education should be accessible  to the technicians with respect
     to money and time.  If it is too expensive  and is taught  at
     times and  locations  that  are not  convenient  to the working
     technician,  the   education  programs will  not  provide  the
     results desired by the states.

•    In-service technicians may have to be motivated to participate
     in the new  education program.  An ideal situation to motivate
     in-service technicians would be  for the repair facility  to
     allow its technicians to be  educated during the day  (working
     hours) and, upon successful completion of the course and/or
     the  appropriate   ASE   tests,   reimburse  the   technicians
     completely or in  part  for their tuition  costs  and tests fees.
     Allowing for the  technician to  be  educated  during the  day
     eliminates the fatigue most technicians experience with the
     typical evening course.  This provides a group of qualified


                               113

-------
technicians that are prepared, mentally  and physically for
diagnostic education.
                          114

-------
The courses should be taught by fully qualified and certified
instructors  in  accordance   with  all   state   and  local
requirements.  Instructors  for  advanced level courses should
have ASE LI certification.  ASE certification of instructors
and NATEF certification of facilities is strongly encouraged.

The facility should be capable of monitoring its quality of
instruction and provide for updates and expansion in order to
remain current.  NATEF certification  and  the  five  year re-
certification process would assist in this area.

The in-service education program should be supported by the
tools, equipment, and  other  support materials  that  are or
could be  available in the  local  repair  industry and should
also be of such quality as  to meet the objectives of the ASE
A8 and LI Tests.

The course curriculum should be a  combination of lecture/book
work, visual aids, and hands-on training to  assure proficiency
of the basic and fundamental  theories related  to  emission
diagnosis and repair.

Two  additional  types  of education  can be  considered  when
trying to fulfill the requirement of the I/M rule.  One type,
the feasibility  of which is presently being  studied by the
California BAR,  is  that of satellite education.   This would
allow for many  education  facilities and  independent repair
facilities to tie together into one central  education facility
so many  technicians could  be  trained simultaneously.   This
would reduce costs  because  instructors  would not  have to
travel to many  centers  and  the  sites  would have  all the
written materials and equipment they need for the class.

A second type is computer based,  interactive education.  The
computer  software could present any component or system and
allow the user to interact with  the computer to accomplish the
objectives of the software.  The initial cost of developing
and updating as  needed these  programs is  expensive but the
cost of mass producing and distributing the programs could be
very affordable to repair  facilities  and/or technicians.  This
type  of  program would allow  for the  incorporation  of new
techniques and/or equipment,  and  it  could  be used at home or
after hours.  Furthermore,  simulations allow for the user to
repeat a particular sequence until a skill is learned,  thus
progressing at his/her own  speed.  A post-training test could
also be  included.

The education program should provide  for pre- and post-testing
of the participants.  The  pre-test  should be comprehensive
enough so that it successfully  accomplishes an adequate pre-


                         115

-------
     qualifications screen of the class.  If this  is not done, the
     less experienced  or  entry level technicians will  slow the
     class  down which will  limit  the  amount  of  information
     presented and increase a skilled technician's frustration.

•    Adequate post-testing should not only indicate that the course
     material has  been covered but how well  the technician can
     utilize what was learned.  Most certification exams have been
     the traditional multiple choice test.   It  is  recommended that
     the post-testing of in-service technicians include not only
     direct testing of  the basic knowledge but  also include a test
     of manipulative skills, and the testing of their knowledge of
     knowing where  to find and then apply the service information.

•    The education  program may want  to consider  allowing the option
     for the well skilled  technician to skip the program and take
     the required competency/licensing exam  directly.  In the areas
     that require  enhanced  I/M,  this option may be  more  useful
     after the  IM240 program has  been in  place  for  a  period of
     time, allowing technicians to become  familiar with it.

•    The  state   oversight  agency,   as  part of  its  performance
     monitoring  program  required  in  enhanced I/M areas,  could
     provide feedback to the repair  and education facilities on the
     progress of its education program graduates.  This could be
     done  to assist   in  monitoring  program   effectiveness  and
     recommend improvements.  The state oversight agency could also
     be  the  central database  to  record the  completion of  the
     education programs by the technicians and their passage of the
     state  competency/licensing exams  or  the  passage  of  the
     appropriate ASE test.

•    In the enhanced I/M areas,  it may be helpful  to the consumer,
     at least during the I/M start-up period, that the performance
     summaries  provided  to  the public include information  on
     whether technicians are certified by ASE  or  not,  and whether
     they have passed ASE Test  A6,  Test A8, and the  LI  Test.

5.7   Possible Resources  Available for Developing an  Education
Program

5.7.1 Congestion Mitigation and Air Quality Improvement Program
(CMAQ) - Department of Transportation

     The Federal transportation/highway funding  bill,  otherwise
known as the Intermodal Surface Transportation Efficiency Act of
1991  (ISTEA), contains a  special  program  called the Congestion
Mitigation  and   Air  Quality Improvement  Program  (CMAQ).    The
program, which  is  authorized at  $6 billion over  the  life  of the
highway bill  (6 years), allocates money to  the states based on a
formula  which  takes   into  account  the   number of  people  in

                               116

-------
nonattainment areas  and  the  severity of the  pollution problem.
States may  spend  CMAQ  money on  transportation projects  which
contribute   to   emission   reductions.      The  Department   of
Transportation (DOT)  has declared capital expenditures  for I/M, in
particular technician education development or high-tech diagnostic
center capital costs, as eligible for CMAQ funds. Interested local
officials  should   contact   the  local  metropolitan  planning
organization or the  State DOT who then  will contact the Federal
DOT.

5.7.2  Coalition for Safer,  Cleaner Vehicles  (CSCV)

     The  CSCV,  discussed  in more  detail  in  Appendix 7,  has
conducted its train-the-trainer program in several states.   CSCV
has also hosted a  series  of regional workshops  aimed at assisting
states in implementing enhanced vehicle inspection and maintenance
programs.  CSCV also is  involved  in  locating  sources  of funding
that states  and/or local  agencies may  be able  to access.  Further
information can be obtained  from Gary  Huggins  of CSCV at 202-543-
4499 or by contacting CSCV at the address below:

          Coalition for Safer,  Cleaner Vehicles
          321 D Street  NE
          Washington, D.C.   20002
          202-543-4575

5.7.3 Other EPA Grants

     EPA has awarded several grants  to state agencies to support
education and diagnostic work.  The Delaware  Department of Natural
Resources was  awarded  $14,000  to support  a  train  the trainers
workshop  for  Delaware and the surrounding  states.   The Colorado
Department of Health was awarded  $35,000  to  support  train  the
trainers workshops for Colorado and the surrounding states, as well
as other technician education activities.  The  New York Department
of  Environmental  Conservation  was  awarded  $57,000  to  support
development of diagnostic information from transient testing data.

5.7.4  Other Possible Sources

     Several other education programs exist that may assist a state
in  developing,  upgrading,  or accessing a  technician  education
program.  These programs, discussed briefly below are:

     Job Training  and Partnership Act - The JTPA is  funded by
     a Department of Labor grant which  makes  job education
     opportunities available  to the  returning  student  or
     displaced worker.  Materials could be created that would
     utilize this  existing program to  encourage these adults
     to consider the automotive  technician field.
                               117

-------
     School-to-Work Program - The School-to-Work Program is a
     program operated jointly by the Departments  of Education
     and Labor.  This program is similar  to an apprenticeship
     program where the student works and attends classes in
     order to train for a specific field.

     National Advanced  Technician Training Act  -  This  was
     introduced in  the  Senate  as Senate Bill  S1146  and is
     designed to  be  administered  by the  National  Science
     Foundation (NSF).  The goal is to establish a national
     advanced  technician  education  program utilizing  the
     resources  of  the  nation's  two-year  associate  degree
     granting  colleges  to  expand  the  pool  of  skilled
     technicians in  strategic  advanced  technology  fields.
     This  program  will  be administered  through a  grants
     programs  that  will  establish  national  centers  of
     scientific and  technical  education,  and  also  utilize
     partnership and outreach grants.

     American Automobile Association - The American Automobile
     Association (AAA) has established a program that includes
     a fleet  of vehicles  with each  vehicle  containing  the
     diagnostic equipment necessary to educate technicians in
     the  diagnostic  techniques necessary  for   the new  I/M
     programs.  Arrangements  can be  made with AAA to come to
     the  individual  sites  to  conduct  one  week  training
     courses.

5.8  Issues to be Resolved

5.8.1 Information Availability Rule and SAE J2008

     The Clean Air Act,  Section 202(m)(5),  as amended in 1990 by
Section 207(m)(5),  requires the manufacturers to provide promptly
to  any  person  engaged  in  the  repairing  or servicing  of  motor
vehicles or motor vehicle engines any and all information needed to
make use of the  emission control  diagnostic system and such other
information,   including  instructions  for making emission related
diagnosis and repairs.  Moreover,  EPA's  February 19, 1993 rule on
onboard diagnostics  (Federal  Register 58(32):9468-9488)  requires
manufacturers   to  make  emission-related   repair   and   service
information   (including  recall  information)  available  to  all
independent technicians  and services. A major issue being resolved
is what  information  will be  available and at what cost.   Final
rules on service information availability are not yet available,
but will be contained in a future EPA rulemaking.   Beginning in
1996, the repair and service information availability requirement
of  the  onboard  diagnostic  rule would have  to be provided  in a
standardized  electronic format  currently being  developed by the
                               118

-------
Society of Automotive Engineers  (SAE) under SAE J2008.13

5.8.2 Equipment Shortages

     Many high schools and college automotive programs are finding
it difficult  to purchase  readily available commercial equipment
necessary  to  teach their  students.    This  situation is  due to
dwindling budgets and decreases in Federal and state grant funding.
The equipment is needed to develop entry level  skills, as well as
teaching emissions oriented tests and  repairs and new technologies.
The Education Equipment Subcommittee of the Coordinating Council
for Automotive Repair  (CCAR)  has been  formed  for the purpose of
identifying school  equipment needs, locating equipment and funding
sources, and  distributing  equipment  in a  equitable manner.  For
further  information,  contact  Jessica  Levy of  Monroe  Community
College, Rochester, NY, 716-325-1242.

5.8.3 Retest Failures

     The repairs needed to pass  the transient  test  may require
greater diagnostic proficiency on the  part of technicians  than what
is generally  needed in  response to a steady-state test failure.
Furthermore, some repair facilities may return a vehicle without
performing tests which  would  give them reasonable assurance the
vehicle  will  pass  IM240.   There is a  risk that  if  the   repair
industry as a whole is unprepared or not able to  respond adequately
and in a timely manner to the  challenge, motorists  will be  put in
the awkward position of failing the retest at higher than necessary
rates, requiring yet another trip to  the repair  facility and then
to retest.

     A variety of strategies have been suggested as ways of dealing
with retest failures.   First and foremost  is educating the  repair
industry.   This can  be  done through  technician certification
programs, providing adequate training of independent technicians,
and the establishment of technician outreach programs that provide
a  rapid source of  technical  assistance  (hotlines)  as well as
routine informational programs  (e.g., newsletters, workshops) .

     Another effective feature of some  existing I/M programs, and
a  requirement  of EPA's I/M rule,  is the  performance monitoring
requirement discussed in the previous section.   The development of
onboard diagnostic  systems (OBD)  and  the improved distribution of
emission-related repair  information by  the   manufacturers,  as
required as part of the OBD regulations, should greatly enhance a
technician's  ability  to make the most effective  repairs  at the
least cost to the consumer.   The  use of RG240 equipment (Section
     13
      SAE  J2008: Recommended Organization of Vehicle Service  Information,
draft version, July  1993.


                               119

-------
1.5.3) will also enhance the technician's ability to make effective
IM240 repairs by providing him with instantaneous  feedback  in his
own  shop  on  his  repair  efforts  so  that  he can  be reasonably
confident  the vehicle  will pass IM240 on  retest.   A recent SAE
paper  described  the RG240  system.14  This paper  is provided in
Appendix 1.  RG240 equipment is becoming commercially available.

5.9  Other  Organizations and Efforts Addressing Maintenance  Issues

5.9.1  Vehicle Maintenance  Initiative  (VMI)

     One of the  steps that EPA has taken in  addressing problems in
the  repair industry  has  been  the  development  of  the  Vehicle
Maintenance Initiative (VMI).  VMI is a cooperative effort between
the  repair industry,  the education  industry,  the  testing and
certification industry, equipment suppliers,  state  I/M programs,
and  EPA to address  a  whole host  of issues  related to vehicle
repair.  Over 200  representatives  from these  industries first met
in August of 1992  and developed specific plans to  improve service
technician education.  Two of these plans are the  development of  a
new  ASE technician's  certification  test   for  emission-related
problems (discussed in Section 4.1.2) and the EPA/NATEF grant which
is used to  certify education programs (discussed in Section 4.3.2) .
The participants also agreed to form an industry steering committee
aimed  at   assuring  consumer benefits  from  improvements  in the
standards  and quality of  automotive  service.

     One outgrowth of the  VMI has been the issuance of a quarterly
VMI newsletter which details the new  initiatives  and updates the
progress on those  initiatives already begun.  To inquire about the
VMI newsletter contact:

     Casey Caccavari
     U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
     Office of Mobile Sources  (6406J)
     401 M Street
     Washington, B.C.   20460
      (202)233-9302
     FAX:  202-233-9556

5.9.2  Automotive Service Association  (ASA)

     The Automotive  Service Association is  a trade association
representing  all  segments  of   the independent automotive  repair
industry.   ASA lists  over 11,000 member  businesses and  50,000
service technicians among their active members.  ASA members also
subscribe  to  a  code of ethics.  ASA has been involved for many
      Mickelson, Jan B. and William B.  Clemmens.  IM240  Repair Verification:
An Inexpensive Dynamometer Method.  SAE Paper No. 940431.

                               120

-------
years in education,  licensing,  and  certification issues and ASA
also assists its members through management and technical education
programs.  ASA is  a  founding  member of the Coalition for Safer,
Cleaner  Vehicles  (CSCV) .   For  more information on  ASA and its
programs, contact ASA at:

     Automotive Service Association  (ASA)
     1901 Airport Freeway, Suite 100
     P.O. Box 929
     Bedford,  TX   76021-0929
     817-283-6205
     FAX:  817-685-0225

5.9.3  Coordinating Committee for Automotive Repair  (CCAR)

     In  January  1993 a broad-based coalition  of  organizations
involved in the service and repair of motor vehicles announced the
formation of the Coordinating Council for Automotive Repair  (CCAR).
The purpose of this  group is  to more effectively coordinate and
enhance, on a national  basis  the efforts of existing educational,
manufacturing, service/repair and  governmental  organizations to
identify, recruit,  educate,  equip, and  retain competent personnel
for the vehicle service/repair industry.

     For further information, please contact:

          Coordinating Council for Automotive Repair
          The Country Club Plaza
          4717 Central
          Kansas City,  MO    64112
          816-561-8388
          FAX:  816-561-8087
                               121

-------
APPENDICES

-------
          APPENDIX 1

IM240 Repair Verification: An
Inexpensive Dynamometer Method

-------
 SAE TECHNICAL
 PAPER SERIES
               940431
                             IM240 Repair Verification:
             An Inexpensive Dynamometer Method
                                  Jan B. Mlckelsen and William B. Clemmens
                                           U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
        1 Tim Engineering Society
        ' For AdvanclngHotUltr
        iLtnd See Air end Sp*cem
INTERNATIONAL
International Congress & Exposition
             Detroit, Michigan
       February 28-March 3,1994
400 CofTimonwMttriDftv«,WarT»mlal«, PA 15096-0001 U.S-A. Ttl: (412)778-4841 Fax:(412)776-5760

-------
                                                                940431
                                     IM240 Repair Verification:
                      An Inexpensive Dynamometer Method

                                         Jan B. Mickelsen and William B. Clemmens
                                                    U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
ABSTRACT

   An  inexpensive system was designed
chat  would allow  repair shops  to
verify the adequacy of repairs made
to cars  that  had previously failed
the new high-tech I/M test (IM240) .
Before and after repair  tests  on a
limited  number  of  vehicles  were
performed with  both  official IM240
and prototype  repair  grade   (RG240)
equipment  systems.    Analyses  were
performed to determine if the RG240
system   concept   is   capable   of
determining  if  the  repairs performed
resulted   in   adequate   emissions
reductions  to assure a passing IM240
retest.    This  study  focuses  on
development  of  a  prototype  R6240
system consisting of a 100 SCFM CVS,
a  dynamometer  with an eddy  current
power  absorber  and  non-adjustable
2000 pound ine/rtia flywheel,  and a
BAR 90  emissions analyzer with  an
additional nitric oxide analyzer.

IMTRODOCTIOM

In November  1992,  EPA promulgated
regulations (!}* requiring enhanced
I/M programs  in many  areas  of the
country, including all serious and
above ozone areas.   These programs
will require I/M testing and repair
to be  separate.   Accordingly/  the
ability   of    the   automobile
service/repair sector to verify that
effective  repairs  have  been made
prior to  returning  the vehicle  to
the  test  center for  retesting  is
important  to   achieve  a  smooth
running  program and to garner  public
acceptance.

  Because  the   official   IM240
transient  emissions   test   is
performed with  specialized  testing
equipment,   diagnosing   failed
vehicles  and  verifying   that
subsequent repairs  were  sufficient
to  adequately  reduce emissions  to
passing  levels may  be  considerably
easier  with  similar  specialized
equipment.  In  response to this, the
EPA conducted a preliminary study of
a relatively low cost  IM240  repair
verification equipment system.  This
repair   verification  (or   repair
grade)  equipment  system is  termed
the   R6240  in  order  to  avoid
confusion  with  the  more  thorough
official IM240 test equipment.

  The IM240 is a transient emissions
test  which measures  hydrocarbons
(HC), carbon monoxide  (CO),  carbon
dioxide   (C02)*  and  oxides  of
nitrogen   (NOx) .     The   test  was
                                       Numbers  in brackets denote
                                     listed at the end of the paper.
                           references

-------
 developed  from  the  Federal  Test
 Procedure  (FTP)  by  the EPA in order
 to   improve  the effectiveness  of
 Inspection  and  Maintenance  (I/M)
 tests  on  new  technology  vehicles
 [2].   The  driving  schedule  for the
 IM240  is  239 seconds long (240 data
 points.)   and is  derived  from  the
 first  two  "hills" of the EPA Federal
 Test  Procedure  (FTP) .    UnliJce  the
 FTP,  which  contains  a  cold  engine
 start,  the IM240 requires  that  the
 engine be  warmed  up  and  running
 before the driving schedule starts.
             The  RG240  was  developed  using the
          same   operating  procedures  and
          equipment  concepts  as  the   IM240.
          The  RG240  uses   the   same  driving
          schedule as the IM240.   It  also uses
          a  dynamometer   and  measures  mass
          emissions.   RG240 mass  emissions are
          calculated  for   each   second  and
          summed  to  get  a composite  total
          following the same procedure as the
          IM240.    Only  composite  emission
          results are discussed in  this  paper.
          Comparisons   of   RG240  and  IM240
          second by  second emissions will  be
          addressed in  a  future paper.
                                Figure 1
      [COMPUTER)
EXHAUST
SAMPLER
  AND
ANALYZER
             MERT1ARYWHEELS
               IM240 EQUIPMENT AND CONFIGURATION
  There   are    many   •quipment
similarities between  the two  tests
in  that  the  IM24Q is  designed  to
produce similar  power  loading as the
FTP (Figure 1) .    Mass  emissions are
also  measured  during   the  IM240,
instead of emissions  concentrations
used  by  current  idle  and  steady
state  I/M tests.   The  IM240  mass
emission measurement uses a constant
volume  sampling  systea  (CVS)  like
the FTP,  and a new generation of gas
analyzers  which   allow  real  time
exhaust   analysis  resulting   in
emission  values  for each second  of
the IM240.
            Costs  for  the RG240 were  reduced
          by using a simpler dynamometer  which
          is adjustable for vehicle load, but
          has  a  fixed  2000  pound   inertia
          weight.   HC,  CO,  and C02 emissions
          analyses are  performed  with a BAR
          90*  emissions  gas analyser.   For
          this  study,  two  nitric  oxide  (NO)
          sensors  which operated  ia  parallel
          were  used.    The constant volume
          * BAR refers to the California Bureau of
          Automotive Repair.  BAR 90 rofors  to  •
          claas of  Z/N analysora  currently ia-us« in
          •any teat-aad-ropair I/M proqn

-------
 sampler was  fabricated  at  the EPA's
 National  Vehicle  and Fuels Emission
 Lab and uses a critical flow venturi
 rated at  approximately  100 standard
 cubic feet per minute (SCFM).

 RG240  TEST  SQDIPMENT

   One  of  the  main  concerns  during
 the  development of the RG240 concept
 was  to  keep the "retail" cost  of the
 developed system as low as possible.
 Accordingly, the  RG240  is  based  on
 equipment  which  already  exists  in
 repair  shops,  or is substantially
 less    expensive     than    the
 corresponding  IM240 equipment.

   XM240 dynamometer  specifications
 require coupled  twin rolls and  an
 adjustable power  absorber  which  can
 be  adjusted  in  0.1  horsepower  (Hp)
 increments  [2].   The simulation  of
 vehicle inertia may  be  achieved  by
 using  flywheels  which range  from
 2000  pounds  to   S500  pounds   in
 increments  no   larger  than   500
pounds.     In   addition,   IM240
dynamometers   using  mechanical
 inertia  are  required  to  have  an
 independent method  to  verify  that
the  correct  flywheels are  actually
rotating during the test.

   The RG240 dynamometer  used in  this
program also has twin rolls but,  for
this  initial  study,   they  were  not
coupled.    Future  EPA  evaluation
programs will probably  use coupled
rolls.  The  RG240 dynamometer  used
only  one  permanently engaged  2000
pound  flywheel.    Ail eddy current
power  absorber  was  uaed  and   was
 adjustable  in 0.1  Hp  incrementa.

   The  use  of a  fixed  2000 pound
 inertia  weight  on  the  RG240  will
 underload  heavier vehicles on  the
 acceleration portions of the driving
 schedule in comparison to  the  IM240.
 This   should  cause  lower  RG240
 emissions,  but because  the  RG240
 determines a more  qualitative  change
 from the  before  and after  repair
 tests,   the   effect  should   be
 negligible.   Future tests of  the
 RG240  concept   may  include   the
'^'addition of  simulated  inertia
 increasing   the    load  of"  - •-»
 dynamometer's power  absorber  dur'~3
 the  acceleration  portions  of  t;-.I
 driving schedule.

   In order to measure mass  emissions
 from vehicles during testing,  it is
 necessary to know both  the  volume of
 exhaust   air  flow  and  emission
 concentration.   Both the  IH240  and
 RG240  equipment  systems use  a  CVS
 which   performs   two   functions,
 dilution  of  the  exhaust  with air,
 and  a  surrogate  measurement  of  the
 vehicle  exhaust   flow   through
 measurement  of  an  air   diluted
 exhaust  mixture.    Both  emissions
 tests also use an exhaust collection
 tube   which  is  much  larger  in
 diameter  than a  vehicle's exhaust
 pipe.     The  collection  tube  is
 positioned   around  the   vehicle's
 exhaust  pipe and  draws additional
 air  used for dilution  around  the
 exhaust pipe.  The vehicle's  exhaust
 is    diluted   so    that   water
 condensation and further reaction of
 emissions will  not  occur.   The air
 flow in  the  CVS  used for this study
 was  regulated   by   the use  of  a
 critical  flow venturi  (CFV).   The
 CFV  limits  airflow by  creating a
 sonic  shock  wave in the  throat of
 the  venturi.   Once  a  CFV has been
 calibrated,  the air  flow volume can
 be determined by measuring  the inlet
 temperature   and pressure at  the
 venturi.   The diluted  exhaust  flow
 is also  sampled at  the inlet  to  the
 venturi  and  transported to   the
 emissions analyzer benches.

   The recommended  flowrate   for  an
 IM240  CVS is approximately 700  SCFM
 (without  heated  sample lines)  while
 the RG240 CVS flow was approximately
 100  SCFM.  The lower  flow rate  was
 selected  for the RG240  in order  to
 reduce equipment costs  by using  a
 lower  power CVS blower motor,  and to
 keep  the emission concentrations  in
 the  range of a BAR 90  type emissions
 analyzer.   The  IM240 CVS uses a "L"
 type  probe  to sample emissions  from
 the   center  of  the  flow  stream.
 Because  the  RG240   CVS   design

-------
produces less cross-stream  mixing of
che diluted exhaust,  the  RG240 probe
was redesigned to  sample across the
entire  flow  stream.   The redesigned
probe   substantially    improved
calibration of prototype units,  and
reduced   variability    due   to
incomplete cross mixing.    All tests
reported used the redesigned probe.

   IM240   emission   analysis  was
performed with three  different types
of   gas   analyzers.      A   flame
ionization detector  (FID)  was used
for HC,  while CO  and  C02  analysis
were    each   performed   with   a
nondispersive   infrared    (NDIR)
analyzer.  Oxides  of  nitrogen (NOx,
which includes both NO and N02)  was
measured using  a  chemiluminescense
type  analyzer.    In   contrast,  the
RG240 equipment  in  this study used a
BAR 90  type  NDIR  gas analyzer  for
HC, CO,  and  C02 •  Also,  for these
development  tests, NO measurements
were  performed  with  two  different
types  of sensors, an  electrochemical
and     a      repair      grade
chemiluminescense.    Both  of these
sensors measure  only NO.   The  gas
stream was  divided and delivered to
the sensors,   which were  mounted in
parallel,  so  that each sensor would
receive  an   unaltered  emissions
sample.   Two  different  types of NO
sensors were  used  in  this program
because  no   commercial   RG240  NO
sensors   were   available.     The
relatively  new  technology  showed
promise   for   this   type   of
application.     Production  R6240
systems  will  have   only   one  NO
sensor.

   The  RG240  equipment   system
configuration  in  this  conceptual
evaluation used two  IBM  80386  PC
computers.  One  of  the computers was
used to control  the dynamometer, and
to  display  the   RG240   driving
schedule (which  is the  same as the
IM240  driving schedule).  The second
computer .was  used as  part of  the BAR
90  gas  analyzer   system,   which
recorded emission  concentrations as
well  as  CVS   inlet temperature  and
pressure.   These  values  were then
processed   after  the   test   to
calculate emissions on  a mass basis.
Clearly,  production  RG240  systems
will combine these functions into a
single computer.

DESCRIPTION  OF  T1STING

   This  testing program  was performed
by Automotive Testing  Laboratories,
Inc.   (ATL) under contract  to EPA at
its Mesa, Arizona facility.  A total
of 19  vehicles  were  tested  in  this
study,  however,  the  new  CVS  probe
design  was  used  only  on  the  last
nine vehicles.    These  nine vehicles
were a  subset of  vehicles  recruited
for   on-going   emission   testing
programs (a  table containing vehicle
information  is  contained  in  the
appendix at  the end of this paper) .
As  part  of  these  larger  testing
programs,   repairs   were   also
performed on  vehicles with emissions
exceeding 0.8 grams per mile  (g/mi)
for HC,  15.0 g/mi for CO,  and 2.0
g/mi  for NOx.    In some  cases,  an
RG240 and IM240 test were run after
major repairs even though  additional
repairs  were known to  be  needed to
pass the IM240.

   In   order  to  compare   emission
results  between the  IM240  and the
RG240  equipment systems,   the  goal
was that every  time a vehicle in the
RG240 test program was tested using
the IM240, it was tested in  the same
operating condition using  the RG240.
Because this  was the first  ever
attempt  at  RG240  testing,   with
typical developmental issues,  an
RG240 test was  not always performed
for each IM240  test  performed.   In
particular,   RG240 NO  data  was not
collected for  the first  few  cars
because the  NO  analyxers  were not
operational    at   that   time.
Occasional  failures  of the BAR 90
bench   caused   other   vehicle  test
sequences to have incomplete before
and after RG240 data.

OAT*  AJDUYSIS

   In  order to determine if the  RG240
equipment system could  determine

-------
 that adequate  emissions  reductions
 were achieved after repairs,  it was
 useful  to evaluate  any  correlation
 of the RG240  with the IM240.   The
 correlative plots, Figures 2,  3, and
 5,  were   plotted  using   both  the
 before  and after-repair data for HC,
 CO,  and  NOx  (NO) .   Figure  4  is  a
 comparison  of  the  two   RG240  NO
 sensors,   which   shows  excellent
 agreement  and linearity between the
 two  different NO  sensors.   Because
 of this  excellent agreement,  only
 data  from RG240 NO  sensor number  1
 will  be  used  in  this analysis,  as
 the  characteristics  will  also  apply
 to RG240  NO  sensor number  2.    No
 analysis   was  performed  for  C02
 because  it   is  not  a  regulated
 emission.

   Analysis of the RG240 versus IM240
 data  for  HC  (Figure  2)  shows  good
 correlation,   but  poor agreement  in
 absolute   magnitude  of  emissions
 between the  two equipment systems.
 One  area   of  concern  is   that the
 RG240 only measures about  a third  of
 the total  hydrocarbon  in  comparison
 to the  IM240, based on the slope  of
the  equation  for  the linear fit
 line.

   The under-report ing  of  HC by the
RG240 is  not  surprising.   Likely

              Figure 2

      RG240 HC Versus IM240 HC
      Y« 0.100 + OJ7SX T**QM  Ital?
 causes   are    the   subs-a^-a"
 differences    in   rela- • W""-:
 sensitivity in the NDIR used by -:-I
 RG240  versus  the more accurate  ^'::
 used  in  the   IM240,   which  has "I
 better  response  to  the   many
 different   hydrocarbon   compounds
 present  in  motor  vehicle  exhaust,
 Also,  the  RG240  system may  have  a
 substantially   slower  response  time
 than an  IM240   system,   and therefore
 this  could possibly  flatten  the
 emission spikes.

   A comparison   in  Figure  3  of
 results for  CO shows reasonably good
 correlation of  the  RG240  to  the
 IM240.    the   slope  of  the  line
 indicates   that  the  RG240   is
measuring about  half  of the  CO  in
 relation to  the IM240.

   The  differences between the RG240
 and  the IM240 in this case  could
also   be  due  to  the   different
 response  times  of the  RG240  and
 IM240  CO gas  analyzers.    Because
 instantaneous   transient    test
emissions   change   rapidly,   an
 analyzer with  a  slow   response time
may not measure the entire quantity
of emissions present during a period
of   rapid    emission   change.
Particularly when  time correlating
emission quantities  with  distance


               Figures

       RG240 CO Versus IM240 CO
                                                    11   II  II

                                                    IIB4I CO (I/mi)
                                II

-------
 traveled  on  the  driving   cycle.
 while both tests use NDIR analyzers,
 the  IM240  is  a  dedicated CO  unit
 (with   an  optimized   cell  length)
 while   the  RG240   analyzer   also
 measures HC  and  C02 •   Another cause
 for  lower  RG240 CD  values  may  be
 under loading  of the  vehicle  during
 acceleration 'portions  of  the  RG240
 due  to  the lower inertia  weight  in
 the RG240 dynamometer.

   As discussed before,  a comparison
 between  the  two different RG240  NO
 sensors  (Figure  4)  shows  excellent
 correlation  between  the  two  NO
 sensors.
               Figure 4

   RG240 NO Sensor 1 Versus Sensor 2
                Figures

      RG240 NO Versus IM240 NOx
       Y« 0.103+ 0.962X T*m039  Ital0
  A comparison between  RG240  NO and
IM240  NOx  (Figure  5)   shows  good
correlation between the  two.   The
linear fit line equation  shows  that
the RG240  NO sensors  are  actually
measuring slightly  more NO than  is
measured by the more accurate IM240
NOx analyzer.   This was  a surprising
result.   One  explanation  for  the
high  NO  values  recorded may  be
analyzer interference  on the  RG240
analyzer.  Both  RG240  NO analyzers
follow   the   same  trend  of  over
measuring the  quantity of  NO.

  A concern with the NOx  correlation
is that  the   inertia  weight  of  the
test  vehicles  used  in  this  test
       Y a-0.151 +1.130X I* a 0.89  ftalO
            1      2      3

              IH240  NOl (g/Rii)
program did  not  cover the' range  of
inertia weights  expected in an  I/M
program.   In fact,  almost all of  the
vehicles  tested,  by happenstance,
had the same inertia  weight  of 3000
pounds.   The  testing  of vehicles
with  different  Inertia  weights   to
fully  develop  the  relationship
between the  RG240  and the IM240  is
important because  NOx is  generated
under  higher engine  loads and  its
formation is dependent on the amount
of  inertia  weight  applied during  a
teat.   Future  test  programs will
need  to  cover  a  broader  range   of
vehicle inertia  weights before  the
agreement between  the RG240  and  the
IM240  in  Figure  5  is considered  to
be fully  valid.

   Also, bear in mind, that this  is a
preliminary  analysis of the RG240
with  only  nine   vehicles  tested.
Additional   testing  with a wider
variety  of  vehicles  will   likely
affect the  correlation  between  the
IM240 and RG240.

AVtLTXVQ  TO  R0240

   While the  RG240  on this  small data
sample  does    show   an   overall
acceptable  correlation  for  repairs
with the IM240, the  differing levels
                                     6

-------
 at  which  the  RG240  measures  the
 emissions  prevencs  directly  using
 che RG240 results  to predict whether
 a  vehicle will  pass  on the official
 IM240  test  when  it  returns  to  the
 official testing station.  To assist
 repair  shops  in. determining whether
 a   repair    was   successful,   a
 preliminary approach  was developed.
 This  involved   creating  a  target
 value  for  the  after-repair  RG240
 test  that  was  calculated  based on
 the percentage reduction needed  from
 the initial  IM240,  and an  initial
RG240  test.

   The   following  explains   the
calculations  and procedures  used in
this   preliminary   approach   to
determine whether a repaired vehicle
should be  returned for a  retest"at
the  IM240  lane.   Table  1  presents
the  IM240  and  RG240  HC  results,
while Tables 2  and  3  present  the  CO
and  NOx  (NO  for  RG240)   results,
respectively.   Referring to Table  1,
vehicle 911 fails  the  initial  IM240
with  HC emissions  of  1.02   g/mi.
Because the cutpoint is 0.8  g/mi,  at
least a 21.57%  reduction is  required
for a passing score.  The  vehicle  is
then tested  using  the RG240  where
the  HC  result  was  0.36 g/mi.   The
21.57% reduction  is applied to this
score resulting  in  a  maximum  target
score  of  0.28  g/mi  for  a   RG240
retest.    If  after   repairs   were
performed,  the  RG240  retest  result
                                 Table 1
1M24Q and RC240 HC Results
Veh
Number
314
911
911
912
912
912
913
916
917
917
918
918
919
919
919
920
920
IM240
fen
Number
4934
4833
4957
4900
4939
4966
4890
512S
5122
5273
5117
5173
5141
5197
5258
5111
5111
Initial
IM240HC
(g/mi)
0.47
1.02

OJO


1.48
0.21
0.85

0.14

3 JO


1.36

Rcq % Reduction Initial Target [-After
For Pitting RG240HC RG240
IM240 Scorn* (g/mi) Soon RG240
(Max) (g/mi)
-70.21% X 0.17
2137% X 0.36

•60.00% X 0.46


45.95% X 083
-280.95% X 0-34
5.88% X O29

-471.43% X 046

7838% X 1.44


41.18% X O69

049
. 0.28
007

-------
was  below  0.28  g/mi,  and all  other
RG240  'emission  levels   were  below
their   RG240  targets,   then   the
vehicle  would  be  sent  back for  an
IM240  retest.    In  this  case,  the
vehicle   was  successfully  repaired
and  therefore passed the retest.

   This example is  also  illustrated
graphically  in  Figure  6.     Point
number 1   is  the  initial   (before
repair)    RG240/IM240   coordinate.
Point   number  2   is   the  target
RG240/IM240   cutpoint   coordinate.
The  IM240  percentage  reduction  is
calculated  based   on  the   initial
IM240   and  the    IM240   emission
cutpoint.   This percentage  reduction
is then applied to the  initial  RG240
value  to  determine  the target  RG240
                            value.  If  the  vehicle
                            below the target  RG240
                            after repairs,  then  it
                            expected   to  be  below
                            cutpoint.
                                                 UC-.3
  had  em
  on the re::es-
  would  also be
     the  IM240
                              It  is important  to  recognize,  in
                            this preliminary approach,  that the
                            target  RG240  value  is the  maximum
                            score for  the RG240  if the  vehicle
                            is   expected  to   pass  the   IM240
                            retest.     Technicians  should  be
                            strongly encouraged  to perform the
                            required repairs so  that  the  RG240
                            retest  is   significantly  below  the
                            RG240  target  value.    This   will
                            result  in   cleaner air,  and  should
                            provide additional assurance  that a
                            retest failure would  not occur.
                                   Table 2
IM240 and RG240 CO Results
   Veh      IM240     Initial    Req % Reduction  Initial
  Number      Run      IM240CO  Fbr Passing      RG240CO
            Number    (g/mi)    IM240 Score     (g/mi)
                                         Target
                                         RG240
                                         Score
                                         (Max)
                                     [-After Repair-]

                                     RG240    IM240
                                      (g/mi)   (g/mi)
   314

   911
   911

   912
   912
   912

   913

   916

   917
   917

   91T
   918

   919
   919
   919

   920
   920
4934

4833
4957

4900
4939
4966

4890

5125

5122
5273

5117
5173

5141
5197
5258

5111
5111
23.50    36.17%   X   16.40    -    10.47

 7 SO   -92.31%   X    5.99    •    11.51


22.10    32.13%   X   11.27    »    7.65




2640    4341%   X   16JO    •    9.19

 3.80  -294.74%   X    4.05         15.98

22JO    33.92%   X    748         5.07


 3.10  -383.87%   X    2.73    -    13.19


29.20    48.63%   X   19.90    •    1O22
       -27.12%  X   11.14    »    14.16
                            Duplicate
OJO
4.08
5.93
1.10
3.60
5.40
131
 1.23
                                      1031
                                      0.47
12.53
1.00
4.50
        11.40
         0.50
11 JO
                                       8

-------
    Another  example of a vehicle which
 failed  its  first RG240  retest  and
 would  therefore  have  been  returned
 for  additional  repairs  was  vehicle
 number  919.   This vehicle  underwent
 two  repair sequences  and two  IM240
 retests  before   it  was  completely
 repaired.    An  examination  of  the
 target RG240  test values  for  HC  in
 Table 1 and for  NOx  in Table 3  shows
 that  not   all  of  the  repairs  were
 completed,  and  additional   repairs
 were needed.

   Applying the same  procedure to the
 CO  values  for vehicle 919 in Table 2
 shows that  the  procedure indicated
 that  the vehicle should be  returned
 for  additional   repairs  when the
 vehicle actually  passed the  IM240
 retest  for  CO.   However,  it  still
 failed the IM240 for HC  and NOx  on
 the retest.   For  this  vehicle, the
 catalyst had  been  removed  for the
 first  retest  after it was determined
 that  the  monolith  catalyst  was
broken  into pieces and blocking the
exhaust, which  resulted in high back
pressure  causing too much EGR.  The
 increased  EGR resulted  in a  misfire
which  caused the high  HC.    A  test
                                           Figure 6
                                   Retest Target Score Graph
0.4
0.36
4*
SIM
30.28
%T.
e
1 A ,
K
^^•H
28%



^MH
"~


MI^M
~*Pc


^^^^
"""
-r


••^n
lint T
\

28%
^•^•H
•»



                                     0.2  0.4  0.6  O.I

                                          IV240  HC (g/ml)
                                           1.02
                                            1   1.2
                           pipe had  been installed  in  order to
                           determine the emission "levels of the
                           engine-out   exhaust.      A   new
                           aftermarket   catalyst   was   then
                           installed  and  the   vehicle   was
                           retested.  This problem  can be  seen
                           by  inspecting   the  NO  results  in
                           Table  3  for run  number 5197.    A
                           large  increase  in the  NOx  levels
                           occur   when   the   testpipe   was
                                  Tables
ITU34O NO* and RC240 NO Result*
   Veh      IM240     Initial   Req % Reduction   Initial
  Number      Rut      IM240NO ForPudng      RG240NO
            Nunter    (g/mO   IM240 Score      (g/mi)
                                         Target
                                         RG240
                                         SCOT*
                                         (Max)
                                    [-After Repair-)

                                    RC240    IM240
                                    (g/mi)   (g/mi)
    916

    917
    917

    918
    918

    919
    919
    919

    920
    920
5123

5122
5273

5117
5173

5141
5197
5258

5111
5111
OJ5    -16647  X    1.22

2.13      6.10  X    2.11


121      9.50  X    2.48


1.83     -9.29  X    1.03




1.91     -4.71  X    113
   110

   1.98


   110



   1.13
   110
Duplicate
0.9
0.7
          432
          042
0.98
0.68
       3.59
       0.72
                                        1.96  1.91

-------
 installed.

   While this example  illustrates a
 situation  where  the  vehicle  would
 have  passed the  IM240  for CO,  the
 RG240  identified that  the  vehicle
 was not correctly Tepaired and  would
 not  pass  IM240 HC  or  NOx based on
 the  results  of  the  RG240.  Part of
 the lack of  specific differentiation
 in  the  calculation  approach  (i.e.,
 procedure  indicated  that  more  CO
 repairs were needed for vehicle  919
 when they were not)  is  possibly  due
 to  the  preliminary nature  of this
 calculation  approach.    However,  the
 lack  of  precise differentiation is
 not inconsistent with the  idea that
 the RG240 is a  qualitative  approach
 and   not   a  quantitative   one.
 Furthermore, an  examination of  the
 next  IM240  retest  shows that  large
 additional  decreases  in  emissions
 were   available.     Once   again
 emphasizing  the  guidance  chat  one
 should repair vehicles  to as low a
 value on the  RG240 as feasible.

   Another repair  situation  which is
 addressed   in   the   tables   is
 determining  how  much  emissions  can
 increase.   When performing  improper
 or incomplete repairs on a transient
 test,  it  is not  uncommon  for  NOx
 emissions   to   increase   and  CO
 emissions  to  decrease,   or  vice
 versa.   This  is  especially true when
 the  repair  affects  the  air/fuel
 ratio  of  the  vehicle.     Carbon
monoxide is  formed when  the  air/fuel
 ratio is  rich  while NOx  is formed
 under lean   combustion  conditions.
 Thus,  if a vehicle fails for high CO
 due to  a rich  air/fuel  ratio,  it
 will probably  also  have  very  low
 NOx.  After  repairs are  performed,
 an  increase  in  NOx could occur if
 incomplete repairs are made.

   In the case where the vehicle  had
a  passing  value  on  the  initial
 IM240,   the  percent   reduction
calculated could be  a negative  value
 indicating   that  emissions  could
 increase  to  the  higher  calculated
 target value.   As  long as all  the
 emissions  were  below  the  target
RG240  values  after  repairs,  suc-
increases   would  be  acceptable.
However,   given  the  preliminary
nature  of  this  concept,   it  bears
reiterating that mechanics  would  be
advised  to  use extreme caution  in
situations  where  the  initial  IM240
and RG240 values are  very  small  and
a very  high  percentage  increase  in
RG240 emissions is computed by this
method.    in   such   a  case,   the
mechanic would be well advised  to
limit any increases in emissions  to
the minimum increases  feasible.

   In  this  preliminary method,  the
RG240 NO target score  is  capped  at
2.1 g/mi due to the  better overall
agreement  with the  IM240  values.
The 2.1  g/mi value was  obtained  by
the using  IM240 NOx  cutpoint  (2.0
g/mi)  in the linear fit equation of
Figure 5.

COMCLUSZOVS

The purpose of  this test program was
to  determine  if the  RG240 concept
could   determine  whether  adequate
emissions   reductions   had   been
achieved following  repairs  so that a
vehicle would have a high  assurance
of  passing  an   IM240  retest.   This
was a concept demonstration program,
and  a  relatively  small amount  of
data were collected;  therefore,  the
results  and  conclusions  may change
with  additional  testing.   However,
the   overall    results   were
encouraging,   and   the    initial
expectations were  met.   Additional
testing of  the   RG240   equipment
systems  is  scheduled.    Specific
conclusions  and  observations  from
this test program are as follows.

1.   An RG240 system  was built which
demonstrated   an    acceptable
correlation with the  IM240  emissions
test for repair verification.

2.   A  preliminary  method has been
designed  and   demonstrated  which
allows  the  R6240  system to be used
to   determine  if   repairs  have
adequately  reduced  emissions from
IM240 failing vehicles.
                                     10

-------
 3.    Due to  compromises  in the RG240
 system  design,  the  RG240  cannot
 determine  the  actual  IM240  mass
 emissions of a vehicle.

 4.    Because  of  the   qualitative
 nature  of the  RG240  emission levels,
 technicians  using the  RG240  should
 be  encouraged  to repair vehicles  as
 low as  feasible  below  the  RG240
 target  score.

   Additional  studies  of the  RG240
program are  scheduled.   One  of  the
primary  focuses  of  these additional
studies  will   be   to  teat  more
vehicles  in  order  to validate  the
results  described  in  this  paper.
Emphasis  will  also  be  placed  on
evaluating   the  effect  of   RG240
enhancements   such  as   inertia
simulation using the  dynamometer's
power  absorber,  and evaluating  the
effect  of  different inertia  weight
vehicles.   Mass  emissions  for  HC,
CO,   and NOx  at  each second of  the
test will  also be compared  between
the RG240 and IM240.

ACKHOWL1DG1MIHTS

  Recognition is given to Mr.  Dennis
McClement   and   the   staff   at
Automotive  Testing  Laboratories',
Inc.  Mesa,  Arizona facility  for
their excellent work and insightful
suggestions  during  the  development
of  this  program.   A special  thanks
is  given  to  Mr.  Lennie Kocher  for
his  help  in  fabricating the  RG240
CVS  at  EPA's  National  Vehicle  and
Fuels Emissions  Laboratory.

R1HR1NCK3

1.   "Inspection/Maintenance  Program
Requirements*,  Federal  Register,  Vol
57 No.  215,  52950-53014,  November  5,
1992.

2.   Pidgeon,  W.,   and  Dobie,   N.
"ZM240  Transient  I/M  Dynamometer
Driving  Schedule and the Composite
I/M Test Procedure",,  Report  No. EPA-
AA-TSS-I/M-91-01,  January, 1991.
3.   "High-Tech  I/M  Test = -
Emissions  standards, Quail;
Requirements,
Specifications",
Guidance,  Report
93-1,  July, 1993.
  and
 Revised
No.  EPA-AA
          scedure«
          7 Contrc:
^echnica 1
-E?SD-:M-
                                   11

-------
APPEITDIX
Vehicle Description Table
Vehicle
Number.
314
911
912
913
916
917
918
919
920
Inertia
Weight
2500
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
Year
89
85
84
83
88
88
86
84
83
Mileage
69,006
77,724
127,388
72,640
83,720
69,158
8^547
126,750
166,321
Make
Honda
Buick
Oldsmobik
Oldsmobile
Chevrolet
Honda
Toyota
Buick
Nissan
Model
CRX
Century
Firenzi
Firerua
Corsica
Prelude
Celica
Skylark
Maxima
Engine
Disp.
UL
2JL
1JL
UL
2.0L
2.0L
2.0L
2.0L
2JL
Fuel
System
pn
TBl
TBl
TBl
Til
pn
PH
TBt
PFI
Trans
5spd
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
4spd
Auto
                                             12

-------
      APPENDIX 2
Sample I/M Newsletters

-------
  Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Automotive Repair
                                                      Winter 1991
 Bills Recently

 Chaptered Into Law

      Several biils thai affect you
      and BAR were chaptered into
      law in 1990. and became ef-
t'ective 1/1/91.  A summary of each
bill is listed below:
AB 2040, Chapter 1403 - BP 9882.14
   Reinstates BAR's participation in the
Ignition Interlock program for driving
offenses.
   This program requires BAR to coop-
erate  with the Office of Traffic Safety in
adopting standards for the installation of
the devices: requires BAR to designate
and register stations that install devices:
requires manufacturers to comply with
installation standards: and allows BAR
to charge manufacturers a fee to recover
BAR's costs.
AB 3242, Chapter 1207
   Adds automobile burglar alarms to
the list of allowable installations with-
out the BAR registration requirement,
and places installation and repair of
these  alarms under Bureau of Electronic
and Appliance Repair.
SB 2330, Chapter 14S3
   Requires the Air Resources Board to
consult with BAR to adopt regulations
which require owners and operators of
heavy-duty diesel vehicles to perform
regular inspections of vehicles for ex-
cessive emissions of smoke.
   For more information about these
bills,  contact Kathy Runkle at (916)
855-7128.
Special Considerations  For ARDs
Serving in Desert Storm Outlined
   inside RR
  •;';-~ •• •J^-^.r.*'	*»£. .•'^Tri"** .
   Alternative F»d Fliit. page -3 * ..
   NtwBAX Field Office* open, page 3
   Save Fuel, Check Tires, page's
       Auto repair dealers and me-
       chanics/technicians on ac-
       tive duty in the Persian Gulf
war may be able to reinstate their
registrations or iicenses without ex-
amination or penalty under certain
conditions.
  Section  114.5 of the Business and
Professions Code defines and out-
lines the procedures to be followed
during wartime, according to
Michael A. Kelley. director of the
California Department of Consumer
Affairs.
  Under the law, the conditions to
reinstate include the following:
 • registration or iicente  must be
  valid at the time he/she entered
  the armed services;
 * application for reinstatement
  must be made while the indi-
  vidual is serving in the armed ser-
  vices, or no later than  one year
  from the date of discharge from
  active service or return to inactive
  military status:
 * application is accompanied by m
  affidavit showing the date of en-
  trance into the service, current
  status or date of discharge, and
  the renewal fee for the renewal
  period in which the application is
  filed.
  The law further allows that if an
application for reinstatement is filed
more than one year after discharge
or return to inactive status, BAR
may require the technician to pass
an examination.
  However, technicians who prac-
tice their profession in California ei-
ther pan- or full-time while on ac-
tive duty military  status are required
to maintain their licenses in good
standing.
  Licensees who receive treatment
or are hospitalized in any veterans'
facility, and are prevented from
practicing their profession or voca-
tion as a result, are excluded from
the one-year period.
Bakersfield Auto Shop Business Suspended
A        Kern County automotive
        repair shop recently had its
        doors closed for 45 days in
a crackdown by the Bureau of Auto-
motive Repair (BAR).
   D & G Automotive, located at 3909
Hughes Lane in Bakersfield. was pro-
hibited from making repairs during the
45-day suspension because of viola-
tions of the Automotive Repair Act
that included charging for parts that
were not installed on vehicles on at
least three different occasions.
  The shop's owner. Douglas Mai-
lory, was placed on five years' pro-
bation providing he obeys ail laws
and regulations. During the proba-
tion all replaced pans must be
tagged and kept for inspection by
BAR.
  According to BAR officials, the
investigation was launched after
consumers said that the shop
charged them for repairs not made
and failed to provide estimates be-
fore work was performed.

-------
                                           Ki I'\IK Ki re IK 11 k
 BAR  Pledges Support  For  More
 Industry  Training Opportunities
          More training in the auto-
          motive field was the
          topic BAR Chief John P.
 Waraas addressed when the Automo-
 tive Service Council IASO con-
 vened last October in San Diego to
 celebrate its 50th anniversary.
   Since the convention focused on
 trends to prepare members for
 tomorrow's marketplace. Waraas
 pledged BAR's support to develop
 training programs leading to profes-
 sional certification and national stan-
 dards of competence.
   "Several organizations, including
 ASC. the Society of Automotive En-
 gineers, the Environmental Protec-
 tion Agency, and BAR are working
 together to develop a comprehensive
 program that would increase the
 level of technician training and pro-
 vide the expertise necessary to deal
 with today's high-tech cars," Waraas
 said.    v
   In his comments, Waraas also
 thanked ASC members for their sup-
 port of BAR, particularly at last
                           September's Clean Air Fairs, where
                           members across California spent Sat-
                           urdays providing informational emis-
                           sion tests for the public.
                             Waraas said the Smog Check pro-
                           gram is now fully implemented.
                           which was required by Senate Bill
                           1997. "BAR has established offices
                           throughout the state in those areas
                           that have not attained EPA standards
                           for clean air. and we are well on our
                           way to meeting our target of a 25
                           percent reduction in emissions by
                           1994." he added. "I appreciate the
                           opportunity to meet with many of our
                           colleagues and shop owners who
                           have helped us greatly over the past
                           year."
                             The theme of the event was "Yes-
                           terday, Today, and Tomorrow."
                           "Yesterday" began for ASC in 1940
                           when a small group of Los Angeles
                           shop owners got together after work
                           to discuss issues that were to  evolve
                           into a code of ethics for 1700 mem-
                           ber shops in California and 11,000
                           members nationwide today.
Two Firms Win BAR Public Awareness Bids
T
wo private public relations
firms recently won bids to
conduct public awareness
 'a puotshed fwfc* a ywr oy tm (
 Department of Co
 of Automotive Repair. 1024O
 Par*w*ySacrmmenlo,CA
 36B-51QO • ^5& .»**••'
 Edtor Kate UcQ&e ~
 Burmu ol Autmottv» /fcp*r
 John P. Wmua. CM*
 Douglas Laut, Dtputy CNtf
 KM* UoCUn, PUttfc mtemrnuon (Mar
programs on behalf of the Bureau of
Automotive Repair (BAR).
  Edleman Public Relations World-
wide won the statewide contract with
a $1.7 million bid. and Johnson,
Smith, Hobbs and McNally, a Sacra-
mento advertising and public rela-
tions firm, will conduct public
awareness campaigns for BAR in
several northern California counties.
The counties—Butte, Glenn, por-
tions of San Bernardino and the re-
mainder of Yolo and Solano—
implemented the state's Smog Check
program  on March 1,1991.
  Hill and Knowlton, Inc., an inter-
national public relations firm, has
been conducting public awareness
programs for BAR since 1984.
Edelman's Los Angeles office will
handle the BAR account
                                 cate feVfiom theTcunent S6 to
                                 $7 after;Jan: M2$gjpr^
                                   *TTh£fee for"me smogcertifi-
                                 catelsTtill $6^n£ biD just"~
                                 gives us theiaudforiry to raise it,"
                                 says Gary Hunter, Chief, Field
                                 Operations and Compliance Di-
                                 vision. ^SoTar, we have not de-
                                 tennined
                                   _ •*»- ^-sseaPWM-'i1"-._ Tw^B
                                   Pncea for smog certificate]
                                 are sefby'B AR regula^ns aw "-
                                 arechmg^pnlya^5raJpu6li£l  .
                                 healing.process is completed and
                                 the OfBce of Ad
                                 Law]
                                                        T\r»" .
                                                    .increase
                                 does-occur, aD Smog Check sta-
                                 tions win be notified in advance.
Ford  Plans To Fix

462,100 Vehicles

  Ford Motor Co. recently an-
nounced that it has recalled about
457,000 of its 1986-88 model
Aerostar minivans because of a po-
tential windshield wiper problem.
  The company also said it was re-
calling 5,100 of its 1988-90 F-Super
Duty motorhome chassis to install a
new brake-linkage rod to the brake
pedal.
  Ford said it was possible that the
linkage could break, causing a loss of
stopping ability. The company said
it knows of no accidents linked to the
problem.
  The company is notifying all own-
ers and will repair the problems free
of charge.

-------
 \\l\l I H IWI
                                             Rll-AIR KlHOKIKK
 Alternative  Fuel Fleet Helps Keep  California Air Clean
 w
           hile nations compete tor
           a share or the earth's oil.
           California is fighting to
 control the pollution that comes from
 it.
   Cleaner-burning fuel is one solu-
tion for improving the state's air
quality, and manufacturers are ex-
perimenting with vehicles designed
to burn alternative fuels. The ques-
tion for manufacturers is. "Which
comes first—new fuels such as metn-
anol and ethanol. or the car that con-
sumes them?"
   At the Bureau of Automotive Re-
pair (BAR), the flex-fuel car comes
first. BAR maintains a fleet of 28
such vehicles, the largest of its kind
in state government, said BAR Chief
John Waraas. who has directed the
use of alternative fuel cars  by BAR
statewide.
   "Since we're in the clean air busi-
ness, it makes sense to position our-
-elves on the leading edge of tech-
nology and set an example for
California's motorists." said Kenji
Okimoto. who monitors BAR's rlex-
fuel program.
   Daily use of the still-rare vehicles
requires special care, as well as a
specially formulated engine oil to
keep their engines running smoothly.
Due to the corrosive nature of metha-
nol. special spark plugs and fuel fil-
ters are also required. Do-it-yourself-
ers are out of luck at oil-change time.
since these cars require special dealer
maintenance. When inspecting ve-
hicles manufactured to operate on
methanol or a mixture of methanol
and gasoline  (flexible-fueled ve-
hicles), technicians should refer to
the underhood label to determine
which emission controls are required.
   In most respects, however, they
operate the same as conventional cars
do. Smog check inspections for
New BAR Field Offices Open For Business
        As more California counties
        join the Smog Check pro-
        gram, more BAR offices
have been added from Redding to
Rancno Mirage.
  Offices opened recently in Merced,
Auburn, Rancho Mirage, Canoga
Park. San Luis Obispo, Modesto,
Santa Barbara, Monterey, El Toro.
Chico,  Fairfield, and Apple  Valley.
  In addition to mediating consumer
complaints, BAR personnel offer a
variety of services to auto inspection
and repair dealers.
  Since most field office representa-
tives worked in the automotive indus-
try before joining BAR, they are able
to provide technical help, as well as
interpret laws and regulations.
  Automobile repair shops  may pur-
chase lamp, brake, and smog certifi-
cates at the local offices, as  well as
pay licensing, registration, and train-
ing fees. Inspection and repair manu-
als and other BAR publications are
                                   also available, along with order
                                   blanks for requesting large quantities
                                   of publications from BAR's mail-
                                   room at headquarters.
                                     All BAR offices provide services
                                   such as inspections for new lamp,
                                   brake or smog shops both prior to li-
                                   censing and afterward. Training for
                                   Smog Check inspectors and testing
                                   for Smog Check mechanics and lamp
                                   and brake installers/adjusters is also
                                   performed in field office facilities.
                                     BAR staff periodically hold work-
                                   shops for auto industry groups to dis-
                                   cuss a variety of topics, including ex-
                                   isting regulations and new develop-
                                   ments in the Smog Check program.
                                   Public information presentations for
                                   local organizations may also be ar-
                                   ranged by contacting local field of-
                                   fices.
                                     For more information about BAR
                                   field offices, call toll-free 1-800-952-
                                   5210.
methanol-powered vehicles. ;or ex-
ample, are the same as for sasoime-
powered vehicles.
   Potential flex-fuel vehicle owners
fear that fuel will be scarce. Potential
fuel vendors fear that customers will
be scarce. Only 18 service stations in
California currently sell methanol.
but concern for the environment
should spur the eventual growth of
such stations.
   To encourage such growth the
California Energy Commission pro-
motes and coordinates the flex-fuel
program statewide. A new handbook
on alternative fuels will soon be
available from the commission, and
workshops will be held throughout
California to familiarize fleet manag-
ers with the subject.
   For more information about Cali-
fornia Energy Commission's Alter-
native Fuels Program, contact the
Transportation Technology Fuels Of-
fice at (916) 324-3527.
                                    Required Regardless of
                                    Smog Check Results  ~ "
                                     '
                                       The $300 Department of Mo-
                                     tor VehkkaJJ)jiy) Smog Im-
                                     pact Fee is required for vehicles
                                       •  ^l"» • *»--~^"V- "-• t T) '.'•• ^_ «
                                     upon initial registration in Cali-
                                     fornia regardless of whether the
                                     vehicle. ha* received a smog cer-
                                       Vehicles affected are 1975 oc
                                     newer gas, LPG, LNG, or metha-
                                     ne! vehicles with an unladen    ,
                                     weight of 6000 pounds~or less,.  '
                                     amf 1980 cr newer diesel-pow--^
                                     ered vehicles with an. unladen
                                     weight of 6000 pounds, or Jess. .".'^
                                       TfiftfeefwuTbe collected if the
                                     yehidewasf registered outside  _
                                                        iminedi-
                                       »j II*UA to application for reg-
                                     utratioa, and it does not have a
                                                    t control label
                                     imtir«*"«g the vehicle is "Cali-
                                            rtified."

-------
BAR Training Course

Advisory Board Meets

   Election of officers, the progress
• >f impiememtation of Senate Bill
 !uc^7 and continuing development of
mechanic exams were amonu the
topics ot discussion at a Training
Course Advisory Board meeting held
Feb. 21. 1991. in Palm Desert. "
   The board holds four public meet-
ings a year to keep up with rapidly
advancing automotive technology.
Automotive instructors are among
the regular attendees who provide ad-
\ ice on changes needed in automo-
tive training and testing programs.
   Board members include Rich
Branchini.  Secretary. Bud
Hennessy.V. Chair. Margaret Vine-
yard. Chair. Roy Okimoto and John
Rogolino. All have automotive field
backgrounds and volunteer their time
to advise BAR on its mechanic train-
ing procedures and policies.
 Save Fuel, Clean the Air by Checking the Tires
   It's hard to believe that something
as simple a.s tire inflation can affect a
'•chicle's performance, but it can.
Surveys show that the tires on more
ihan half of the curs on the road are
not inflated to manufacturers'  speci-
fications. Some adverse effects from
improper inflation include poor han-
dling, decreased fuel economy, in-
creased tire wear and a significant in-
crease m harmful emissions durmg
highway travel.
   Since tune-up or emissions  work
is not really complete without  tire
pressure service, take the time to
check.  Refer to the label on the ve-
hicle door jamb, the owner's manual.
or the guidebook! s» available to tire
dealers.
   Remind your customers of the ef-
fects and importance of proper tire
inflation. Not only will your cus-
tomer appreciate knowing that his or
her tires are properly inflated, but
;-ou'll know one more vehicle is
     and runnme cleaner.
        Calendar
  March 15-17—ASCNonh. Conference.
  "Sin Jose Convention Center  .-^*>
  Vphl 2Q»—Esnh Diyi Goctschalks. _  ,_
 Ajnl 27:»rTune of Your Life ;^t
  •;JBxg«itioo,'l5«, An^etes Coavemiob
      L-13-^Shua Duma Fair^v, ,v
  -i.Kedding  . '""iV^nTiiifcS/'i^feAi^g^
 Jane 28-29-^ ASCSoinn" Conference,

          LdKstioo tfbe snoomced.
          ^^•
  This aewletter is SuB&lied by the
  _ K-sSft«5S«^-1V*.PJ**=-.-
  CALIFORNIA DEPAHTWENT or
  Bureau of Automotive Repair
  10240 Systems Parkway
  Sacramento, CA  9S827
                                          007390
                                          USEHA  OFF  OF MOBILE
                                          256b  PLYMOUTH  ROAD
                                          ANN  ARBUR*  M
                                   SRC  EMSS C
91 11747

-------
     The   »s
              WISCONS/N
	'VEHICLE
             INSPECTION
             PROGRAM
ANALYZER
 VOLUME I
 PtBUSHED QCARTERLY BV THE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
  MECHANICS TEST  PROCEDURE TO IMPROVE DIAGNOSIS
   One of the most difficult recurring maintenance
 problems experienced by mechanics who are testing
 and repairing a vehicle that has  failed the Vehicle
 Emissions Inspection Program, is trying to simulate
 the test procedure used in the test lanes.

  The following Simulated Test Procedure has been
 devised through lengthy study by the Environmental
 Protection Agency and the Wisconsin Vehicle Emis-
 sions Inspection Program Staff.

       SIMULATED TEST PROCEDURE
 1) Vehicle to be tested should be at normal operating
   temperature with ail accessories off.
 2) Analyzers should be  wanned up, in  stabilized
   operating condition, and adjusted properly.
                             3) With engine idling and transmission in neutral, in-
                               sert probe into the tailpipe. Increase engine speed
                               to 2,500 RPM for 30 seconds.
                             4) Reduce engine speed to free idle and record exhaust
                               concentrations 20 seconds later.
                              Although this test procedure is not an exact duplica-
                             tion of the emissions test, by using this test procedure,
                             and adhering closely to the times indicated in steps #3
                             and 04, you will be able to simulate the test procedure
                             much more accurately. Most repair  facilities we have
                             seen using this procedure with properly calibrated an-
                             alyzers were able to repeatedly record test results very
                             close to the results from the testing on the test station
                             analyzer.
             HOW TO CURE A CARBURETOR PROBLEM
  One of the most common reasons why a vehicle
fails the state's new emissions test can be traced to the
carburetor, where an improper mix of air and fuel can
boost the amount of carbon monoxide or hydrocar-
bons emitted from the tailpipe. This condition can
often be corrected through an adjustment of the air/
fuel mixture while the engine is at curb idle speed.

  To help insure that  your customer's vehicle will
more easily meet the state's emissions standards, per-
form at peak efficiency and yield optimum  fuel
economy, you should follow one  of two procedures,
depending on the initial vehicle emissions reading:

  If the air/fuel mixture is too rich, causing a high
carbon monoxide reading, there is too much fuel and
not enough air present in the carburetor.
  Step 1 - With analyzer connected, take CO  read-
ings and loosen air cleaner lid. If CO reading drops
•nore than one percent, replace air filter and recheck
 ladings.
  Step 2 - Take an RPM reading. If engine RPM is
below manufacturer's specifications, adjust the curb
                             idle speed screw to bring the RPM to manufacturer's
                             specs.  This will open the throttle valve and allow
                             more air to flow into the intake manifold.
                               Step 3 — Take another carbon monoxide reading.
                             with the RPM at manufacturer's specs. If this reading
                             is still high, adjust the external  air/fuel mixture
                             screw,  making sure you maintain proper RPM read-
                             ings. If the vehicle has a sealed carburetor and is not
                             covered under warranty, you  should consult an ap-
                             propriate service manual for instructions.
                               If the  air/fuel mixture is too lean, causing a high
                             hydrocarbon reading, there is too much air and not
                             enough fuel present in the carburetor.
                               Step 1  - Take an RPM reading. If engine is above
                             manufacturer's  specifications, the curb idle  speed
                             screw should be adjusted to dost the throttle valve,
                             reducing air flow into the intake manifold.
                               Step 2 - Take another carbon monoxide reading.
                             If this reading is still not at manufacturer's specs, the
                             external  air/fuel mixture screw should be  adjusted
                             while maintaining a proper RPM reading. If the vehi-
                             cle has a sealed carburetor, not covered by warranty.
                             consult an appropriate service manual for instructions.

-------
          TRACKING VEHICLE
            •'LOSS OF POWER"

  Excessive  readings of either carbon monoxide or
nydrocarbons during an emissions cest can be a clear
indication that the vehicle being tested is not perform-
ing at optimum levels.

  For example, one common complaint among motor-
ists is "loss  of power"  when driving, which causes
sluggish vehicle performance or stalling.  This condi-
tion can result from the  lack of adequate fuel flow to
the carbruetor during periods of full throttle opera-
tion.

  At full  throttle, additional fuel is supplied to the
engine by  a carburetor power circuit, (see illustration
A), which acts to increase the opening in the  main
fuel outlet from the fuel bowl. The circuit opens a
valve in a  separate power outlet, discharging gasoline
into the main fuel system.

  This valve action is controlled in one of two ways,
depending on the vehicle. Either the intake manifold
vacuum will operate the valve or the valve can be
operated mechanically through the accelerator linkage.

  At idle  speed, the intake manifold vacuum is high
but will decrease as the load on the engine increases.
The vacuum is then used to overcome the force of a
spring  to  hold the  power valve  closed. When the
vacuum decreases to a  set value, the spring forces
open the valve, (see illustration B, below), and allows
more gasoline to flow into the carburetor.
  In the case of mecharucaily operated power cir-
cuits, gasoline flows into the carbureior by means of a
stepped metering rod, which is raised in a jet of fixea
size whenever the accelerator pedal is depressed. AS
the metering rod is raised  up, the cross-section of -.he
rod becomes  smaller within the fixed  jet  and more
gasoline will be allowed into the carburetor.


  You can use your Emissions Analyzer to test a vehi-
cle's power circuit, with no load, by following six easy
steps:

1) Stan the engine of the vehicle and allow the engine
to reach normal operating temperature as determined
by manufacturer's specifications; adjust mixture and
curb idle speed to specifications.

2) Make sure your emissions analyzer is fully warmed
up, and then zero and span check in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.

3) Place the exhaust test probe into the vehicle's tail-
pipe and clamp the RPM  pick-up on the appropriate
spark plug wire.

4) Note the carbon monoxide (CO) reading on the
front panel of the analyzer while the engine is at curb
idle speed.

5) Accelerate the engine gradually to 2000 rpm and
allow the CO reading to stabilize. As rpm increases,
the CO reading should increase dramatically. When
the rpm stabilizes, the  CO  reading should be about
one-half of what it read at curb idle and almost  zero,
if the car has a catalytic convener. If the readings stay
higher  than at idle, the power circuit is in operation
all the time, or the carburetor float height may be too
high.

6) Make sure that the parking brake is on and hold-
ing. Place the vehicle in gear with foot brake on. Ac-
celerate engine with car in gear. CO will go up, then
will drop slightly and should stay higher than at idle
while under a load, and at low manifold vacuum. If
this doesn't happen, the power circuit is not working
properly or the carburetor  float height may be too
low.

-------
 EMISSION WARRANTY COVERAGE
        FOR YOUR CUSTOMERS?

   While most repair technicians know that such basic
 primary emission control pans as catalytic converters
 and air pumps are warranted by their vehicle manu-
 facturer for the useful life of the vehicle, many are
 not aware that there are two separate emission war-
 ranties. Both the  Emissions  Defect  Warranty and
 Emissions Performance Warranty were created by the
 Federal Clean Air Act and apply uniformly to all
 vehicle manufacturers, whether domestic or foreign.
 The warranties begin when the vehicle is first put into
 service, either as a demonstrator or at the time of
 retail sale, and are transferable to successive owners
 until the age or mileage limits  are passed.
  To be eligible for coverage under either warranty,
owners are required to maintain their vehicles accord-
ing to the manufacturer's  maintenance schedules.
These maintenance requirements can be performed
by  vehicle  owners,  private  repair  facilities,  or
manufacturers'  representatives.  In  most  cases,
however, vehicles must be presented to a manufac*
turn's  representative to have an emission warranty
claim honored. This is to prevent the manufacturers
from being held responsible for owner malmainte-
nance,  misdiagnoses, or emission  control system
tampering.
  The  Emissions  Defect  Warranty applies  nation-
wide for vehicles less than 5 yean old with less than
50,000 miles. When an original engine pan fails due
to a defect in materials or workmanship, and the part
failure causes the vehicle to exceed federal standards,
the manufacturer must repair or replace the defective
part free of charge, including labor and any miscella-
neous items that are necessary to complete the repair.
  The Emissions Performance Warranty applies only
to 1981  or newer vehicles (with GVW less than 8,500
Ibs.)  that fail  a federally approved  emission test
within geographic areas where emission inspection is
required. It, too, is a 5 year or 50,000 mile warranty
(whichever occurs  first) but it has significantly dif-
ferent coverage dependent on  the vehicle's age and
mileage. During the first 2 yean or 24,000 miles the
manufacturer must make all repairs, replacements, or
adjustments necessary to enable the vehicle to meet its
required emission standards at no  cost to the vehicle
owner. After 2 years or 24,000 rmies and up to 5 years
or 50.000 miles, the manufacturer is responsible only
for the repair, replacement,  or adjustment of com-
ponents which were installed in or on a vehicle for the
sole  or primary purpose of reducing vehicle emis-
sions, and which  were  not in  general use prior to
model year 1968.  All costs associated with a valid
Emission Performance Warranty claim are covered
by the vehicle manufacturer.

  Due to constantly changing technology and varia-
tions in manufacturers terminology, it is difficult to
list all covered primary emission control parts. Most
parts that contribute to the closed loop operation of
today's high tech  vehicles are classified as primary
pans. For clarification on these items or other emis-
sion  warranty questions, call 778-3640 (Milwaukee)
or toll free 1-800-242-7510 (outside Milwaukee).
          EMISSION CONTROL
    MAINTENANCE & ANALYZER
       OPERATIONS TRAINING
  The area technical colleges are gearing up for the
winter/spring semester with very fine vehicle emissions
tune up and repair classes available to all vehicle ser-
vice and repair mechanics.

  The  mechanics update course for the Wisconsin
Vehicle Emissions Inspection Program provides  in-
sight into the requirements and goals of the Emissions
Inspection Program, along with some excellent train-
ing with hands-on experience at calibrating, adjust-
ing, and .minor service of a variety of emissions
analyzen.

  The  instructors are very knowledgeable and pro-
vide a good contact when dealing with that difficult
problem in a vehicle that seems unresolvable. They
are looking forward to your attending this class, are
providing their name, phone number, and class status
as listed below.

Gateway Technical Institute
Instructon - Phil Atlas  and Paul Sorenson
  A class will be offered February  18. 20, 25, 27.
Each session will be four houn in length,  16 hours
total class time.
  A second class is tentatively  planned  for April 8,
10, 15, 17. The class will be offered if sufficient in-
terest is shown.
                             Continued on  Sac* Page

-------
  The  instructors  are  asking each  interested  in-
dividual to send a short letter co:

  Gateway Technical Institute
  3520 - 30th Avenue
  Kenosha, Wl 53140
  aim; Phil Atlas

  In the letter please state whether you would prefer
to attend  the Racine, Kenosha, or Elkorn campus,
and whether you want a day or night class.
Milwaukee Arcs Technical College
Instructor - Walter Metzelfeld
Phone * - (414) 278-6789
  Mr. Metzelfeld requires a minimum of 12 students
in each class, and will start up a new class each time
sufficient interest is shown. All you r.esd -v0 cio is give.
him a call and sign up!

Moraine Park Technical Institute • West Bend
Instructor - Glen Demoske
Phone * - (414) 929-2117 (Metro Line)
  Here again the classes  will begin just as soon as
enough individuals sign up to take the course. The
only requirement is to give Glen a call and let him
know you're interested.

Waukesha County Technical Institute
Instructor - John Jewel
Phone * - (414) 691-5439
  Mr.  Jewel  has just  taken over as the program
manager of the Automotive and Engine Department
and  is  anxiously anticipating  the  startup  of new
classes. Just give him a  call and sign up today!
                            FOR MORE INFORMATION
                             Call 778-3640 (Milwaukee Metropolitan Area)
                                     Or 1*800*242-7510 (toll free)
                                 Telephone Hours: 8:00 i.m.-4:30 p.m.
                                           Monday-Friday
           0«oirtm«m of Transportation
           Division ot Motor v*niclM
           MOTOR VEHICLE EMISSION
           INSPECTION SECTION
           1150 N. Alois
           Milwauk**, Wl 50208
                                   SULK RATE
                                  U.S. POSTAGE
                                     PAID
                                  MilwauKM, Wl
                                  Permit No. i?sa
Address Correction Requeued
Return Postage Guaranteed

-------
       Implement Effective I&M

  With This  Program Assistance

          Advisory from  CSCV

As you probably know, EPA's final rule on vehicle I&M
(Inspection  & Maintenance) programs calls for each
involved state to:

"... regularly inform repair facilities of changes in the inspection
program, training course schedules, common problems being found
with particular engine families, diagnostic tips and the like."
                     — Section 51.369(1) EPA Final Rule on I&M

To achieve this kind of information delivery, and to establish the
required local dialog between those involved in the I (Inspection)
and those involved in the M (Maintenance) components of the
I&M program, CSCV will publish an 8-page quarterly newslet-
ter designed to deliver exactly the kind of information described
in Section 51.369(1) of the EPA's final rule. A sample of a typi-
cal issue, and its content, is contained in this Program Assistance
Advisory Kit. We invite you to examine it and its ogportunities,
since we believe this quarterly update will be instrumental in
assisting your state's I&M program to comply with Section
51.369(1) of EPA's final rule.
CSCV: The COALITION for SAFER, CLEANER VEHICLES is a national non-profit organization commit-
ted to assisting states in the adoption of effective emissions & safety inspection programs. The Coalition
also provides public education on the benefits of vehicle inspection. Because of our broad membership,
CSCV is uniquely positioned to serve as the vital communication link between the inspection program,
industry hotline information providers, training providers, and the automotive repair industry

-------
  CSCV can make your state's fulfillment of EPA's
Final Rule, Section 51.369(1) easy to accomplish by
                 means of the
     CSCV I&M QUARTERLY UPDATE
                   newsletter.

 Based on discussions with EPA, this dialog for those
 involved in providing hi-tech I&M services, plus your
 own state-specific information, will meet the require-
  ment in Section 51.369(1) of the final I&M rule. In
addition to helping your state meet rule requirements,
and improve the M (Maintenance) component of your
I&M program, this newsletter will provide the bonus of
 important national diagnostic repair information and
          solutions to technical problems.

      We would like to hear from you that the
     CSCV I&M QUARTERLY UPDATE
 newsletter will be part of your state's Enhanced or
              Basic I&M Program.
             For complete details, please write to, or call:
                CSCV, 321 D Street NE
                Washington,  DC  20002

Phone: 202 543 4499           Fax: 202544 7865

-------
As you will see, when you review this sample copy of CSCV's
I&M QUARTERLY UPDATE, we will provide approved I&M
technicians and approved I&M service shops with timely and
important information on available training courses, frequent
appearing and unusual repair problems, as well as the latest diag-
nostic service tips and information compiled from all the major
national diagnostic hotlines.

Additionally, the CSCV I&M QUARTERLY UPDATE will serve
as a vehicle for providing your own vital state-specific information
on local training course schedules, changes in the inspection pro-
gram and related topics to the repair industry, state air quality
administrators, educators/trainers, inspection providers and all
others who need to know.

This information will be essential in keeping all parties involved
in the inspection and repair process for both Basic and Enhanced
I&M programs, fully up-to-date.

The goal of the CSCV I&M QUARTERLY UPDATE will be to
make I&M technician diagnosis and service performance as pain-
less and troublefree as possible for vehicle owners everywhere.

This will not be a general consumer information newsletter ... it
is designed for, and intended to be read by, only those involved in
providing hi-tech I&M services for your state's motoring public.

-------
VVhat approved I&M diagnostic /service technicians need, to be able to pro-
vide your state's motoring public with troublerree I&M services and com-
plete'satisfaction, is DRIVEABILITY DIAGNOSTIC DATA. We will provide
this by publishing in every issue, a Hi-Tech Hotline Help section, from
which real solutions  will be provided to solve real I&M service problems.
We will not re-publish or re-print car factory technical service bulletins,
since these are now broadly available to most shops and technicians
throughout the industry from a wide variety of sources. Our solutions will
be unique and custom-generated from the hotline diagnosticians who
respond to I&M/emissions/driveability problem service calls, many hun-
dreds of times a dav, every week and month of the vear.
                 *     *                      «
We will also keep  the I&M service industry updated on training sessions
available to them . . . and, as states provide the information to us, we will
also cover new program details  which may affect service shops and tech-
nicians who are expected to provide your state's motoring public with the
right I&M diagnosis  and service fix the first time.
If you believe your state can use the CSCV I&M QUARTERLY UPDATE
newsletter as an effective part of its I&M Program implementation, we'd
like to be your Section 51.369(1) information delivery system. CSCV can
either:
1]  Produce, print and mail to all involved and approved parties engaged
in your state's I&M program, to  any name & address list provided by you
... or ...
2]  You may use the CSCV I&M QUARTERLY UPDATE newsletter as
a delivery vehicle for your own  specific state-oriented information. To do
this we can:
    (a) Provide you  with bulk quantities of the printed newsletter, to which
you may add your own supplemental information, for your own mail out
... or ...
    (b) You may provide us with your own information: (i) either pre-
printed, or (ii) as camera-ready material, or (iii) as raw copy which we
would typeset and print, and then insert your information into copies to
be sent to your state's mailing list.

-------
                                              Qi     --     --_
                    A oenodic information service 'or all those invoivoa ;n achieving c'eaner  a - "—cue"
                             & Maintenance of automotive exnaust & evaocranve r^'sstor conrc svsre^
           Rule  Review;  examining  the
                                           regulatory  impact
BY NO LATER than January 1, 1995. a majority of
states will have to have taken serious steps toward
cleaning up their air quality from excessively-polluting
automobiles.  Some 26 metro areas of the nation in
10 states which now nave no l&M programs, must
implement basic l&M (exhaust emission Inspection A
Maintenance) programs by Jan. 1. 1994. And. by
Jan. 1, 1995. 83 other areas of the nation m 20 states
plus DC, which have either basic or no  l&M pro-
grams, but which still fail to meet the national ambient
air quality standard—we call these non-attainment
areas—must have in operation a more precise
Enhanced l&M program designed around the brand-
new and more comprehensive IM-24Q  inspection
procedure.
 It goes without saying that the new Enhanced !&M
inspection procedure will be tighter and much more
detailed than the earlier BAR 84 and BAR 90 stan-   •
dards used in almost all !&M programs  now in place
across the nation.
 Despite better, cleaner-performing OE automotive
exhaust emission systems on cars of the last five
model years, continued and excessive levels of
exhaust pollution from older cars are what is causing
this new focus on tougher emission system diagnosis
and adjustments. The goal  is to identify thru inspec-
tion the gross polluters, have them brought back into
compliance thru maintenance and repair, and then be
re-tested to prove their clean-running performance.
 With an eye on reducing vehicle-owner inconve-
nience. EPA will call for a maximum 4-minute test-
cycle emission inspection.  This has been named the
IM-240 test since the equipment which will perform it
has been designed to execute the emission check in
no more than  240 seconds.
 These new developments in the continuing battle to
achieve cleaner air for all of us to breathe, will have'
major impacts on many shops, as well as on many
thousands of professional automotive service techni-
cians. States which must implement Enhanced l&M
programs by 1/95, will call for IM-240 tests to be per-
formed in test-only (no-repair) facilities. These test-
only centers will feature loaded-mode (dynamometer)
diagnosis. The results of such a test will be printed
out and show in detail where in the 240-second time
cycle a vehicle emits excessive levels of HC (hydro-
carbons), CO (carbon monoxide) and NOx (oxides of
nitrogen).
 In addition, an evaporative purg© check of each
vehicle's fuel-vapor charcoal trao canister will be per-
formed, a step wnich is not now cart of any existing
l&M check.
 Repairs will not de available at test-only facilities. It
will be UD to the vehicle owner to  choose the repair
facility where emission reoairs will be made. And. of
course, a re-test cf every vehicle  wnich fails an initial
                            continued on page 2
  In fliis Issue ...
  This is a samp!® issu® of what CSCV pSani will be a
  regular 4-times-a-y®ar newsletter for ail those involved
  in achieving cleaner air through i&M of automotive
 . exhaust & evaporative emission control systems.

  Hew  l&M programs            2
  Basic l&M  and Enhanced l&M are coming to many markets in 38
  states by no later that Jan. 1.1995.

           you call a hotline!     3
  Still baste, but still very fmportent-e visual check ean lead
  the technician ta the seat of a problem.      -Photo ASE


  Hi-tech                            5
  A digest of calls made to troueleehooting diagnostic ser-
  vices. Covering: Audi; Chrysler; F erd/Une©ln-y®reury; GM;
  Hends; Mazda; Nissan; Teyeta.

-------
STATES ANNOUNCING
ADOPTION OF CSCV

TRAINING GUIDELINES
 In-service technician training is
expected to be a critical contributor
to the success of I&M implementa-
tion. -|f technicians are not educat-
ed to perform oroper repairs."
Gene D'Anarea. Chairman CSCV
ETAB ; Education Training Advisory
Booard). told us recently, "the M
side of I&M will not be able to
reduce automotive-caused emis-
sions as the EPA expects."
 In  an effort to ensure that I&M
programs have the support and
resources needed to succeed
CSCV has formed:
• ETAB to develop training support
guidelines for I&M programs: and
• NERC (Natl. Education Resource
Center to provide information on
integrated training programs, mate-
rials & support services to aid
states in implementing I&M pro-
grams.
 The good news is that a number
of states now appear to be moving
to embrace the CSCV
Recommended Guidelines for In-
service Technician Training.
Programs developed in NY and FL
meet the CSCV training model cur-
riculum.
 And we aiso understand that sev-
eral ether states may soon aooot
the CSCV training program guide-
lines &. or nave included them m
their RFPs (Reauest For
Proposal).


LOOKING FOR 60
MASTER TRAINERS TO
TRAIN 600 MORE!
 What it will take to crank up a
train-the-trainers program for
E/I&M (Enhanced I&M) technical
implementation will be 60 master
trainers. But not just any 60! "We
are like the US Marine Corps."
Gary Huggins. Exec. VP of CSCV
stated in August. "We are looking
for the 60 master trainers who are
the cream of the national crop!"
That will not be an easy task.
 "The goal is to find a core group
of 60 people who will be tasked to
go out and tram about 10 other
trainers each." Huggins explained.
The 600 group of hi-level  industry
and education based service train-
ers will be assigned, along with  the
initial 60. to train service techni-
cians who could become approved
or certified to perform E/I&M emis-
sion repair services in their states.
 CSCV will set up a screening
process which will make the deter-
~ina:;cr as ;c ;r,e r:rs; •:>:• .vr.o .vm
enter re t: iiM Trair--.-e-~-a.-e---
prograrn.
  'We won t oe aoie to acceot
everyone wno apones rcr ;re F-rs:
60 Tram-the-Trainers Fragram.'
Huggins admitted.  'But -or -hose
may not oe included in me first
grouo. we nope to induce many of
mem in the 500 Group which win
take on the tougn task of delivering
E. I&M training to tecnnicians in
those states which  have been des-
ignated Enhanced I&M areas of
the nation." he toid us.
 E I&M programs are expected to
appear in 83 markets in 20 states
plus DC by no later than Jan i.
1995.  See below on the page at
right for these locations to find out
if your automotive service shop is
in a market which could be
involved in offering E/I&M services
to your automotive customers.
 Automotive service  technology
trainers who would like to be part
of either group, the First 60 or the
600 Group, contact Gary Huggins.
at CSCV. 202-543-4499. Or write
to:
  CSCV Train the Trainers
  321  D Street NE
  Washington. DC 20002
  Attn: Gary Huggins
I&M RULE REVIEW (cont'd)

test will be required. This will
mean the vehicle owner most like-
ly will have to take the vehicle
back to the test-only facility.
 While it is not expected that
shops will have to duplicate the
sophisticated equipment used in
an IM-240 check lane, certain
investments  in new equipment, or
possibly in upgrades, will have to
be assumed if a service shop
intends to offer E/I&M repairs and
bring back into compliance found-
to-be-polluting vehicles.  Also,
some form of verification check in
the service facility, after adjust-
ments have been completed, will
have to be done, if only to confirm
to the vehicle owner that the vehi-
cle will pass  the re-test back at the
inspection facility.
 Technicians assigned to perform
these new emission check ser-
vices also will have to commit to
undertaking  update emission sys-
tem (fuel/ignition/driveability)
technical training. Technicians
also may have to undertake a
new level of ASE test certification
beyond the existing A8 Engine
Performance test, to prove they
are capable of performing the
work involved in Enhanced I&M
correction.
 ASE's new emission system
diagnostician category of certifica-
tion will be launched in the Spring
'94 testing period.  The new test
will be offered at all test centers in
the nation, ASE tells us.
 We also understand that techni-
cians who intend to register for the
new ASE test next Spring must
hold current A8 test certification
status. ASE has also advised the
industry that the new test will be
completely diagnosis-oriented
rather than repair-service slanted
as are all their other categories of
technician certification tests.
New I&M Programs Coming to...
These 26 city-market areas must implement Basic
I&M programs by Jan. 1. '94.

Akron. OH
Ann Arbor. Ml
Aurora. IL
Beaumont. TX
Charleston. WV
Dayton. OH
Denton. TX
Durham,  NC
Elgin, IL
Galveston. TX
Gastonia. NC
Grand Rapids. Ml
Huntington. WV-Ashlahd. KY
Joliet. IL
Lewiston-Auburn, ME
Lewisville, TX
Muskegon-Muskegon Heights. Ml
Parkersburg, WV-Marietta. OH
Petersburg-Colonial Heights. VA
Port Arthur. TX
Richmond. VA
Round Lake Beach. IL
Sheboygan. Wl
Springfield. OH
Texas City-La Marque. TX
Toledo, OH

-------
 Things  to  do BEFORE You Hit the Hotline Phone!
  WHEN DIAGNOSTIC orcoiems
 in the service bay can t be soivea
 quickly, there's a great temptation
 to down-tools and cair a hotline.
 But what many service techni-
 cians seem to ignore is the fact
 tnat a hotline Diagnostician's time
 and exoertise are at least as valu-
 able  as a caller's, mayoe more
 so! So. calling a notline before
 you have some oasic facts at
 your  fingertips, and some tests
 completed and recorded can be a
 serious  waste of two people's
 valuable time.
  Autoline Telediagnosis. St. Paul.
 MN. handles several hundred
 diagnostic phone calls per day.
 Stu Kidder is one of their top
 phone-call problem solvers. He
 told us:  "Many callers forget that
 we can't see the vehicle they are
 working on.  so it's important that
 their conversational dialogue be
 concise and accurate if we are to
 help them."  For technician-callers
 this means you must have good
 vocal communications skills.
  "Also," Kidder continued. ;'we
 need  to know what tests have
been  done to check out the prob-
lem, specific electrical values if
they are appropriate, and as
much scope, scan tool and gas
analyzer data as possible.
assuming a caller nas aathereo
all that data before they nave
called us."
 Autoline's Customer Service
Director. Rob Schuyt. suggests
that most hotline diagnosticians
should know which set of service
manuals the calling technician is
in the habit of using. "It helps to
know if they use Mitchell.
Chilton's or Motors Manuals, so
we can check the source they are
using. Here at Autoline we prefer
to use the original official OE car-
maker service data since we
often find it to be more completely
detailed than some of the edited
manuals." Schuyt stated.
 As with any service  procedure.
most diagnosticians we talked to
suggest that an initial thorough
visual check be done before
using a tool or connecting a test
meter.
 Joe Marchesani, a GM Tech
Specialist diagnostician at
ASPIRE, Morrisville. PA, told us:
"The visual check is important
because it can show earlier work
that may have been done. This
can be a good clue in locating the
initial prcoiem area, it ~a; a.sc
helo to track oown arc c-cv ce a
cure quickly.' But ASPIRE';
Director of Diagnostic Services, o.
R. King stated: "So many snroucs
and covers are to be founa urcer
the hood tcaay. that visual croo-
lems may not spring into view
that easily." He does agree, r.ovv-
ever. that before anything eise ;s
done', the visual cneck is still
important to do.
 Now. before you call that hotline
help, be sure you have:
1) Paper & pencil to take notes on
diagnostic guidance given to you.
2) The year/make/model of vehi-
cle, as well as engine size, fuel
system type,  and other data
which will help the diagnostician
lock  on to problem causes.
3) Performed a visual check of
the engine and problem system.
4) Taken preliminary test readings
and notes on values found.
5) The ability to deliver clear  and
concise descriptions of the prob-
lem system and the data taken.
  Remember, it's not just the cost
of a hotline phone-call, but it's
your time too. as well as that of
the diagnostician you are calling
for help!
Enhanced I&M Programs Coming to ...
The following 83 city/metro-market areas must implement IM-240 Enhanced I&M programs by
by no later than January 1. 1995.
Albany-Schenectady-Troy, NY
Allentown-Bethlehem. PA
Altoona. PA
Atlanta. GA
Attleboro. MA & Providence. Rl
Atlantic City. NJ
Bakersfield. CA
Baltimore. MD
Baton Rouge. LA
Bergen-Passaic Counties, NJ
Binghamton, NY
Boston, MA
Bridgeport-Milford. CT
Brockton, MA
Buffalo. NY
Burlington. VT
Chicago, IL
Danbury, CT
Denver, CO
El Paso, TX
Erie, PA
Fall River. MA
Fitchburg-Leominster, MA
Fresno, CA
Glens Falls, NY
Hagerstown, MD
Harrisburg-Lebanon-Carlisle. PA
Hartford. CT
Houston, TX
Jamestown-Dunkirk, NY
Jersey City, NJ
Johnstown, PA
Lancaster, PA
Las Vegas, NV
Lawrence-Haverhill, MA
Los Angeles-Long Beach, CA
Lowell. MA
Manchester, NH
Middlesex-Somerset-Hunterdon, NJ
Milwaukee, Wl
Monmouth-Ocean Counties. NJ
Nashua, NH
Nassau-Suffolk Counties, NY
Newark, NJ
New Bedford. MA
New Britain, CT
New Haven-Meriden, CT
New London-Norwich, CT
New York, NY
Niagara Falls, NY
Norwalk, CT
Orange County, NY
Oxnard-Ventura-Thousand Oaks. CA
Pawtucket-Woonsocket. Rl
Philadelphia. PA
Pittsburgh. PA
Portland. ME
Portsmouth-Dover-Rochester. NH
Poughkeepsie. NY
Reading, PA
Rochester. NY
Sacramento. CA
Salem-Gloucester, MA
San Bernardino-Riverside, CA
San Diego. CA
Scranton-Wilkes-Barre. PA
Seattle-Everett. WA
Sharon. PA
Spokane. WA
Springfield. MA
Stamford, CT
State College. PA
Syracuse. NY
Tacoma. WA
Trenton, NJ
Utica-Rome. NY
Vineland-Millville-Bridgeton, NJ
Washington. DC
Waterbury, CT
Williamsport. PA
Wilmington. DE
Worcester, MA ...&... York, PA

-------
 HI-TECH HOTLINE HELP .  . .
    A  Digest  of  Calls  Made  to  the fndust
            AUDI
NO-SPARK AFTER REPAIRS
ON W85 5000 TURBO
From Mitchell On-Ca/l Teleaiagnostics
If a no-soarK condition snows UD
after routine reoair work on the
5000 Turbo, cneck to see if the dis-
tributor was either removed or
adjusted. Audi has an incredibly
finicky ignition system. A no-soark
condition will result if the distributer
is even a few degrees ctf its facto-
ry setting,
 Install a spark tester in one ot trie
plug wires. Now loosen me cistno-
utor noid-down. Crank the engine
while SLOWLY turning the Distribu-
tor either way. If spark returns, the
distributor is now in the correct
position. Tighten down in that
exact position in order to achieve
the repair.
 Here's what happens.  This igni-
tion system uses three engine-
speed sensors, The first is the
speed sensor, a non-adjustable
magnetic pickup which produces
135 impulses per CRANKSHAFT
revolution, via 135 teeth on the fly-
wheel.  These impulses  are used
as the primary input to determine
engine speed and the ignition tim-
ing point. This sensor is Ideated
on the upper left side of  the trans-
mission bell housing.
 The second sensor is called the
reference sensor, also a non-
adjustable magnetic pickup which
produces 1 impulse per CRANK-
SHAFT revolution at 60° BTDC,
via a pin inserted in the flywheel. It
is used by the control unit, along
with the Hall sensor in the distribu-
tor, to identify TDC for the #1 cylin-
der. This sensor is located next to
the speed sensor.
 The third  sensor is called the Hall
sending unit, a Hall effect which
produces one broad signal per
DISTRIBUTOR SHAFT  rotation
just before ignition on TDC #1
cylinder. This is needed because
the reference sensor creates an
impulse 60° before TDC on the
compression stroke, and also on
the exhaust stroke.
 The control unit is only interested
:n the compression-stroke impulse.
however.  The Hall sending unit
serves to :aenmy ana validate the
reference sensor comoression
mouse, since i rotates at haif ;ne
soeea of the crankshaft. If the Hail
sending unit sensor ,s out of sync
the reference sensor will not get
validated, and the ignition and fuel
systems will not become energized.
   CHRYSLER CORP.
CHRYSLER 2.2/2.5 & TURBO
PERFORMANCE GRIPES
from the ASPIRE Telediagnostic Hotline
Some owners of Chrysler vehicles
with the 2.2L. the 2.5L and tur-
bocharged versions of these power
plants, may complain about poor
performance, tack of power and a
rich-running condition. When diag-
nosing for these problems most
technicians know the usual causes
of these driveability gripes, such as
the MAP sensor, or checking for
injector update bulletins.
 Along with these common prob-
lems, Aspire diagnosticians have
noted that some timing belts have
jumped, or been installed improper-
ly, and are out of time. Incorrect
cam-timing changes valve timing in
relationship to piston position. This
results in low engine vacuum, which
affects MAP sensor voltage output.
Unfortunately, the incorrect MAP
sensor voltage may lead some
technicians to overlook the timing
belt as a cause, especially when
doing quick diagnostic checks.
                    COVER TIMING
                     HOLS PLUG
 Aspire recommends the following
quick method of checking timing
belt alignment, by the use of an in-
ductive timing light wv a cu '•  •
advance meter. "FoiiC'.v ns c-
aure:
11 Gearshift selector srouia c-
PARK.
2i Engine should be runn^ng,
3" Inductive timing light snouid ze
hookea up to cyl. # 1
4) View the ianition timing rnarK:
now. using the advance meter en
the timing light, dial it back to reac
Q:, or TDC (top dead center).
5) Remove the rubber plug on the
timing belt cover, and view the
pointer on the cam gear thru the
hole with the timing tight.
6) It should be close to the  12
o'clock position, if it is not.  the  :
ing belt may be off by one tooth.  ,r
this case the timing belt cover will
have to be removed for a closer
check.
           FORD
   LINCOLN-MERCURY
HIGH CO & ABOVE-NORMAL
HC ON FORD VEHICLES
from Autoline Teledlagnostics
Poor fuel economy and driveabii,:.
performance may be a complaint
related to almost any Ford vehicle
from 1985 to present. Any vehicle
with this complaint may or may not
have fault code 41 set in continu-
ous memory. These vehicles, how-
ever, may pass a KOEO (key on.
engine off) test, so further diagno-
sis is called for.
 We recommend that the techni-
cian test the voltage output of the
EGO (oxygen) sensor(s). If sensor
output is low, the ECA usually
tends to think the vehicle is running
too lean.  It will then attempt to cu-e
this condition by commanding an
increase in fuel delivery.
 Normally, the EGO sensor should
have a rapidly fluctuating voltage
value, between 100 and 900 mv. If
the sensor tends to stay low, in the
200 to 400 mv range, induce  some
propane into the  intake manifold.
 This procedure  should see sensor
voltage rise  immediately to 900 mv,
or more. If the mv rise is not found.
it's time to replace the EGO sensor.

-------
's  Troubleshooting  Diagnostic Services
    BRONCO II 2.9L ROUGH IDLE

    AND EMISSIONS PROBLEMS
    From Autolme Telediagnostics
    The caller on this 1986 Fora
    Bronco orooiem naa 63b CO 600
    HC ppm and a burned oxygen sen-
    sor wire.  The engine also was
    flooding.  After installation or a new
    oxygen sensor, the KOEO self-test
    showed fault codes 11. 10.65.
     The key on engine running self
    test showed code 33. but the fuel
    pressure was unknown. CO 6%
    condition  remained, so we advised
    a fuel pump pressure checx.
    This was done and showed 30-40
    psi. The technician caller also
    revealed that he had found the
    throttle body assembly and bypass
    valve were in bad condition.  We
    advised him to clean the TB
    assembly.
    After doing this the air bypass
    valve was reset to hard stop (mini-
    mum idle) specs. The EGA also
    was retrained, and we recom-
    mended an injector pulse-width
    measurement at hot idle. This
    check showed that pulse width
    was 1.2 mS. A check of the  MAP
    sensor inputs found the sensor fre-
    quency was too low at idle. The
    MAP sensor needed replacement.


    MERCURY TOPAZ 2.3L 4-CYL
    ENGINE IGNITION PROBLEM
    From Autoline feted/agnostics
    The caller with an apparent ignition
    malfunction problem on a 1986
    Mercury Topaz told us he had
    installed a new stator, a TFI mod-
    ule and a known-good coil.
    Nothing seemed to work. There
    continued to be no spark, even
    with SPOUT disconnected. He
    could not  obtain an injector pulse
    either.
    We suggested a check of the volt-
    age readings at the TFI module
    connector. These proved to be
    OK. except that the PIP wire read
    7v. Next we suggested he check
    for a PIP signal from the stator.
    When he  did this he reported the
    signal went from Ov to 5v. The
    same reading showed with the
    processor disconnected.
    Once the PIP wire was clipped
near the distributor a normal PIP
signal was ootamea. as well as
spark. The cause of this non-igni-
tion problem call was a snort in tne
PIP wire.
1987 MUSTANG 4-CYL
2.3 EFI WET PLUGS
From Autoline Telediagnostics
The problem with this vehicle was
that after driving and being shut
off. the car would apparently flood
and blow black smoke. A check
of the fuel system showed 35 psi.
Once started, the owner reported
that the engine ran fine, after
clearing out the smoke.
 We recommended that the fuel
pressure dropoff rate be checked.
and that if it dropped off quickly
that the technician should pull the
injectors to check and test them.
He did this and found that there
was no leakage.
 Next we advised a check of the
vacuum line to the fuel pressure
regulator for sign of fuel in the
hose.  This check confirmed there
was fuel in the line and that a very
wet external condition existed.
What was- bad was the pressure
regulator, and replacement elimi-
nated this complaint.


3.8LV6 TAURUS FAULTY PFE
BACKPRESSURE SENSOR
From Autoline Telediagnostics
This caller advised us that he had
found the back pressure sensor
was all burned up. We suggested
there may be a restricted exhaust
system, and that if found to be
plugged to check for any possible
intake manifold gasket problems.
Under plugged conditions the PFE
sensor will get hot when the
exhaust is restricted in any way.
   GENERAL MOTORS
GM 2.8L CARBURETED V6
LIGHT ACCELERATION CURE
From Autoline Telediagnostics
Many technicians have had prob-
lems in trying to cure rough idle
and poor performance at light
throttle acceleration in 1981-56
GM X and A-booy vehicles -.VHP
:he 2.3L V5 E2SE carbureter
engine. M.C .mixture contron
dwell may oe found to oe 'G'.V.
possibly stuck at 6 degrees.
Cruise-speed emissions aiso nay
be affected and out of comon-
ance.
 Check the M.C solenoid for a
possible broken tip. If founo to be
bad. you should replace this item
with an update. Be sure to refer
to the soecific oart number.  This
may differ oeoending on the car
Nne vehicle in which this engine is
installed.
 Adjust the M.C dwell at the idle
mixture screw, and. if necessary.
adjust dwell to approximately 30;.
using the lean authority screw.


1985-1989 FI3.8LV6
NO-START CONDITION
From the ASPIRE Telediagnostic Hotline
Front drive cars equipped with
3.8L fuel injected engines (VIN
code #3 or B. years 1985-1989)
will sometimes exhibit a no start
condition.  These vehicles will
have spark, injector pulse, and
fuel pressure.  When the engine is
cranked, it sounds like it is out of
time. In many  instances, the
cause of this condition is late or
jumped valve timing.
 Diagnosis of this condition  can
best be accomplished by remov-
ing the right front wheel and
splash shield and working through
the wheel opening.  Remove the
cam sensor out of the front cover.
Shine a light in the hole and
observe the movement  of the cam
gear, while working the  crankshaft
pulley  back and forth with a break-
er bar and socket. If tne crank
must be moved excessively
before cam gear movement  is
observed, both gears and chain
are bad.
 When replacing the cam gear, a
factory-type aluminum gear
should be used. An iron replace-
ment gear may affect the magnet-
ism of the interrupter and can
cause a no start,  due to the  lack
of a cam sensor signal.

-------
HI-TECH HOTLINE HELP . . .
 On 1985-1987. 3.0 litre and 3.8
liters, it is also advisable to
replace the spring and button that
keeps the cam loaded up toward
the rear of the engine, with a later
style, heavier soring and bearing
assemoiy (P'N 25532588).
 It should also be noted. 3.0 and
3.8 litre. 90' Buick manufactured
V-6s. can sometimes oe vaive
benders.  When pricing a gear
and chain replacement, it would
be advisable to consider the likeli-
hood of bent valves.


MISFIRING GM QUAD 4
2.3L ENGINES
From Autoline Telediagnostics
Complaints with the GM Quad 4
2.3L engine installed in GM N body
vehicles may be described as con-
stant misfires, and showing high
HC levels. These conditions may
be due to several different causes.
but most usually relate to the sec-
ondary ignition system.
 GM had a fix campaign some
time ago on faulty ignition coils.
When checking to see if updated
ignition'coils have been installed,
be sure to look for a yellow insert
at the connector.
 If the problem is not due to faulty
ignition coils, or if the correct coils
have been installed, yet the prob-
lem continues, you should check
for spark at each coil pair.  Do this
by use of  test plug wires and HEI
spark testers. Both testers should
have spark. However, if only one
tester shows a spark, the coil
housing is at fault.


GM SMALL-BLOCK ENGINES
STALLING AT LOW RPMS
from the ASPIRE Telediagnostic Hotline
Some small-block V8 Chevrolet-
powered cars and trucks
—either carbureted or fuel  inject-
ed—may  sometimes stall at low
engine rpms, or stall when  put into
gear. Aspire diagnostic techni-
cians have found, in some
instances, that this condition is
caused by a weak signal from the
distributor pole piece.
 What happens is that the  timer
core on the distributor mainshaft
usually will be found to have lost
some of its original magnetization
on vehicles with this chronic type
of problem. The timer core mag-
net on vehicles with this complaint
will be too weak to provide an ade-
quate signal, especially at low
engine rpms.  Replacement of the
distributor mainshaft will prove to
be a successful fix for this annoy-
ing complaint.
 This will be found particularly on
1987 and up Chevrolet light-duty
trucks, and RWD vehicles such as
the Monte Carlo. Caprice and
Camaro/Firebird.  Vehicles with
distributor P'N 1103698 have been
covered in  a technical bulletin con-
cerning oil getting into the distribu-
tor. The recommended fix in that
bulletin was to replace the distribu-
tor mainshaft with P/N 11046753.
We recommend that that updated
distributor mainshaft P/N be used.
          HONDA
HIGH HC IDLE EMISSIONS
ON HONDA CVCC ENGINES
From Autoline Telediagnostics
This complaint may be expressed
as one of uneven or rough idle per-
formance on some Honda CVCC
engines.  High HC idle also may
be detected thru exhaust-gas diag-
nosis. Technicians should be
aware that only the correct manu-
facturer-recommended spark plugs
should be used in a CVCC engine
with this complaint.
 Spark plugs which do not meet
Honda specs for heat range and
electrode dimensions may cause a
misfire condition.  Due to the par-
ticular design of the Honda CVCC
combustion chamber, it is recom-
mended that only the correct
Honda spark plug application be
followed.
 Be particularly careful not to use
extended-reach plugs in any
CVCC engine application.
HONDA ACCORD COLD
START PROBLEM
From Autoline Telediagnostics
We recently had a call on a 1985
Honda Accord whose owner had
experienced chronic cold start
problems in the morning. The
engine needed constant choking to
Keep it running.  i-'~e ccia-star!
conaition. the owner tcia cur cans'
also included the engine c'yina ss-. -
erai times before it finally would
run.
 We first advised a check for a
leaking carouretor msuiator ana
suggested a propane enrichment
test of the idle mixture.  After
adjustment our caller still haa a
problem since the venicle would
stall almost as soon as it haa been
started.
 The technician found that vacuum
hose 17 was plugged. Once
cleared the engine still stalled.  We
advised that he should remove the
stopper from the main fuel cut
solenoid, and to flush the auxiliary
idle circuit. We also suggested
that an adjustment may be needed
on the lambda screw if the fuel
mixture could not be enriched suffi-
ciently for the engine to run steadi-
ly.  But there also was the
possibility that there was an air
control leak.
 The calling technician found that
the fuel cut solenoid was the cause
of this problem, and by removing
the stopper the problem was cured.


ERRATIC IDLE SPEED ON
CRX DUAL-STAGE TBI
From Mitchell On-Catl Telediagnostics
If this type engine in a CRX jumps
intermittently from idle speed to
2500-3000 rpm, and then back to
normal after 1 to 20 sees., suspect
a faulty TW sensor.  TW is Honda
terminology for a coolant sensor.
The sensor can fail intermittently,
almost as if it burps.
 Diagnose by monitoring the con-
nected TW sensor signal line dur-
ing the symptom. If the sensor is
responsible, it will quickly bounce
from its normal 0.5v or so when
hot, to approximately.4.6v during
the symptom. It may do all this
without setting a code.


CARB ENGINE FAST-IDLE
COMPLAINTS POST TUNE-UP
from the ASPIRE Telediagnostic Hotline
Honda Motor Corporation produced
and sold many vehicles with car-
buretor systems.  Aspire receives a
number of calls on these vehicles
with a customer complaint of idling

-------
                                                              tiLIMCH HOTLINE HELP
'.oo last, however. ;ne technician
cannot lower the idle to normal
specifications.  The engine will con-
tinue to run. if the idle speed is set
around 1QOO to 1200 RPM or more.
if an attemot to lower tne idle is
mace, the engine stalls or aies out.
Naturally, tne higher iole has many
-egative effects: poor gas mileage.
high emissions leveis. narsh auto-
trans engagement,  etc.
 If the carburetor is equipped with
an idle cut off solenoid. Aspire rec-
ommends checking its operation.
The solenoid's function is to cut off
the idle circuit passage way. It is
used in a number of ways on many
different models to prevent diesel-
ing or post ignition.  As a de-eel
solenoid,  it is used to prevent high
exhaust emissions and backfiring
on deceleration.
etc.  Its function is to cut off the idle
circuit passage way.
        PRIMARY SLOW MIXTURE
        CUT-OFF SOLENOID VALVE
 Some solenoids use a single
electric wire feed of 12 volts for
activation.  Usually the 12 volts is
supplied by the ignition switch.
Others have two wires, a 12 volt
feed wire, again from the ignition
circuit, and a second wire which
the feedback computer would
ground to control the solenoid
operation.  All solenoids can be
checked on or off the car. by look-
ing for a mechanical operation,
while 12 volts and a ground are
supplied.
 The solenoid is called by various
names: idle cut off solenoid, de-eel
solenoid, primary slow mixture cut
off solenoid, fuel cut off solenoid.
            WE SUPPORT
            VOLUNTARY
            TECHNICIAN
            CERTIFICATION
           MAZDA
RX7 FUEL FLOODING &
NO-START CONDITIONS
from the ASPIRE Te/ediagnostic Hotline
We receive some calls on the
rotary-powered Mazda RX7 sports
car. Many of these focus on a fuel-
flooding condition, particularly in'
cold weather. Most technicians we
talk to start their diagnosis by look-
ing for codes, or by checking for
faulty sensors which also may
cause a flooding condition.
 Usually, after all their checks.
including a fuel pressure test, they
fail to find the cause  of this prob-
lem.  We have found that in the
great majority of cases there is
nothing wrong with either the fuel
pressure levels, the ECU. or its
sensors.
The real cause of this problem
usually may be excessive voltage
drop in the starter circuit, a battery
problem (defective, undersized, or
in a low state of charge) or a defec-
tive starter. This engine demands
high-cranking rpm. If the engine
spins too slowly for the amount of
fuel being injected, the plugs will
foul, leading to a no-start condition.
                                              NISSAN
POOR RUNNING ON NAPS
DUAL IGNITION ENGINES
From Mitchell On-Call Telediagnostica
Two of Nissan's engine families,
the Z series and the 2-valve CA
series, are equipped with the dual-
ignition NAPS (Nissan Anti
Pollution-control System) setup.
NAPS may be found either as
standard or optional equipment, on
the following models: 1981 510;
1981-88200SX;1981-89720
Pickup truck; 1982 and 1983.5-89
Stanza; 1986-89 Station wagon;
1987-89 Pathfinder; 1987-90 Van;
1987-89 Pulsar NX.
 A problem with the NAPS ignition
system can create rough idle, idle
stall, decel stall, poor acceleration,
or surge at cruise speed.  Most of
these symptoms may be inadver-
:ent!y created cy ;auity 'eoa;r v.c'r-.
 The NAPS auai-igniticr system
has two sparK plugs per cy:;rcer
and two ignition coils to r'ire them.
A soark plug switching system '.vas
•ntroouceo en ail versions :n "952.
This  mooification prevents aetcra-
tion caused by two name rrcnts
colliding. During neavy ioao ooer-
ation. the exnaust sioe soarK oiucs
are snut off to eliminate one flame
front. Engine ioao is determined
by either the fuel injection control
unit,  or a simple vacuum switch.
On 1981 models, both sets of
plugs are always ON.
 The most common fault is spark
plug installation. The exhaust-side
plugs are different from the intake-
side plugs,  regardless of model
year. Any of the poor-running
symptoms described above will
result if the plugs are  switched.
mixed, or of all the same type.  So
be sure to check the recommend-
ed plug specs.
 The second most common fault
occurs when the intake-side coil
fires the exhaust-side plugs, and/or
vice versa. This happens because
the plug wires or coil wires are
routed incorrectly. A severe hesi-
tation will result when the INTAKE
plugs are shut down during heavy
load. Two test methods are avail-
able to determine if the coils are fir-
ing the wrong set of plugs.
(1) Later-model vehicles use a 4-
wire connector on the intake coil.
and  a 3-wire connector on the
exhaust coil.  Use the connector to
identify the coil, then visually follow
the plug wires to verify the correct
set of plugs being supplied.
(2) A timing light may be used on
the intake side.  Rev the engine
under load.  If the light stops flash-
ing, the wires are routed incorrect-
ly. Remember that 1981 versions
of NAPS will not surfer from
switched coils, since on '81 NAPS
engines all plugs arways fire.
 Another wire routing error hap-
pens when the firing order is set
incorrectly. Many of these engines
have separate firing orders for the
intake (1-3-2-4) and exhaust (1-3-
4-2). The difference is due to the
limitations of using the same dis-
tributor cap and rotor to handle
both coil sets, and not because
the engine actually has two differ-
ent firing orders.

-------
   "S icSt most CGiTii .Cr~  i'jii CM a
NJAFS enaire occurs wnen one set
or piucs coes ~ct ''re. ~'~is ;as;
creates a severe rougn -.cie.
stalling, ana ternb'e aceeieration.
Use a timing ngnt or sparK tester
on both siaes ;o diagnose this
r'ault. The usual cuiont is either a
•auity igntior,  mcauie. or a ;auity
power transistor.
  One finai caution,  i' detonation
under loaa occurs.  /enfy T.at the
exhaust plugs are snutting off as
they snouid.


VARIETY OF PROBLEMS ON

NISSAN E16S ENGINES
From Mitchell On-Call Telediagnostics
This engine is used on 1983-87
Sentra moaels. and on 1983-87
Pulsar moaeis.
  If the air cleaner fills with oil. be
sure to checK the PCV hose. It
may become soft and tena to suck
shut, usually under  moderate load.
right past the step-down in the
hose as it passes through the
intake runners.  This is an area of
the hose where  its diameter
decreases. Another symptom
might be that the idle CO percent-
age will increase if the hose is
always collapsed.
 On the chokeless Hitachi carb.
used exclusively from 1984-87, but
not in 1983. the bakelite insulator
may be cracked. This may cause
one of the two strands going  to the
mixture control solenoid to intermit-
tently open the circuit, driving the
carb to full-rich.  This mixture-con-
trol solenoid works identically to a
GM design: the carb will run full-
rich when off.  and full-lean when
100% energized.
 A no-start, no-spark condition is
likely to be due to a  bad connection
at the ECC main relay. This unit is
located on the fenderwell. The
connections under the relay are
exposed to road splash, and usual-
ly suffer corrosion deterioration. A
failure on this circuit will not supply
the ECU with needed power.
depriving the optical distributor of
the power it needs to function.
          TOYOTA
BLACK SMOKE ON 22R
NON-FEEDBACK ENGINE
From Mitchell On-Call Telediagnostics
If this pickup truck engine always
HLIMCH_HO71JNE_HELP . • .

•-uns ricn. snowing oiack s.m.cKe.
ihougn ret smoking as oaoiy wnen
it is warm, the power vaive  s a
iikeiy culprit. The valve's spring
tension weakens over time, thus
allowing it to ooen  too early.
  First, verify the jets are not leak-
ing and the float level observed
thru the window is  OK. If both
check OK. open up the carb and
test the power vaive. This is a reg-
ular floor-jet type.  Now remove it
from the bottom of the float bowl
and install a hand held vacuum.
pump to the threaded pprtion of
the valve. A good  power valve will
open at or above 3 ins. A bad one
will open around 1  in.
  This carb has a temperature-
compensated spring accelerator
pump.  If it were faulty, the engine
would run rich ONLY when hot.


BOSCH VANE-TYPE AIR
FLOW SENSOR  TESTS
from the ASPIRE Telediagnostic Hotline
Many Toyota model vehicles use
a Bosch-style mechanical air flow
sensor.  This meter is part of the
air induction system to the engine
      Used witn permission of Aspire. Inc.
       5 Aspire. Inc. All ngnts reserved

  Toyota uses two types of air flow meter
  designs. Both designs overlapped in
  model years of use. See 2nd design
  late-model schematic above.
and produces one of the most
important inputs to the fuel injec-
tion computer. It measures the
volume of air entering the engine
and sends a signal to the ECU for
fuel injection control. Factory
specifications and procedures
usually call for a variable resis-
tance test using an analog ohm-
meter or a digital ohmmeter with a
bar graph display, when testing
the airflow potentiometer.
 The use of the digital ohmmeter
can be tricky.  You need to study
the display carefully and repeat the
cie outer C' orcc:em. V/~er  -
-ouot or re •'eacircs. Asc-e ---.-
Dmmencs a vcitage cnec;-; cr :~e
airflow meier_unoer act^ai .vorKirc
ccncitions.  This means oac* oroo-
mg or using a break-out oox ;o
measure re voltage output.  V/e
:an now see on our voltmeter
exactly wnat the ECU sees.  The
/ouace sncuid change.gradually.
ana increase or aecrease wunout
SKIDS or spikes as tne aoor moves.
With late- mooei airflow meters.
the voltage sweep'decreases as
the door open: in early moael the
voltage sweep increases.
    Used WIIP oermission ot Aspire. Inc.
      : Asoire. me All ngnts reserved

 This 2nd design was first used in the
 1985 5M-GE engine and is used in
 many TCCS vehicles. Check vehicle
 service spec for correct application.
 HOTLINE DIAGNOSTIC
 SERVICES FOR

 SHOPS & TECHNICIANS
  A number of telephone-access
 diagnostic hotline services are avail-
 able to the industry. Most of these
 are by subscription, however com-
 plete details can be obtained by
 calling them. They are:

 ASPIRE Telediagnostic Service,
 Morrisville, PA.
          Call 800 435 1050 and
               ask for J R King
 AUTOLINE Telediagnosis.
 St. Paul, MN.
   Call 800 288 6220 and ask for
        Rob Schuyt (pronounced
                      SHOOT)
 MITCHELL On-Line
 Telediagnostics. San Diego, CA.
   Call 800 854 7030 and ask for
       Eddie Santangelo. x-6504

 AUTOMOTIVE DATA SYSTEMS.
 Huntington  Beach. CA.
   Call 714 892 8330 and ask for
                    Curt Moore

-------
         APPENDIX  3

Bibliography of Commercial Hot
        Line Services

-------
Appendix 3 — BIBLIOGRAPHY OF COMMERCIAL HOT LINE SERVICES

     The following bibliography  is  provided for reference only.
EPA does not endorse  any particular  service.  Currently, at least
six companies operate commercial hot  line services.  If EPA becomes
aware of  any additional sources, they will be  added  to  future
updates of the guidance document.  It is expected that the state
and local agencies will determine which, if any,  of these hot lines
can  meet the  needs  of  an  I/M  program  in their  state.   The
information below was provided by the companies  operating hot line
services, and EPA makes no  claims on the accuracy of the data and
provides no specific endorsement of these services.

1)   ASPIRE
     U.S. Hwy 1
     Morrisville, PA   19067
     Contact:  J. R.  King  800-435-1050

     The hot line operated by ASPIRE was established in  1980, with
subscribers  from state  and industry.  The  ASPIRE  hot  line logs
about 20,000  to  25,000 minutes of call time per month.  Service
charges for actual  time used and  the price charged depends on the
user.  Calls are primarily related to driveability, performance,
and emissions.  There is a separate hot line  to  support educators.

2)   Technet/Automotive Data Systems  (ADS)
     15593 Graham
     Huntington Beach,  CA   92649
     Information source: Leith Tecklenberg  714-891-7818
     Contact no.:     714-892-8330,   ask   for  Curt   Moore or
                      714-891-7818

     The company runs four hot lines,  the Shell Auto Care Hot line,
a hot line  for  Hurst  Motor Repair  Manuals,  a  test program with
Snap-on   Tools,  and   Teleguide  for  Computer   Aided  Service
Corporation.   Technet/ADS  services  approximately  7000 cars  per
month with 90 to 95% of the calls related to driveability/engine
control.  Over the past 10 years they have averaged 1000 to 1500
calls per day.  During their 13 years of operation, the company has
compiled a vehicle  repair database,  tracking repair patterns with
over 300,000 cars.

3)   Mitchell
     9889 Willow Creek Road
     P.O. Box 26260
     San Diego,  CA   92126
     Contact:    Bob Gradijan    800-854-7030,  extension  6411 or
                 Eddie Santangelo,  extension 6504

     Mitchell has a call volume of 100-200  calls/week, with 75% of
calls driveability related and the rest electrical.  Most of the


                              A3-1

-------
customers are technicians and shop owners.  Charges are assessed on
a per problem basis.

4)   Automotive Information Systems, Inc.
     2714 Patton Rd.
     Roseville, MN   55113
     Contact no.:   612-633-8007

     Automotive  Information Systems,  Inc.  (AIS)  provides  the
Autoline  Telediagnosis  service  and was founded  in  1987.   The
company handles over 12,000 calls per month and has 4800 factory
manuals and all factory bulletins.   The  company also has three CD
ROM systems  --Expertec, a  service  from  General  Motors  with PROM
updates, ALLDATA,  and  Mitchell  On  Demand.   The  company  has an
extensive  database  with 550,000  fixes  logged into  the system.
Customers include  independent shops, service stations, fleets, and
car dealers.  AIS  runs hot lines for NAPA, Parts Plus, Mighty Auto
Parts, ASA, NTDRA, AC Delco, the  Robert Bosch Corporation,  Amoco,
Exxon, Chevron, BP,  and Marathon.   It  also has  contracts  to run
hotlines for the states of Maine and Arizona.  The company can also
receive live data over the phone from a modem on test equipment.
Hours of operation are  7:00 a.m.  to 7:00 p.m. CST, Monday through
Friday.  A quarterly newsletter  giving  technical information is
also published and a sample copy  can be  obtained from the contact
listed above.  Charges for this  hot  line service are by the minute,
with no monthly fees and no sign-up  fees.

5)   GE Capital Fleet Services
     Three Capital Drive
     Eden Prairie, MN   55244
     Information source: Mike  Peterzen 612-828-2103
     Contact no.:   612-828-2799

     GE Capital  Fleet  Services'  past  experience  does  not have
service  center subscribers;  its  clients  are  owners   of  fleet
vehicles being serviced  at shops not owned by  the fleets.  The
company provides guidance to mechanics,  and also issues purchase
orders to repair or  rental  facilities, so drivers do not  incur out
of pocket  expenses.

     At present,  GE Capital  Fleet  Services  is  completing  the
development  of an Enhanced Inspection/Maintenance Technical Hot
Line.   Their proposed  system  includes  online  access  to emission
results by VIN,  the ability to  access  a database of historical
data,  the  ability to  view State  parameters  regarding emission
tests,  and the ability to  create  statistical  reports  from the
database of  calls.
                              A3-2

-------
6)    Technician ONLINE
     8949 Bluewater Hwy
     Saranac,  MI   48881
     Contact:   Terry L. Callahan  616-642-9271

     The Technician ONLINE hotline is a real-time computer accessed
hotline that has been  in operation since August,  1992.   It is a 24
hour  service  that  enables  the  technician  to access  technical
service bulletins and service information compiled directly from
field experiences  and OEM scientific and factual information in the
SAE  J2008   format.    The  technician  may  access  whole  service
information libraries  through ONLINE "gateways"  to  third-party
service information providers.  File  libraries can be accessed by
the  technician to  retrieve  IM240  emission  traces,  automotive
Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEM)   emission/safety  product
recalls, and OEM emission  recall notices  in  the SAE J2008 format.
ONLINE training in the use of the library system is provided ONLINE
when  the  technician "pages  sysop"  for  assistance.   A diskette
containing modem communications and graphical user interface (GUI)
features  is provided  free-of-charge  (freeware).   This  allows
technicians to use mouse-driven or keyboard selection methods to
view  graphical images  ONLINE.    The  cost  for  this service  is
flexible, and  can  be monthly, pre-paid ONLINE time  (the technician
purchases "credits"),  or billable monthly  credit  usage.   A free
diskette can be obtained from the contact listed above.  A monthly
newsletter, Driveability Technician, giving  technical information
directly from the  repair technicians  is also published.  A sample
copy can be obtained  from  the contact listed above.   Technician
ONLINE will also establish,  for  independent  states, an Automotive
Information Hotline Center.  This electronic clearinghouse would be
dedicated   to   the  specific   state,  with  communication  link
capabilities between  states  if  desired,  and would be  set  up by
Technician ONLINE to the state's specifications and needs.
                              A3-3

-------
A3-4

-------
           APPENDIX 4
Quantifying Repair Effectiveness

-------
Appendix 4 — QUANTIFYING REPAIR EFFECTIVENESS

Background

     Some parties  affected by  I/M requirements  have  expressed
concern  that  the minimum  statistics  required by  the  rule only
reflect the ability of repair shops to reduce emissions to IM240
cutpoint  levels.    They  do  not  reflect  the  ability  of  repair
facilities to get the maximum emissions reductions possible,  nor do
they provide an incentive to do so.  Thus, repair facilities may
reduce vehicle  emissions  enough to meet  I/M  standards,  but not
repair vehicles  so  that  emission  control  systems function at or
near optimum  levels.   This  could  be  a problem  as  enhanced I/M
programs move from looser start-up standards in  1995 and 1996 to
more stringent  standards beginning in  1997,  as recommended in
§85.2205(a)(3).

     In addition, some affected parties have expressed a concern
that the required statistics unduly penalize facilities which fix
a substantial number of difficult to repair vehicles.  Such cars
may achieve  large emission reductions but not be very far under the
standard.   Others  express a concern that  such  cars may require
several retests before passing I/M.  Thus,  repair shops  that do an
outstanding repair job on most cars will be unduly penalized for a
few cars.   This  could result in grading for an  outstanding shop
being  undistinguishable  from an  average  shop   that turns away
difficult to repair vehicles.

     A Repair Effectiveness Index  (REI)  was developed that would
(1)  provide an incentive to repair facilities to achieve maximum
possible emission reductions in repairing vehicles,  (2) make the
transition from start-up to more stringent standards easier, and
(3)  equalize the  easy to fix versus more difficult to fix vehicles.
Several methods for  generating an REI  which accounts for all these
considerations were evaluated.  The REI presented in this appendix
contains  two  elements:  (1)  a measure of  the  amount of emission
reduction achieved, and  (2) a measure of how far below the IM240
cutpoint the emission levels were after repair.  In addition, both
of these measures contain  a  heavy penalty for retest failures.  By
balancing the  measures in  an overall  score,  appropriate repair
behavior can be reinforced.  In particular,  shops  that consistently
repair vehicles  to  well  below the  IM240 cutpoint will  receive a
better score than those that just marginally pass.  Although a REI
cannot quantify the  level of difficulty in diagnosing and repairing
individual vehicles, those shops that consistently repair vehicles
to well  below the  IM240 cutpoints will be  penalized less for a
small number  of  retest failures  from  hard to repair vehicles if
large  emission  reductions  are  achieved  overall.   Thus,  an
outstanding shop would be much more likely to get a higher grade


                              A4-1

-------
than  an average  shop which  turns away  vehicles.   Moreover,  the
"emission  reduction"  element of  the  REI would account for  shops
that repair a large portion of older vehicles that may have higher
initial  test scores  than  new cars,  and therefore  cannot reduce
emissions  to  well below  the  IM240 cutpoints.

     The  derivations  of  the calculations are  discussed  in  the
following  sections.
Measure  1  -- Reduction Relative to Initial  IM240 Test Score

     The first measure calculates a score for each vehicle based on
the  average percent  emissions  reduction  for  failing  pollutants
relative to the initial  IM240  emissions:
                      Mass  emissions,, ,.,.,..- Mass emissions.,.  ,,_,_,
                     /	(1st  test )	(final test } *
          Failing  pollutants        Mass emissions(lat tMt j - Cert. Std.

                           no. of failing  pollutants
where:

VS1 =                  vehicle score using  measure 1

Mass  emissions(lst test) =      mass  emissions  for  HC,  CO, or  NOX
                             measured in initial  IM240 test

Mass  emissions(flnal test) =    mass  emissions  for  HC,  CO, or  NOX
                             measured  in  first  IM240  retest   if
                             passing  or  final   IM240  retest   if
                             vehicle fails first  retest

Cert.  Std.  =                New Car Certification Standards1

For 1981  and later model  year cars, the standards are:
     HC   =0.41 g/mi
     CO   =3.40 g/mi
     NOx  =  1.00 g/mi

      It should be reiterated  that the score  is  based only on  the
average percent reduction for  the  failing pollutants.  If  a vehicle
    "'"It  is a compromise from the conceptual ideal to use the new car
certification standards in  this equation.   Ideally, the  value  used would be
the  IM2 4 0 level of  a car meeting the certification FTP  standard.
Nevertheless, the numerical value of the  FTP standards  are reasonable
approximations to IM240 scores from very  effective repairs.


                              A4  -  2

-------
meets the  IM240  standard  for a pollutant on  the  first  test,  it
needs no emission repair  and is  not  included in calculating the
average percent  reduction.    Estimation of  a score  using  this
measure is independent of the  IM240  standard.  Vehicles must be
fixed to the new car certification standards  to earn 100 percent
credit.  The REI  value  for an individual vehicle could be greater
than  100%,  if  it were repaired  to  below the  new  car standard.
Also, vehicles could possibly get negative  scores  if emissions
increase after repairs.

     This  measure   also   accounts  for  the   effect  of  vehicles
submitted for retest that are not  repaired to IM240  standards.  All
vehicles including waivered  vehicles which are not  repaired to the
IM240 cutpoints  must be  included.   If repair effectiveness  is
evaluated based only on vehicles  which are successfully repaired,
repair shops which  have  a large number of  hard to  fix  vehicles
waivered would  get the same score  as a shop which efficiently fixes
these vehicles.   Including vehicles which  are not  successfully
repaired also  gives repair  facilities  some  benefit  for getting
emission reductions  for vehicles even if they do not achieve the
IM240 standard.  Finally,  by using this measure,  repair facilities
get more credit  for repairing a "dirty" vehicle  with very  high
emissions  to a low  emissions level  than for fixing a "marginal"
vehicle to the same  low emissions level.

     It should  be pointed  out that the algorithm described in this
section does not explicitly include the  effects of purge  and
pressure tests.   However,  since these  are  simple pass  or  fail
tests, vehicles could simply receive a score of zero if  the vehicle
does not pass or a  score  of  one  if it does pass.

     A retest penalty can also be applied,  where:

       2)  Retest  penaltyvehicle = RPa =  I / number of retests

or, if the score from  equation 1 is  negative  (average emissions
greater in final  retest):

       3)  Retest  penaltyvehicle = RPb =  I  * number of retests
     By applying this retest penalty,  if  a vehicle requires three
retests, its score would only be one-third of what it would be if
it were  repaired to pass after  the  first retest.   Thus,  repair
facilities  could be penalized heavily for not  fixing  a vehicle
right the first time.  If such a penalty were used,  care would have
to be exercised not to penalize  facilities for vehicles that were
initially repaired  at another facility  after  failing  I/M,  then
taken to their facility for repair prior to a subsequent retest.
States  could  search the IM240 database  for vehicles  which were
repaired by more than one facility,  and assign separate scores to
each  facility  for the individual repairs each  performed  on the


                             A4 - 3

-------
vehicle .

     A  score  for  each  facility  using  this  measure  could  be
calculated as the sum of vehicle scores with the appropriate retest
penalties  applied  divided  by  the  number  of  initial  failing
vehicles :
                   4)  FS1 =              each vehicle
                               No. of vehicles
where:

FS1 =   facility score  using measure 1

RPX =   RPa  or RPb  as  appropriate


Measure  2  --  Reduction Relative to IM240 Outpoint

     The second measure calculates an emission reduction based on
the  average percent  emissions  reduction  for  failing  pollutants
relative to IM240  emissions  standards:


                         IM240 Standard  - Mass  emissions..,.  ......
                        (	(final test ) } X10Q
    5)  VS2 =  Failing pollutants	IM240 Standard - Cert. Std.	
                            Wo. of failing pollutants


where:

VS2 =                  vehicle score using measure 2

IM240 Standard =       Appropriate  IM240  standard for vehicle,
                       based on model year and vehicle category, as
                       described in EPA technical  guidance2

Mass emissions (flnal test) =     mass  emissions  for  HC,  CO,  or NOX
                             measured  in  first  IM240  retest  if
                             passing  or  final   IM240   retest  if
                             vehicle fails first  retest
    2U.S. EPA.  April  1994.   High-Tech I/M Test Procedures, Emission
Standards, Quality Control Requirements, and Equipment  Specifications.  Final
Technical Guidance.  Report no.  EPA-AA-EPSD-IM-93-1.



                              A4  -  4

-------
Cert. Std. =               New Car Certification Standards

     As with the first measure, the REI can be greater than 100%
for vehicles repaired to below the new car  certification standard.
Also,  all vehicles  including  waivered vehicles  which  are not
repaired  to the  IM240  cutpoints  must be included.   In addition,
purge and pressure test failures are not  included.

     However,   with  this  measure  initial  emissions  are  not
considered. Also, all vehicles  which are not successfully repaired
to  the  IM240  standard for a pollutant  would  receive a negative
score for that pollutant,  even  if emissions were reduced relative
to the initial emissions levels.   Nonetheless,  a vehicle which is
not successfully repaired could still get  positive  scores  for the
other pollutants, if they were  initially above  the  IM240 standard
and were reduced below the standard by repairs.  Since a negative
score is  assigned  for  any pollutant  which is  not reduced to the
IM240 standard, repair facilities would be more heavily penalized
for unsuccessful repairs  with  this scoring method than with the
first method.

     Once again a retest penalty  can be applied. An overall  score
for each  facility  using this measure  can be  then calculated as
follows:

                           y (VS2 * RP )   .   , . ,
                  r \   r-ioi   *"         x each vehicle
                  o)  EbZ - 	
                              No. of vehicles
where:

FS2 =   facility score  using measure 2

RPX =   RPa or RPb as appropriate


Computation of Repair Effectiveness  Index  (REI)

     The REI is computed from the following equation:

               7) REI =  (FS1)*(WF1)   +  (FS2)*(WF2)

where:

FS1 and FS2 =     facility   scores  using  measures  1  and 2,
                  respectively

WF1 and WF are weighting factors.  Recommended values are:

WF1 = 0.50
WF2 =0.50


                             A4 - 5

-------
These factors  give  equal  weighting between a  shop's  ability to
achieve large emission reductions,  and a shop's ability to reduce
emissions significantly below the  IM240 cutpoint.  Since waivered
car results are also included,  those  shops  that not only fix cars
to well below the cutpoint, but also get maximum reductions from
any waivered cars will get the highest scores.

Time Weighted Averaging of Data

A concern with simple  averages of  data over time  is  that as the
sample size grows, the  effect of recent data is overwhelmed by the
large amount of historical data.   Thus,  a  simple  average of the
repair statistics may  not  provide  an accurate indication of the
current performance of any given repair shop.

     A weighted moving average can be  used to create  a weighted
average of past and  current values  of a time series of data.  Such
an  approach  could be  useful  in compiling repair  effectiveness
statistics, such as REI's, and other statistics  as  discussed in
Section 4.4.  A weighted moving average  could be  used to weight
current repair effectiveness  data  more heavily than  older data.
This approach  should benefit  the  repair  facilities  since repair
performance  is expected  to  improve  over  time  as  the  repair
facilities gain  experience in repairing vehicles that  fail the
IM240 test.  This  approach  also "smooths" the  data, so that it is
less sensitive to short term deviations.

     Data can  be  weighted  by  applying an  exponential  smoothing
constant.  This smoothing constant, or weight, w,  is selected so
that w is between 0 and 1.  Then the exponentially smoothed series,
E  is calculated as  follows:
                  - w)El

                  - w)E2
     Et = wYt +  (I - w)Et_l

     Table  A4-1  presents  a  series   of  monthly  REI's  for  a
hypothetical repair facility over  one  year.   The monthly scores
were chosen such that the repair effectiveness of this hypothetical
facility  improves  dramatically over  a year.   An  exponentially
smoothed series,  using a weight of 0.75, applied to the most recent
three months of data,  would be calculated as follows:
                             A4 - 6

-------
     EMar = (YJan + YFeb +  YMar)/3  = 42.00

     EApr = 0.75*[(YFeb +  YMar + YApr)/3]  + (1 - 0.75)*EMar
        =  0.75*[(42  + 45 + 38)/3]  + (1 - 0.75)42.00 = 41.75

     EMay = 0.75M(YMar +  YApr + YMay)/3]  + (1 - 0.75)*EApr
        =  0.75*[(45  + 38 + 47)/3]  + (1 - 0.75)*41.75 = 42.94
     Table A4-1  lists  the monthly REI's for  each  month,  equally
weighted  average REI's,  using standard  averaging methods,  and
exponentially smoothed  REI's  using  a  weight of 0.75 (the average
score for the most recent three months accounts for 75 percent of
the exponentially smoothed REI).  An  equally weighted average is
used during  the  three  month start-up period,  with exponentially
smoothed REI's estimated beginning with the  fourth month of the
program.  These  data are  represented  graphically in Figure A4-1.
This figure illustrates  that, by using the weighted moving average,
the repair facility is getting more credit for recent improvements
in repair  performance  than it would  using a  standard averaging
method  to  calculate  a  cumulative  average REI.   As  mentioned
previously, this approach also "smooths" short term deviations in
the data.
                             A4  -  7

-------
Table A4-1.  Monthly REI's  for a repair facility, equally weighted
average REI's and exponentially smoothed REI's.
Exponential Smoothing Constant = 0.75
Month
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Monthly RE I
for Facility
39
42
45
38
47
59
64
70
50
45
80
79
Cumulative
Average RE I
39.00
40.50
42.00
41.00
42.20
45.00
47.71
50.50
50.44
49.90
52. 64
54.83
Exponentially
Smoothed RE I*
39.00
40.50
42.00
41.75
42.94
46.73
54.18
61.80
61.45
56.61
57.90
65.48
*An  equally  weighted  average  is  used  during  the  three month
start-up period,  with exponentially smoothed REI's estimated
                             A4 -

-------
beginning with the fourth month of the program.
                             A4 - 9

-------
        APPENDIX 5
Sample Repair Grading Form

-------
flf •••'•'• : ' •• ' ^:l|:"V:l^R-*5l|3;;slipSI;r:^ Shop Per f ormance
Paf: ?ip Codatif agg^W^ ll:? !'' '
-:IW^ ::- *fay :

Repair Shop A
1873 There St.
Anycity, 00145
(555)123-1234
Repair Shop B
4625 That St.
Anycity, 00141
(555)416-1234
Repair Shop C
976 Which St.
Anycity, 00142
(555)132-1234
Repair Shop D
2392 Where St.
Anycity, 00148
(555)123-1234
Number
submitted
for Retest
100
20
40
250
Percent
Passing 1st
retest
96%
98%
62%
99%
Yeiar of Your Vehicle: 1990
£f£ Category: 4 to 10 yeara
Percent
Receiving a
Waiver
2%
0%
5%
1%
Percent
Needing > 2
Retesta
2%
2%
33%
0%
Repair
Effect i veneaa
Index
68%
84%
35%
79%

-------
          APPENDIX  6
Draft Standardized Repair Forms

-------
APPROACH  1

-------
  :               DRAFT VERSION OF CV1240 REPAIR FORM
  .M:;iiR£? DOC              •        ,1,11.93
C
DRAFT VERSION OF IM240  REPAIR FORM
  Question =                                                        \ns\ver =

  1.    Was :ne root cause or' the problem mechanical or electrical electronic'
       ^ Mechanical- Proceed to Mechanical Section (question *4)           =\
       LJ Electncai/Electromc - Proceed to Electrical/Electronic Section iques. =2}   =1

  Electrical/Electronic Section

  2.    The root cause or" the problem was:
       >—! Sensor or Actuator - Proceed to Sensor/Actuator Section           =3
       —; Wiring or Connector to sensor or actuator- Proceed to question =5     =4
       i—i Battery/power supply or ground problem - Proceed to question ~5     =5
       LJ Control L'nit (ECM. PCM. Ignition Module, etc.) failure - Proceed
          to question tfi                                             46

       Sensors/Actuator Section
 3.    Which of the following was the root cause of the problem1

       O MAP Sensor                                               *7
       U Mass Air Flow Sensor                                       #8
       O Throttle Position Sensor/Switch                                #9
       U Oxygen Sensor                                             # 10
       U Engine Coolant Temp. Sensor                                 *ll
       Q Manifold Air Temp Sensor                                    # 12
       O Engine Speed Sensor                               .         #13
       Q Idle Actuator                                              #14
       U Fuel Injector/Mixture Control Solenoid                          # 15
       Qlgnition Secondary                                           #16
       O Purge Control Solenoid                                      # 17
       Q EGR Control Solenoid/Electronic EGR Valve Assy.                #18
       O AIR Control Solenoid                                       #19
       Qother                                                     #30
 Mechanical Section
 4. Which of the following was the root cause of the problem?:

-------
                 DRAFT VERSION OF FM240 REPAIR FORM
.MI-'REPDOC                        :;:•-                             .^.v-,
       r—\
       • — ' Engine Internal                                                =;;
       > — - Engine Ancillary                                               -22
       _' Cacaiyst                                                      =23
       — Fuel Pumo                                                    -24
       — ' Fuei Pressure Regulator                                         -25
       '• — .' Carburetor                                                    =26

       AIR System Section
       '• — ' AIR system vacuum supply                                      =27
       LJ AIR system control vaiva si                                     =23
       LJ .\JR system delivery hose or pipe                                 =29

       Purge System Section
       '• — ) Purge system vacuum supply                                    =30
       LJ Purge system control solenoid/ valve                               =3 1
       LJ Purge system delivery hose or pipe                                =32

       Pressure System Section
       LJ Pressure system valve(s)                                        ~33
       LJ Pressure system hose or pipe                                    *34
       Q Gas cap                                                      *35

       EGR System  Section
       U EGR vacuum supply                                            *36
       Q EGR valve                                                    *37
       LJ EGR vacuum control solenoid/device                             *38
       O EGR Passages in Engine                                        #39

Final Section

5. Were there multiple  or other secondary failures repaired as well as the root cause?
LJYes - List in decending order of emissions contribution the answer *'s from above that
       were repaired:
      _ _                           .                        #40c
      _                                                   #40d
       Repair Form now complete • Thank you!
ONO • Repair Form now complete • Thank you!

-------
APPROACH 2

-------
   1-Fuel System Repair
     General Area
     til Mr fitter
     112 Fuel Flta
     1l3fua1Pk«sam
     1t4 Vacuum teats
     116kteCln»l
     117
     1W Float C«»*l
      12IUC6ctand
      122 tamEMrt
     t23Chc*«C«ul
      124
,n
       129
       130

       131
       135
      I3SOpen
2 Emission System Rapau
 Catalytic Converter
   211 Efficiency
   212 Itedtanicaf
   213 Electric*
                         215 Open
    Air Injection
   2l6Vactun
   21? Mechanical
   2t&Etecirical
       PCV
   220 Cranfccasa Oil
   221 Vacuum
   222 Uactianical
   223 Missing
 Evaporative System
   224 Vacuum
   225 Itodiankal
   226 Elodiical
   227
       E6R
   228 Vacuum
   229 Itechanicai
   230 Electrical
   211 Missing
3 • ConftiUK System Rofxu
      ECU
   3(1Piom
   312 Cul Pak
   313 ECM
   314 MamoryRaset
   315 Open
      Sensors
   316 O2 Sensor
   31? Ten|)6fatt«tt
     319 Ambient
     320 Coolant
   321 Uap/Baio
   322 IPS
   323I4AF
   324 RPM |C amJCrank)
   325 Open
                                            Wiring Problems
                                             326 Conneclofs
                                             327 Broken Wiios
                     4 - Electrical System Ruf
                          General Area
                        4 It Basic Wiring
                        412 Baltuy
                        413 Mtonaio
                          Ignition
                        414
                        415
                         416
                         41fi
                         419
                        420 Secondly I tk*fc
                        421 Spait Plugs
                        422 Open
I ujitb Mudunic
  ttll' U:.l.«.ul
  61J M.»l»,i..J
 t)H Maitkil lituc.
  6l!j it*b,.j


   Rear Axle
 61/ ftido
 618 U
-------
         APPENDIX  7

Education Programs Offered by
  Non-Profit and Commercial
          Entities

-------
Appendix  7  —  EDUCATION  PROGRAMS  OFFERED  BY  NON-PROFIT  AND
COMMERCIAL ENTITIES

Coalition for Safer, Cleaner Vehicles  (CSCV)

     The  Coalition for  Safer,   Cleaner  Vehicles  (CSCV)   is  an
independent, non-profit organization of state officials, industry
and  consumer  groups that  has  provided assistance,  through  its
Education/Training Advisory Board,  on model  curriculum guidelines
and other issues.

     CSCV has initiated a national Train-the-Trainers program that
is targeted to public school automotive instructors. The objective
is to update instructors nationwide on emission testing, diagnosis,
and  repair.    The  instructors  are  exposed to  the  CSCV  model
curriculum,  examples  of available  education  programs,  facility
needs,  and  information on  how  to  develop  the program in their
local area.

     The CSCV Education/Training Advisory Board has  also developed
a series of guidelines that address technician education issues.
They are entitled:  National I/M Program Technician Training and
Support  Standards,  National In-Service Technician I/M Training
Program  Standards,  and a position  paper,  The Need for Effective
Technician Training.  For more information on these  guidelines and
other areas of education that CSCV  is involved in, contact CSCV:

          Coalition for Safer,  Cleaner Vehicles
          321 D Street NE
          Washington,  B.C.   20002
          202-543-4575

National Center for Vehicle Emissions Control and Safety (NCVECS),
Colorado State University

     The National Center for Vehicle Emissions Control and Safety
(NCVECS), at Colorado  State University, was established  in 1976 by
EPA funding to assist states across the nation in developing their
vehicle emissions control programs.   NCVECS  has developed its own
unique education programs,  which can be customized for different
areas,  to meet different backgrounds and needs.

     NCVECS offers two basic types of education options that depend
on the number of personnel  that require the  training and also how
much the organization  is willing to spend.  If there are a large
number of personnel requesting the  training, on-site training may
be desired.  Training  is designed and delivered based on specific
needs  or specific  I/M problems.   On-campus  training  involves
workshop/seminars that are  offered at the  NCVECS facility in Fort
Collins, CO.  These courses are more generic in design but offer
the advantage of  using NCVECS facilities.   A few of  the courses


                             A7 - 1

-------
offered  are:   Quality  Control  in Vehicle  Emissions  Inspection
Programs, A Guide for the Decentralized/Centralized Field Auditor;
Emission Control System Identification and Detection of Tampering;
Emissions Control Systems for the Non-Technical; Underhood Emission
Labels; Catalytic  Converters:  Theory of Operation and Functional
Diagnosis; and Understanding  Transient Driving Tests  and Their
Implications on I/M Programs.

     The NCVECS course "Understanding Transient Driving Tests and
Their Implications on I/M Programs"  is  specific to the IM240 test
procedure.   The  course covers:   the  Federal  Test  Procedure,
Understanding IM240 Transient Test Procedure, Evaporative System
Purge Test Procedure, and a Review of Actual IM240 Test Results.
The course was  conducted in Seattle and Denver in late 1993 and is
available to other areas.

     NCVECS,  under contract to EPA Office of Mobile Sources,  has
developed  two  additional  education  materials.    A new  course,
"Understanding  Transient  Testing  and  the  Challenges  in  the
Automotive Service Industry" was  designed to train the trainer.
This  8-12  hour  course  is  specifically directed  toward  the
understanding  of   IM240 methodology,  testing  procedures,  and
results.  This  includes an understanding of mass emissions and the
difference between traditional concentration measurements  (raw vs.
diluted), and understanding of how mass emissions are calculated,
how  the  FTP  relates  to  the  IM240,  and how  the  garage analyzer
relates  to  the lane  analyzer.    It also  covers  purge/pressure
procedures, common failures and fixes as well as HC,  CO,  and NOx
diagnostic and repair strategies.

       The  second   product  of  the NCVECS work  for  EPA was  the
development of a video that  focuses on the interaction(s)  between
the EGR/AIR/catalytic converter in the reduction of NOx emissions.
The  video  assists  instructors  and technicians  in  the  effective
repair of vehicles that  fail NOx  standards by understanding the
chemistry  involved  in  NOx  formation.    It  also  explores  the
differences in traditional BAR-4 gas  measurement techniques versus
mass emission measurement techniques employed by the IM240.

     For more information on existing NCVECS education programs and
the programs that can be customized, contact NCVECS:

          National Center of Vehicle Emission Control  and Safety
          Colorado State University
          Fort Collins,  CO  80523
          303-491-7240

New Hampshire Automotive Education Foundation, Inc.

     In New Hampshire,  500  individuals  and corporations formed in
1986 a non-profit industry supported foundation, the New Hampshire

                             A7 - 2

-------
Automotive Education Foundation, Inc. The primary emphasis of this
program  has  been  to  implement reforms  in secondary  and  post-
secondary  education programs.   The Foundation  has  established
manufacturer  specific  automotive  programs  at  three  two-year
colleges.  Working  with  educators,  the  Foundation has developed
common curriculum for  a  college automotive  technology program and
has also established,  through a federal grant, a secondary multi-
year automotive  co-operative program that targets  at-risk high
school students.   The  Foundation encourages all school automotive
programs to become NATEF certified.

     A second initiative  was to focus on increasing enrollments in
automotive technology programs at the post-secondary level.  The
Foundation developed  a  scholarship/loan  program, funded by the
automotive industry,  that  offers  qualified students  an interest
free loan  to pay expenses  for  a  two year Automotive  Associate
Degree Program.  The Foundation facilitates the scholarship/loan
program and member  dealerships provide the money to  the student
they sponsor.  Loans  are forgiven over a  period  of  time  if the
student graduate  continues to work for the  sponsoring dealership.
At  one  point, more than 60% of  the students in New Hampshire
Automotive Technology Programs were attending college under this
program.

     Other  Foundation  efforts  include  increasing  government,
educator's, and  the public's  awareness of  the  importance  of the
technological and educational achievement that is  needed to become
a skilled technician, finding ways  to improve students'  skills, and
attracting new people into the automotive technology field.  For
more information contact the  Foundation,  at 603-224-2369.

The Canadian Automotive Repair and Service (CARS) Council

     A  national   core  curriculum  for  the  Automotive  Service
Technician Apprenticeship Training  has  been  developed by  the
Canadian Automotive Repair and Service (CARS) Council.  The initial
draft of this  curriculum was  developed by  CARS  and subsequently
reviewed by  occupational  analysts of Employment  and Immigration
Canada,  the provincial/territorial authorities,  and the automotive
industry for  validation.  The core curriculum  is organized into 14
blocks that divide the training,  with each block subdivided into
tasks and sub-tasks. Each task provides enabling objective(s) that
key in on the  skills and knowledge that an individual must acquire
to perform that task adequately.

     Each provincial/territorial  jurisdiction rated the sub-tasks
and applied percentage ratings to  blocks and tasks.  If  70% of the
responding jurisdictions perform  the sub-task,  it was considered
part of the common core  curriculum.   The Interprovincial Red Seal
examinations are  based on the common  core identified through this
validation process.


                             A7 - 3

-------
     The  14  blocks of  training are  as  follows:  safety  in  the
workplace, work  practices  and  procedures,   internal  combustion
engines,  fuel  systems,  engine  management  systems,  electrical,
electronic    and     vacuum    control     systems,     automatic
transmissions/transaxles,   manual   transmission/transaxles   and
transfer cases,  differentials (front and rear), drive shafts and
drive  axles,  braking  systems  steering  and  suspension  systems,
cooling  systems  and  climate  control,  diagnosis  and repair  of
occupant safety systems, and body hardware and  trim  (external and
internal) .  For more information on this  education program and the
validation process contact:

          The Canadian Automotive Repair and Service  (CARS) Council
          440 Laurier Ave.  West
          Ottawa,  Ontario  Canada  KIR 7X6

Aspire, Inc.

     Aspire,  Inc.  has  developed  modules  that  educate not only the
technicians  but  also  the  instructors.    The modules come  with
instructor guides, student  materials, video  tapes,  slides,  work
sheets, and lab demonstrations.   The program also includes a 100
question pre-course evaluation to be administered before the first
module and six individual subject evaluations to be administered at
the conclusion of  each  of  the six  subject modules.   The modules
attempt to correlate  proper education,  equipment,  and  hands-on
skill exercises to improved technician repair effectiveness.

     The basic  course  is divided into  six main  subject modules to
be  covered  in  approximately  40  hours  of   instruction.    The
individual  modules   are:     compression   principles,   air/fuel
principles,   electrical/electronic  systems,  ignition principles,
computer control  theory, and an I/M module  (in the final stages of
completion) .  Aspire,  Inc. has also developed programs for specific
states in order to educate  the technicians to meet the demands of
the new I/M programs.

     Aspire,  Inc.  has  also developed the  Technician Repair Network
(TRN)   which  is   a video  program  aimed  at   educating  service
technicians  in  enhanced I/M  areas.   The  TRN  show  series  will
produce and deliver, via closed-circuit satellite television,  new
programming every 90 days developed  around the IM240 service theme.
This is meant  to  be   a  supplement  to  the  formal IM240  education
program.  Aspire,  Inc. anticipates  a national  launch of the TRN's
IM240  education   program  series   in  October  1994.    For  more
information on either of the programs contact:

          Aspire,  Inc.
          U.S.  Highway One
          Morrisville, PA  19067
          215-295-0722


                             A7 - 4

-------
A7 - 5

-------
Delmar Publishers, Inc.

     Delmar Publishers,  as a member  of the  National  Education
Resource  Center  (formed by CSCV)  has been contributing  to the
effort to work with states in developing and adopting effective I/M
training programs.  Delmar, in conjunction with a state,  has in the
past and is presently customizing its material to meet the specific
needs of the states requesting  Delmar's services. Delmar's support
material  includes:    student/technician textbooks,  workbooks,
videotapes,  slides,   and  instructor   guide   books.    For  more
information about Delmar's I/M materials and services contact:

          Delmar Publishers Inc.
          3 Columbia Circle
          P.O.  Box 15015
          Albany,  NY  12214-5511
          800-998-7498

Automotive Student Service Educational Training Program  (ASSET) -
Ford Motor Company

     The   Ford  Motor  Company's  Automotive   Student  Service
Educational Training (ASSET) Program is a partnership between Ford
Motor  Company,  Ford  and Lincoln-Mercury  dealers,  and a  local
community  college/technical  school.    It is  a  two-year program
designed to educate entry level service technicians for Ford and
Lincoln-Mercury dealerships.

     This   two-year   program   is  divided   into  two   parts.
Approximately 9 to 12  weeks in  the  classroom  is alternated with
another 9 to 12 weeks  of full-time work (with pay)  at a sponsoring
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealership.  The  education is specific to
the current Ford and Lincoln-Mercury line of vehicles and includes
all automotive systems.  The student technicians must also study
technical  mathematics,  applied  physics,  English,  and  social
studies.  For more information on the ASSET program and a listing
of the community college/technical schools that offer this program
contact:

          Ford Motor Company
          Parts and Services  Division
          3000 Schaefer Road
          P.O.  Box 1902
          Dearborn, MI  48121

Automotive  Service Educational  Program  (ASEP)  -  General  Motors
Corporation

     The  General  Motors Automotive Service Educational Program
(ASEP)  is a program  very  similar to  that   of the Ford  Motor
Company's ASSET Program.  It alternates education at a community

                             A7 - 6

-------
college, working in close association with the GM training center,
with  that  of  work  experience  at a  GM dealership.   For  more
information contact:

          GM Training Center Operation
          GM Service  Technology Group
          30501 Van Dyke Avenue
          Warren, MI   48090

          ATTN: National College Coordinator
          810-947-9600
Allen Test Products Division

     Allen Test Products has education centers throughout the U.S.
and offers a course in  underhood systems that covers carburetion,
fuel injection, emissions control and exhaust gas analysis.  For
more information,  contact:

          Allen Test Products Division
          8001 Angling Road
          Kalamazoo, MI   49002
          Phone: 616-329-7600
          FAX:   616-329-7714

Target Training Systems, Inc.

     Target  Training  Systems,  Inc.  is  one  of  the  largest
independent automotive education companies in the United States,
conducting classes  in  all  50 states.  Target  Training does not
promote specific equipment or parts, but teaches its courses using
a  wide  range  of  equipment.   Target  Training states  that  its
training relates the automotive function of a sensor to  the testing
of that sensor and also  teaches troubleshooting techniques that can
find problems even when the computer control  systems indicate that
there is no problem.

     Target  Training  publishes specialized  advanced  automotive
technology manuals  and produces companion individualized videos.
Target Training states  that  its training manuals are not reprints
of  factory  service manuals, but  represent   the  test  procedures
developed by  Target's  staff  of technical  instructors.  They are
presently developing  a course  that is  specific  to  the  IM240.
Target Training has also worked with the ASA  of Texas to develop a
program that sorts  the technicians by skill  level and allows the
skilled  technicians to  proceed  at  a  faster pace.    For  more
information contact:

          Target Training Systems, Inc.
          751 Main Street East


                             A7 - 7

-------
          Owatonna,  Minnesota  55060
          507-451-6231
Mitchell International

     Mitchell's  Technical  Information Program  currently  offers
courses in driveability diagnostics  for  Acura,  Honda,  and Mazda
fuel  injected  vehicles,  and  Ford,  General Motors  and Chrysler
carbureted, CFI,  and PFI equipped vehicles.   These courses include
instruction  in  use of  scan  tools   and waveform  diagnostics.
Mitchell also  offers  a course  module specifically on use  of a
laboratory oscilloscope and waveform diagnosis.  In 1995, Mitchell
plans to have  a  course on advanced  engine  performance covering
understanding domestic fuel injection systems
Additional Education Programs

     The information in  the  following table  was  excerpted from
Motor magazine's 1993  and  1994 Source  Guides.    The  following
information on education programs is  provided  for reference only.
EPA does not  endorse any particular program and makes no claims on
the accuracy of  the data.

     The following companies  were selected by  EPA, from the Motor
magazine list,  on the basis that they can  provide education in all
of the  following areas:   electrical/electronic  systems,  engine
control  systems,  engine  repairs,  and emission  control systems.
These are  areas  that  will  be key to the  successful  repair  of
vehicles failing the IM240 test.
                             A7 -

-------
Company
AATS, Inc.
AC -Del co
APA Management Group
Automotive Marketing
Assn .
Automotive Service
Assn. (ASA)
Big A Auto Parts
CARQUEST
Ford Parts and Services
Division
GM Aftermarket
Lincoln Technical
Institute
MOTOR Publications
NAPA
NAPA Institute of
Automotive Technology
OTC Div. , SPX Corp.
Pronto
Universal Technical
Institute
Wyoming Technical
Institute
Contact Number
716-671-0320
313-464-5404
913-384-4300
615-361-7914
817-283-6205
Contact local Big A
store
914-332-1515
800-782-4356
517-754-6901
201-736-9340
800-428-6867
Contact local NAPA
store or 800-292-
6428
Contact local NAPA
store or 800-292-
6428
800-533-6127
217-544-7400
602-271-4174
800-521-7558
Type of Training Available
central school (s), local
clinics, audio-visual and
printed material
central school (s), local
clinics, and printed
material (correspondence
courses )
local clinics, audio-visual
and printed material
local clinics, audio-visual
and printed material
central school (s), local
clinics, audio-visual and
printed material
local clinics, audio-visual
and printed material
central school (s), local
clinics, audio-visual and
printed material
central school (s), local
clinics, audio-visual and
printed material
central school (s) and local
clinics
central school
printed materials
central school (s), local
clinics, audio-visual and
printed material
audio-visual and printed
material (self-study
courses )
local clinics, audio-visual
and printed material
local clinics and audio-
visual material
central school (s) and local
clinics
central school (s) and local
clinics
A7 - 9

-------
         APPENDIX  8

      Other  Sources  of
Education/Reference Materials

-------
Appendix 8 — OTHER SOURCES OF EDUCATION/REFERENCE MATERIALS

Drake Training and Technologies

     Drake Training and Technologies  is  an independent company that
develops   technician   education  and   certification   testing  in
conjunction with the  interested organization.  Drake Training and
Technologies works with the organization  to establish a certification
test and implement the testing system,  as well as develop a computer-
based  education  program,  both  of which  assist  organizations  to
educate and  certify their  workforce.   Drake offers its consulting
services at  all  stages of the program, including needs  analysis,
course development, certification test preparation, and certification
scheduling.  For more information on  these  services contact:

          Drake Training and Technologies
          8800 Queen Avenue South
          Minneapolis,  MN  55431
          1-800-233-8908

Automotive Training Managers Council's  (ATMC) Aftermarket Training
Guide

     The Automotive Training Managers Council's  (ATMC)  Aftermarket
Training Guide  supplies the names and  information for  almost 200
manufacturer associations.  For each manufacturer association, the
guide provides the name  of the training manager,  and the address and
phone  number  for  training   information.     Actual   educational
opportunities  are  listed  under   eight categories:    underhood,
undercar, paints/PBE, equipment/tools,  chemicals, management, machine
shop, and accessories.   For further information  and/or to receive a
copy of this training guide contact:

          ATMC
          13505 Dulles Technology Drive
          Herndon,  VA  22071-3415
          703-713-3800
Equipment and Tool Institute  (ETI) Member Training Directory

     The Equipment and Tool Institute  (ETI) Member Training Directory
supplies the names and  training information for 26 manufacturers,
suppliers,  associations,  and  schools.   The  directory provides the
names of the training managers,  and the  addresses and phone numbers
for  training  information.   Actual educational  opportunities are
offered under a  variety of categories,    including  most underhood
areas (including diagnostics), most undercar areas, accessories, and
body repair.  For further information and/or to receive a copy of
this training directory contact:
                              A8 - 1

-------
          Equipment and Tool Institute,  Inc.
          1806 Johns Drive
          Glenview, IL  60025-1657
          708-729-8550

National Education Resource Center  (NERC)

     The Coalition  for  Safer,  Cleaner Vehicles  (CSCV)  formed the
National Education Resource Center (NERC)  to ensure that I/M programs
have the support and resources that they need to be  successful.  The
purpose  of  the  NERC    is  to  provide  information  on integrated
educational programs, materials and support services to assist states
and industry  in  the implementation  and  operation of I/M programs.
For more information on the NERC contact the NERC at the following
temporary address:

          NERC
          3  Columbia Circle
          P.O. Box 15015
          Albany, NY  12212-5015

Society of Automotive Engineers  (SAE)

     The  Society  of  Automotive   Engineers  (SAE)   is  offering
recommended  practices  for  developing   and  assessing  automotive
technician education.  SAE J-2017, Developing Technician Training, is
addressed to  the  developers  and outlines  a  systems  approach to
improve the  ability of  technicians to troubleshoot, diagnose, repair,
and service  vehicles.  SAE J-2018, Assessing Technician Training, is
addressed  to  users  and  considers  ways  to  improve  technician
performance in the service bay and how to determine  the best ways to
meet specific needs.  For more information, contact Charles Probst,
415-493-1865  or  Dr. Ken  Cerny,  313-280-0900,  co-chairs of the SAE
Technician Training Committee.   To purchase copies of these papers
contact:

          SAE Publications
          400 Commonwealth Drive
          Warrendale,  PA  15096-0001
          412-776-4841
          FAX:  412-776-1830

National Tire Dealers and Retreaders Association (NTDRA)

     The National  Tire Dealers  and  Retreaders  Association (NTDRA)
publishes a  Video Training Network Directory  that  lists  over 400
training tapes from 63 firms, including its own  tire mounting  and
                              A8 - 2

-------
repair videos.  The Directory also  contains  a  description of each
tape.   The Directory can be ordered,  for  a  nominal  cost,  from the
address below:

          NTDRA
          1250 I Street NW
          Suite 400
          Washington,  DC  20005
          202-789-2300
                              A8 - 3

-------